Home

Teamdesk User Manual

1. 62 i eM COP MO NS E E 62 Era estero ia EN E ERU 63 DS PO SEMIN ems C Oner MEME m 63 3419 Linking tems to verion COMMON AA e e e OESTE Rb ce uc E 64 33 20 Planned values andaca CO EEE itc didus 64 P E ea E E E E E E A EN E E 9 68 O Poo kta EN E m 69 3 4 1 System filter and your filters eene tette t ettet 70 342 Using predefined e 71 O L P iaa 72 dad Fer TE POSO Nes e TR RR m m T m 77 ho equo s cT C M H 3 ODIA Mm 74 TNO NC ee FCS dem od as atm 75 Ae Perra a i Em 5 bk poles alo y E e X 76 34 10 Applying an nistant aan 77 O A 77 APEE E ce OS UA VALS NN EROR 81 34 19 Creaung s Tp Ter MV iia 82 A 84 Bc WIS Ved A PPP A 86 2 91 Navigator letales MLS 86 3 5 2 Navigator right area MOS sica aiii ii 87 2o Gened right area Denia sh ptu Hou RS 88 5 E ooo TO CNN 89 o MERE ET 94 3 6 Configuring AUTOMA ilsien rre 96 2 0 Coniquiing ato mal ana 96 3502 COW MOU auto mall CCOPICEUONIS ada 97 30 2 Assigning autora migger and CONCISO 98 3 7 Generating Calendar URES veian inca 99 2O WONO WITT CO ra 100 Na polos o uut 101 o tle sty danas m mmm 101 O ea e e REN RR e E I 115 310 Preparing ano generada ANA 116 LUE IM PO te gal 11 ECONO O PO CO N II E E T 116 O o O O IN 116 SNA o A o BE US OO E 117 AESAC OUN TEO RR 117 4 Teamaesk f
2. if isDeleteComment subjectPatternKey item mail if isOtherChanged subjectPatternKey item mail if isManagerChanged subjectPatternKey item mail if isResponsibleChanged subjectPatternKey item mail if isDateChanged subjectPatternKey item mail if isMove subjectPatternKey item mail if isStateChanged subject subject subject subject subject subject subject subject 226 sacdConmen editComment deleteComment VEIT managerChanged Pesponsrblechesmged dateChange move 5 18 Managing e mail templates subjectPatternKey item mail subject stateChange if isClose subjectPatternKey item mail subject closed if isReopen subjectPatternKey item mail subject reopen if isCreated isCopy subjectPatternKey item mail subject new String changeDetail Object subjectArguments workItemKey for new synopsis newStateLabel for state change newProjectLabel changeDetail LocalizeUtil getParametrizedString subjectPatternKey subjectArguments actualLocale return changeDetail 227 Managing the system Topics System manager tasks overview Managing regular users Managing clients Managing groups Managing organizational units Managing cockpit templates Importing data Exporting data from Teamdesk Using the
3. To add or edit e mail templates go to Administration Customize E mail templates 222 5 18 Managing e mail templates o Y iL R L4 Cockpit linee enorkapeced Find Boma Regesta Aaminn wr Create iem Ju My settings ri a O Ju Mytting b lj Workspaces 9 Gota mad termpiate asegre l assign mail template to events by de amp qj Dem type ses senses R Usera A groups H Ee jl r E N b e X gH Y Y atomin T Manage view filters iri EZ Wok E t y Action re ba Roper templates tE T Manage ven ibers E Manage server y Upe roles T Cost conters amp accounts Uie role fy Bem cha 3 i a Bisigat a ted tre A cisne y Wwe ibort he a Aoma Nas cca ed Eustem lorma la Link types Wekcomo A Custom falda za Ciber lonr Forgot cd Lleta T Cion fida Remedies E System statuses W E Workspace types sz Woi GE Locale editor BP Piob y E mail templabes E ee odiar eripi You will see the standard e mail templates that come with Teamdesk There are a number of predefined events that trigger e mails These are Create item Modify item like edit or move Change budget or planned values of an item Add a comment Furthermore there are a number of system events that trigger e mail These are Welcoming a new user after he has registered e Forgot password e mail Reminder e mail of due or overdue tasks You assign templates either globally or specific for an item type o
4. 1 From the item overview click on the Edit action icon 2 Onthe screen that appears select the description field 3 Click on the second icon from the right of the editor menu or enter the item you want to link to like item 4711 You can add as many links as you want In case you click on the icon an item picker box appears You can filter here and select the proper item by clicking on its item number 63 Teamdesk for team members 4 The link will be rendered as shown below Title I need a title with Umlaut To create a direct inline link to another issue just type380 Removing a parent item sends 14 same notification mails You can also use the second icon from the right to select an issue from a list Description 5 Save the item with all changes You have created an inline link to another item in the system By clicking on the link rendered in the reports and previews you can go to the linked item 3 3 19 Linking items to version control Teamdesk can integrate with version control software If you want to link files from version control to an item just add the item number preceded with a hash to the commit comment when committing your items to your version control repository If your project administrator has setup the project appropriately a new tab will appear named Version control All file revisions related to this item will appear on that tab Relationship is created by adding tags
5. Customue DD Actions Mare you can configure a connection to a version control system the GR or Subversion Furthermore you can configure a repository web browser to directly view files or file sets t 3 Inthe second navigation column click on Version control A Oreste tem v Cereal optons Connection type User name Server name Repository path Server port Configuration Authentication Password Attention The version control node will only be available of the space type for this space supports A Tacke System Adriano Help Log off track kem in this application ViewC 9 http fogi bin viewvc cgi SVN INSTANCE revision rev Kviews rev http SERVER cgi bin viewwc cgi SVN INSTANCES peth revision rev amp view maria herp SERVER eg bin viewve co SVN INSTANCES path revision 4 rev amp view mari htzp SERVER cgi bin viewvc cg SVN INSTANCE path revision rev view maria htzp SERVER cgi bin viewvc cg SVN INSTANCES path pathrev rev 1 amp view mar mmo mps 9 anish t Y Detaut Custom Anonymous V Password Public Private Key of Test 4 Select one of the supported version control systems in this case Subversion The list may vary Additional systems can be supported via plug ins 5 Select aversion control web viewer if you have any installed Teamdesk directly supports viewVC WebSVN and Sventon With a version control web viewer you w
6. For events generated by users Teamdesk can send e mails either under the name of the user e g From Joe DoegdoeJones com or under its own e mail address e g From TracksystemedoeJjones com You can set this parameter as you wish However some SMTP servers require that the From address matches the SMTP user name In this case you are forced to check this box Testing your configuration You can enter your e mail address in the field provided and send yourself an e mail from the Teamdesk server to check if the configuration works Limiting number of simultaneous SMTP connections Some SMTP servers only accept a few connections from the same client To limit the number of simultaneous SMTP connections by Teamdesk set the following in the GeneralSettings Properties file in the TRACKPLUS_HOME directory limitSMTPconnections on You need to restart the server when you want to make a change here effective 2 3 Incoming e mail connection Teamdesk can receive e mails and create from them new items or add information to existing items To this end Teamdesk acts like any standard e mail client like Outlook or Thunderbird and needs to know how to connect to a mailbox on an POP3 or IMAP mail server Mail server protocol There are two popular e mail protocols to communicate with a mailbox IMAP Here you can select which one you prefer Your server has to offer the protocol you select here Many servers offer even both at the same
7. My url Ling Projects Customize Actions mes ps Hlanage server dn b Automal aczsigraments aa Users amp groups u Generate Calerdar LL s binds 2 Select the tab labeled Access data ta Sin Mic ilala Bauruiuler eri Mher selling Login ani gmail er naia harman 3 LDA e E mal address hermanribbosch com o Harm vil larisa Last n Hasse First u Hamari Preferred Language Engish ro e rone Central European Summer Time Europej erin ied 3 Choose your preferred user interface language settings Browser means that your browsers preferred language settings are being used if that language is available 4 Click on the Save button in the tool bar to save your configuration You will now see the user interface in the selected language If set to Browser your preferred language setting may not be available Furthermore you will receive notification e mails in the servers default language Teamdesk for team members 3 2 11 Setting a replacement person You can set a replacement person when you are on leave That person will get all your item access rights will be informed on all your items and can act on your behalf 1 In the top toolbar select Administration gt My profile gt My settings k L minina e Create inm s7 JM oyscttings f Projects Aoma aszigrenents py ME Users amp groups C Generate iCalendar UBL fei 79 Customize tare fet A
8. S Title SITP vspace 2mm newline ITP color tpbluetsi Description SITP end framed op o9 oe op oP oe o o o Assuming some values for the various variables the final LaTeX code would look like this begin framed href mydomain com printItem action key 4711 textbf color tpred My Project MP 234 Test case TRX 46 vspace 2mm newline color tpblue Here goes the description of the test case 288 8 7 Creating LaTeX Freemarker templates end framed Now we define some Freemarker makros and some localized strings we can conveniently use later on Note that outside of makros we have to escape signs with a backslash A AddToShipoutPicture put 30 280 rotatebox 90 scalebox 0 8 Copyright 9 the year A S licenseHolder All rights reserved fancyfoot C NS Title begin document P lt if locale has_content locale de gt P renewcommand StrRequirements Anforderungen P renewcommand StrDate Datum renewcommand StrPriority Prioritat P renewcommand StrStatus Status P renewcommand StrPage Seite P lt if gt o o o o o o H Fa HH z H HAH oe o oe oe oe o oe oo oe oe oo oe oe oe o P lt fmacro mDate gt T SSTP lt if MeetingDate has_content gt SSTP S MeetingDate SSTP lt else gt SSTP S now date SSTP lt if gt T o o o P lt tmacro gt oe oo o o o o HH FU P lt macro
9. watcher list 61 300 webservice SSL 25 Wiki document 282 document section 282 export 285 255 787 folder 282 Freemarker template 285 287 generate PDF 285 287 LaTeX export 285 287 LaTeX template 285 287 MS Word export 285 285 MS Word template 285 285 navigator 282 work add 67 work breakdown structure view mode 87 workflow UML 36 workflow action 36 workflow activity 36 workflow event 36 workflow state 36 workspace assign account 133 automail assignments 134 cockpit template 135 copy 125 create 122 delete 124 lists 131 state flag 126 206 Status 126 template 126 workspace picker 174 workspace type export 246 restrict child workspace types 208 restrict item types 208 restrict priorities 208 restrict severities 208 restrict statuses 208 workspace types 40 X XSLT report template 116 301 302
10. Changed Ey Corra Guest Jahn iiey abest moda Tracks Testprejeet 2434 emet Co mmitied ie fried affected files E Aranc n breeches A rg o dl Areri Irsckplurk die ck THM dde tegrated rbd no Tracks Teelprajest 4198 Tris tie wia ecitid agn bo rn los Bert noddicabon for ieu 63004 just for beri purpores Trend 7 15 Configuring Apache Tomcat When exposing your Teamdesk installation to the internet it is usually best to work with an Apache HTTP server or IIS server as a front end to Teamdesk When you support other applications not running on the same Tomcat server as Teamdesk but via the same Apache HTTP server you can still use single sign on without having to install a big SSO solution Teamdesk requires more memory than the default installations of Apachee Tomcat provide On Linux systems these settings can be modified as follows in file etc default tomcat7 or etc default tomcat8 JAVA OPTS 2 Djava awt headless true DJENKINS HOME home jenkins N DTRACKPLUS HOME home trackplus DLATEX HOME usr bin MA XX PermSize 384M XX MaxPermSize 550M Xms512M Xmx1624M N XX UseConcMarkSweepGC On Windows system you can add these parameters in the Tomcat manager application To operate Teamdesk on a Tomcat server behind an Apache web server you need to consider the following configuration items 1 Locate your Apache web server configuration file httpd conf is the standard name L
11. Description Releases with an active state are open to the entire functionality the system offers These releases appear in the Released noticed as well as the Release scheduled selection boxes Typically such releases are under active development Releases with an inactive state cannot be selected in the Release scheduled selection box However they will show up in the Release noticed box Such releases have typically been published and hence no new items can be scheduled for them any more Releases with a planned state cannot be selected in the Release noticed selection box However they will show up in the Release scheduled box Such releases are typically plans for the future Releases with a closed state will not appear in either the Released scheduled or Release noticed selection box Such releases have typically been published some time ago and are not supported any more Warning Changing the release status may make releases inaccessible 4 4 Managing workspace specific lists In Teamdesk you can configure any number of custom lists You can make these lists available to all workspaces or just to a specific workspace Items that contain a custom list property will have one of the preconfigured values of the lists you define For example you could have lists with operating systems drawing numbers serial numbers or customers You could have a list with system components or just tag items with the loca
12. Figure 8 14 Example for embedding the Wiki in a web site 8 9 Document versioning tba This section explains how Teamdesk manages document versions Any item can be tagged that is put into a collection together with other items Documents and document sections can be versioned The elements of such versions can be modified without affecting other versions Different versions can be merged back into a single version Revisions All items exist in revisions A revision defines the item with all its property values at a certain moment in time As property values are changed new revisions are created as shown below Revision 1 Revision 2 Revision 3 Req R1 Req R1 Req R1 Value 3 Value 5 ti t2 Time t3 Figure 8 15 Item revisions Tags A tag constitutes a collection of items with a specific revision The dates associated with the item revisions may differ A tag can collect items with revisions spanning an arbitrary time period The figure below shows an example where Tag 2 differs from Tag 1 in the revisions it uses for requirements R1 and R2 Tag 3 drops item R2 and uses new revisions for R1 and R3 292 8 9 Document versioning tbd Tag 3 Value 3 Value 5 Compl 2 Req R2 Rev 3 Malue 2 Compl 2 Req R3 Rev 2 Value 5 Value s Compl 4 Compl 4 Compl 4 d t2 Ti
13. an interactive Gantt view and an agile board From the item area you can perform mass operations on a selected set of items like closing all of them or changing a date or assigning them to somebody else 2 5 2 Filters Filters are used by queries and reports to define a set of items based on a set of criteria Filters limit the set of items that are either passed to a query for display in the item navigator or for display in a report document Filters form the last stage in the permission system Filters can have parameters When you run a query based on such a filter you will be asked to fill in the actual value for that parameter This permits to define complex queries where just one or two criteria change from time to time 38 2 5 Queries filters views and reports All items in the database System filter based on roles and permissions ltem filter Visible items Figure 2 13 Item filtering structure Related Links Permissions on page 27 Permissions control what information can be accessed Permissions are tied to roles By assigning roles to users in spaces you define the users permissions in that space 2 5 3 Reports With reports you can obtain any information from the Teamdesk database in almost any conceivable format like graphics PDF Word HTML XML or Excel While you work with queries all the time you create reports typically just once in a while Reports are based on datasource
14. border bottom lpx solid 2939038 Important border top lpx solid 2989d8 important myCustom westTreeNavigator table x grid row selected td background image none background color 2989d8 color ELELEL important 29 The Teamdesk Wiki Login Holna 0715104 2580 G solesfitruopks com tra ck mi Produkte 9899 Erfcigsgeschichten 4 amp Preise B service MA beruns TH Events x Spechem e fear beter beenden d Dectronics Develupment Vienn Innen cese Stueaionon baxannt vormmmen iehnt es sich for Cea welterzulesen Sie lemen Methaden Nannan de hen Ul Soum tes Tracking reiten nro Ae Her su panen zu steven und m honer Adu su wiesen wo Sie sienen a Tis Management 1 2 Aufgaben Vorg nge und Projekte 49 2 8 X c g 9 Herrschaft und berblick Den bet ck behake GO wichtigsten Actis aldo im Proicktmanagathont PM aiid in Abb 1 1 cargos PFagaben Vonsdnge u 7 x Deobachies und Stil Umtang Planen Beobachten Schlielen Und ves habe A dum Wioran cheer es Der Sar unter den PI Hutin et bl ot T Par Abbildung 1 1 Deren des Poire agamer n deser Publkabon konditie wir uris au de Dengicoe de in Progen oen glen Aufwand ertorcerm und in jedem Fal nonwenda sind Das end die Felder t Aa cern Parma mecbacttung urr aneuenung ces Proeecs Diese Aktivit ren eine entecneieend for den Proekteriog Die anderen Beriene haben enenfals ime Bedeutung sind jedoch men untorsuteoncder Natur
15. button in the toolbar area Responsible Prigrrty 16 Assign the new form to an action For this go to menu Administration gt Customize gt Custom forms gt Forms assignment When you call up the action you will see your newly designed screen You can modify the layout of your new screen any time if you are not satisfied Main Watchers Time and cost Issue Mo Fa Creabed 120407 2 08 FM Onpgin tor Administrati Track System Raspansibla Supebrt Track Manager i Administrator Track Eystem PEGG Parent Child 1 1 Tile Wie have reaind a ciem form here 000 A EA Ge CN oe 0 Description This ip a nes small farm Modifying custom forms This section describes how to modify existing custom forms You must be logged in as system manager or system administrator 1 In the top toolbar selectAdministration gt Customize gt Forms Customizing Teamdesk Jy My settings ron Q Q Jy My settings gt hi I Standard l 4 a a Workspaces 9 1 assign forms to actions by draggine Upon p hem type spec form essignmer HE Users amp groups 0 0 2 TT Workspace type spec form as A Customize Y manage filters p BF Workspace spec form aire actions b Report templates TY Manage fiters 3 E Manage server dy User roles Cost centers amp accounts Vy User roles Action Ti Fo Cost centers A accounts Acan Mi a J Action fy Unk types ke hor CI onda um rere A Tem attributes Default
16. entityAttribute gt lt entityAttribute name objectID gt lt CDATA 1002 gt lt entityAttribute gt lt entityAttribute name description gt lt CDATA A list with customers gt lt entityAttribute gt lt entityAttribute name listType gt lt CDATA 3 gt lt entityAttribute gt lt entityAttribute name owner gt lt CDATA 1 gt lt entityAttribute gt lt entityAttribute name deleted gt lt CDATA N gt lt entityAttribute gt lt subEntityRelation parentAttributeName list type TOptionBean gt lt trackEntity entityld 1004 type TOptionBean gt lt entityAttribute name label gt lt CDATA Americas gt lt entityAttribute gt lt entityAttribute name CSSSTyle gt lt CDATA gt lt entityAttribute gt lt entityAttribute name symbol gt lt entityAttribute name objectID gt lt CDATA 1004 gt lt entityAttribute gt lt entityAttribute name isDefault gt lt CDATA N gt lt entityAttribute gt lt entityAttribute name sortOrder gt lt CDATA 2 gt lt entityAttribute gt lt entityAttribute name list gt lt CDATA 1002 gt lt entityAttribute gt lt entityAttribute name deleted gt lt CDATA N gt lt entityAttribute gt CrackEntaty gt lt trackEntity entityId 1009 type TOptionBean gt lt entityAttribute name label gt lt CDATA EMEA gt lt entityAttribute gt lt entityAttribute name CSSSTyle gt lt CDATA gt lt entityAttri
17. lt td align right bgcolor d8eled style width 26 gt S fieldChange localizedFieldLabel td lt if copy we are not interested in the change compared to the original workItem gt lt if fieldChange changed lt assign bgcolor bgcolorCellNormal lt else gt lt assign bgcolor bgcolorCellChanged gt Sq ut td bacolor S1bgacolor style width 3792 S fieldChange newShowValue lt td gt lt td bgcolor edf0f6 style width 37 gt S fieldChange oldShowValue lt td gt lt tr gt lt list gt lt macro gt The template engine gets a number of variables which it can render to the template The most import variable is fieldChangeRows It contains entries with an item property label the new property value the old property value and an indication of whether the value has changed The resulting e mail looks like shown below 224 5 18 Managing e mail templates 3 Track 1678 Track 4 x Status changed to implemented Number of ite Trackplus Tracker Lesemder Mirrwach 5 Juni 2013 11 18 Ae Tracks Sytem Admirobrabor Status changed to implemented Number of items opened va closed report not working properly Project Track 4 x 1678 trac Modified by Track System Administrator pm TI cp Project Track 4x Them type Problem Report Stsbus implemented opened Manager Friedrich Jing Ram Tamas Rel 4 0 backlog Bel 4 0 backlog Bricrity oreationally
18. suspended 1 0 The number of items in each category is given as an absolute figure in percent of the total number of items for that group and is visualized in form of a bar graph Late items are marked red in the bar graph You can click on any of the category descriptions e g a specific state in a specific release to obtain the list of items for that category Teamdesk for team members Managers list This tile gives you a quick overview on the number of open and closed items grouped by priority and grouped by responsible for each project The Panel The panel shows for each project grouped by priority and responsible the number of open items for each priority and responsible The number of items in each category is given as an absolute figure in percent of the total number of items for that group and is visualized in form of a bar graph Managers List Track s By priority immediate 21 MN 389 soon 1 NN e tcasionaly 15 NN 2755 By responsible Bojani Adrian Butter Carmel Ruff Tames 25 MU zo M 16 amp N 10 Figure 3 8 Managers list Late items are marked red in the bar graph You can click on any of the category descriptions a specific priority or a specific responsible to obtain the list of items for that category Status over time This powerful graphical tile permits you to visualize the development of your project over time The change in the number of items per state can be a good ind
19. to the database static WSTreeNode getProjectsAsTree Gets a tree structure of project label value beans see WSLabelValueBean protected static void TCLFacadeException e Simple Handler for TCLFacadeException static void help Opens a browser with the help for this class static Java Lando Eng login This method is just for error handling static Javas latgsotrbltg login java lang String dummy This method is just for error handling static java lang String login java lang String dummy java lang String dummy2 This method is just for error handling 250 static static static static static static static Protecting the webservice connection with SSL TCLFacade void void void void void java lang String 6 9 Using the TC command line client login java lang String user java lang String passwd java lang String url Logs you in to the Teamdesk web service main java lang String args The main function just prints some help on how to use this class printAllProjects Prints all projects to the console printAllRoles Prints a list with all roles defined in the system to the console removePersonsFromGroup java lang String groupID java lang String person IDs Removes a number of persons identified by their object ids from the group with the given id removeRoleAssignment WSRoleAssignmentEditBean roleAssignmentEditBean Removes a spec
20. ue gt Margincen Mihei Mra David paa ze POCA RR pet a specific view with a ist of items tomas 2 Select a filter by first opening a folder and then clicking on the desired filter in the right list area am 2 i y e PEA Li AS Brower weorkiperass Find bem se Arash Bainan Greate bom se y Py miina E Instant query FA Add ieder E asii Pest Lap eer Gui A Delete Mare Tee Adi iniesoratonirsunm Atis Abe offenen Vorginge Im den letzten 90 Tage geachinaaen HABRA 3 Click on the Delete icon in the toolbar area or use the context menu to delete the selected filter Y Se Fed tom v Reports Administration e Create item v E instant query FO Add folder T Add fiter Pest Apply fiker 2 4 3 Private Name Type I Terminfiter Ail Irtegrationsrarum fiber LI Workspace Ale oenen Vorgange Pres 4 3 Publ In den letzten 90 Tage geschiossen finer Y Mi Integrationaraum Neue Themen der leen Woche fies Y Alle offenen Vorginge Offene Punkte aus Besprechungen finer Y in den letzten 90 Tage geschic Open tems from meetings fines T Neue Themen der letrten Wor Y Offene Punkte aus Besprechur TY Open tems from meetings 5 3 3 Creating a permanent link This section explains how you create permanent links to item overviews This permits you to publish HTML links that result in the execution of a filter under your account Sometimes you may want to give other people access to the result of a specific query even if these
21. BINDING_PARAMS USER ID the current users user ID issue BINDING PARAMS ISSUE the current issue after a change originallssue BINDING PARAMS ISSUE ORIGINAL the current issue before a change workltemContext BINDING_PARAMS WORKITEM CONTEXT the workltem context contains also the previous two beans but they will be also directly available in the map project BINDING PARAMS EMAIL PROJECT the current workspace errorList BINDING_PARAMS ERRORLIST the error list which should be returned in emailAttachments BINDING PARAMS EMAIL ATTACHMENTS case the activity can t be executed The errors will be shown as validation errors attachments from e mail submission fromAddress BINDING_PARAMS EMAIL FROM ADDRESS from address from e mail submission subject BINDING_PARAMS EMAIL SUBJECT subject from e mail submission body BINDING PARAMS EMAIL BODY e mail body from e mail submission siteBean BINDING_PARAMS SITEBEAN TSiteBean for this Teamdesk instance filter BINDING PARAMS FILTER LDAP search filter expression Idapmap BINDING PARAMS LDAPMAP LDAP map from quartz jobs xml Table 5 10 Output binding keys Key name guardPassed Key symbol BINDING_PARAMS GUARD PASSED 5 18 Managing e mail templates Description the current users user ID Teamdesk sends e mails to notify users of changes to items or remind them of due dates You can customize the appearance and content of these e mails using templates
22. Caution Be aware that this can change a number of things including your right to access this item For example there could be other states available or other properties or input masks People that are on the watch list of this item will be sent an e mail of this change if notifications are configured accordingly Moving items to another project You can move an item from one project to another one This is a grave operation since the receiving project might have totally different properties access permissions input masks managers responsibles and so one The following section describes how to move an item to another project You must have retrieved the item which you want to move to another project This can be done by entering the item number in the search field or by selecting the item from the overview report You must have been granted edit permissions for this item You will not see an active Move tool bar icon if you do not have proper permissions 1 From the item overview click on tool bar icon named Move 2 Anew screen appears Select the new project or item type where you want to move the item to 3 Click on the Next button 4 A new screen appears Here you may change other parameters related to the project or item type move This form might have been configured by your system administrator 5 Once you are done with changing other parameters click on the Move button 59 Teamdesk for team memb
23. Conil o Barret eny beter FILTERS WORKSPACES This item i EOCCHESOK Dependency type Finish Bo irt ha Comment Finish bo start Start to start Finish to finish Stat to rich 3 5 Item navigator Tracks System Adminig PE Drop P Chris a bai selection La Q Adion Export on Print PEF Export Coy Export XML Export Excel Save as standand yout Use standard layout Cancel The items are now linked with each other You can use this link when defining filters For some link types the associated logic may prevent you from closing items linked to open items or give you a temporal order like finish start or finish finish Related Links Item linking Creating a template based report You can create a report from the item set shown in the item navigator Reports enable you to present item information in many different ways like charts tables texts etc 1 Click on the Action button and select from the menu Reports 2 You are guided to the report management area where you can select the desired report Exporting to another Teamdesk instance You can export the item set shown in the item navigator including all related information like projects releases users states priorities custom properties and so on into an XML file This file you can import into another Teamdesk instance 1 Click on the Action button and select from the menu Export 2 Download the ZIP file t
24. Delegsted Ai Prajaka PALES imik PT geai Peia Herma 21911 S200 PH 4A Probi PHLZJ Fac Mild gaia Pis PR WSL 2600 PA arene aH Projekt PALO Rath M i gaiis Persse Hermann ajiaji 000 PH ga Fo ag uo F l A A rone Gavan vendan B avaible 40 2 Version 40 1 buda 16 Citania EJ 2012 arba Trapi Figure 3 5 Item navigator You can organize items hierarchically By clicking on the icons marked as B you can fully expand or collapse the item hierarchy With the same icons in the tree you can expand or collapse that part of the tree You can drag items to a different position in the tree You can mark a number of items and then perform a change on all of them like changing their state or assigning them to another responsible person You can also drag a set of items to a node in the left navigation area for example to change their state or move them to a different basket You can export the result set shown in the item navigator into template based PDF HTML RTF or Excel reports to comma separated values CSV format or to an XML file There is an interactive template designer that comes with Teamdesk Any number of templates can be uploaded to the Teamdesk server Navigator left area modes The navigator left area provides two levels of filtering items The result from the first filtering level can be further filtered via the second filtering level There are two modes for the left area You can select them with the switches in the lower left corn
25. KG Task Management Solutions o Ndocumentclass 10pt a4paper report pagestyle plain SSTP lt if locale has_ content amp amp locale de gt S TP usepackage ngerman babel TP lt else gt TP usepackage british babel S TP lt if gt The code shown above after the pre processor and the Freemarker processor have run looks like this in case the users locale was set to anything but de op Template for a general report document Copyright 2015 Steinbeis GmbH amp Co KG Task Management Solutions o Xdocumentclass 10pt al4paper report pagestyle plain usepackage british babel The next code example demonstrates the handling of inline items Whenever an inline item is encountered the pre processor fills in the code behind the ITP marker Thereafter the Freemarker processor replaces the context variables Note that the replacement will not be here in the LaTeX document but further down as often as there is an inline item The SSITP marker thus acts as a macro for the pre processor and not for the Freemarker processor usepackage docstyle usepackage draftwatermark SetWatermarkText S Status SetWatermarkLightness 0 93 SetWatermarkScale 0 8 op The following line defines how inline items are being rendered SSITP begin framed SITP href serverurl printItem action key S IssueNo textbt color tpred Project S ProjectSpecificissueNo
26. Next button 4 The new item screen appears This screen may have been configured specifically for this project and item type Some fields are mandatory they will always be there Enter a title or short summary of your item in the title field 6 Enter a full description of your item in the description field You may use rich text formatting elements here if you wish like bolded or colored text lists etc 7 Enter any other information that you know of and that is required Since screens can be item type dependent you may see different fields and tabs in different projects and for different item types 8 When you are done entering the data hit the Save icon at the top You have created a new item which is the child item of the original item 3 3 15 Creating a sibling item Items can be organized hierarchically You can either create a sibling item for an existing child item which is convenient when you create a number of child items for the same parent This sections describes how to create a child item as a sibling to an existing child item You must have chosen a child item and you see the item detail view of that child 1 Click on the toolbar icon labeled Add sibling 2 Onthe screen that appears select the desired project and item type The default will be your last selection Mark the check box if you want to keep this item hidden from anybody else This will mark your new item as private it will really o
27. Sab Group ber by statues Daly the ertutas will Fiver Dy stats opened ba displayed that are selected under Filter Ey status pecating None Discos tems of al seiecter projects and reims mnemented iri rie vii amari al Filter by Geet mrmediabe m seen WII display only those iberms that have ome of He selected ocasional SM Filter by priority Wil display only those items that have one of the selected cuum uem Figure 3 12 Budget overview tile configuration You can select the project and or releases you want to consider in the budget overview If you select just the project all releases of that project will be considered You can group the overview according to various criteria Grouping is possible by project and release there is an overview for each selected project or release item state there is an overview for each selected state item priority there is an overview for each selected priority none there will be no grouping Furthermore it is possible to apply a filter to consider just a subset of items e g just items with a specific state or a specific priority Standard tile The following figure shows the standard tile with a single release of a project and no grouping On the left side you can see the four temporal categories for items overdue due this week due next week and all others All others means that they either have no due date set or the due date is beyond the end of next week Each temporal cat
28. Select that you want to create an Item Navigator link In case you have a parametrized filter select if you want to add parameters to the query If you do not check this the user will be asked for the parameters each time she clicks on the link 6 Choose if the user should stay logged in after running the query Create permanent link Eb bem naepator bak T Mareen changes plug in link Keep user logged in dangerous htip Nocdhos E000 track encodedQuery ection query ir Hahaaa Mv 1 WOCHE SA 3Ao6630aw2 DADKOSFTnpehire BENQ me yatyMEndObFnw7 ZySOPMuP ZmEvipMVUkCICOcH dk 3D Cancel qb Caution This will enable sorting and grouping but it will also permit the user access to the system under your name Thus this option should only be chosen for the guest user or another user with carefully controlled access restrictions Copythe link shown to where you want to use it 3 4 13 Creating a link for Maven Maven is a widely used build project management system that can automatically generate project documentation Maven can incorporate information from other system and relate them to Maven builds or releases To incorporate information from Teamdesk into Maven you need the Teamdesk Maven changes plug in and install it into your Maven installation Then you can create a Maven changes link and copy it into the proper place in your Maven pom file The two main tags you have to change are the mapping of item types to Maven action typ
29. TOL supports single and multiple character wildcard searches To perform a single character wildcard search use the 2 symbol To perform a multiple character wildcard search use the symbol The single character wildcard search looks for terms that match that with the single character replaced For example to search for text or test you can use the search te t Multiple character wildcard searches looks for 0 or more characters For example to search for test tests or tester you can use the search 78 3 4 Finding items test You can also use the wildcard searches in the middle of a term te t G Note You cannot use a or symbol as the first character of a search Fuzzy Searches TOL supports fuzzy searches based on the Levenshtein Distance or Edit Distance algorithm To do a fuzzy search use the tilde symbol at the end of a Single word Term For example to search for a term similar in spelling to roam use the fuzzy search roam This search will find terms like foam and roams An additional optional parameter can specify the required similarity The value is between 0 and 1 with a value closer to 1 only terms with a higher similarity will be matched For example roam 0 8 The default that is used if the parameter is not given is 0 5 Proximity Searches TQL supports finding words that are within a specific distance away To do a proximity search use the tilde symbol at the end of a
30. The filtered item list will display the item number and title for all items that match the configured filter grouped by projects Filtered xxu List implemento Track e JbU Thouszands sagparatars far numbers in French asal z4B Attachment size and other floats increase automagically Aubria condi daplay not ak an Opera Items that are overdue are marked red You can click on either the item number or item title to directly go to the item detail page In case there is an item hierarchy it is shown and you can expand or collapse parent nodes to show or hide their children Hot Filters This tile gives you a list of query filters which you can execute by clicking in them This will give you the corresponding list of items in the item overview The Panel The panel shows a list of query filters that is available to you By clicking on an entry in this list you will be taken to the item overview and the list of items passing this filter is displayed Alle lensin Last used Open mork packages o mplemented Project Navigator The project navigator offers you a number of quick links to obtain the information you need most often For example you can run reports get all items or just items recently added see how many items are in what state or see what team member is assigned to how many items The project navigator automatically works for the respective project when used within a project cockpit and automatically works for th
31. To prepare for an export observe the following You must be logged in as a user with system administrator or system manager rights e g admin user You must have at least read access for each project from which you want to export items For this you need to assign yourself a role in these projects You can only export items and related data via regular queries This means that you will not be able to export items from releases that have been archived Such releases will not show up in the selection boxes of the query definition any more To export items and all related data first define a filter For example if you want to export all items from all projects select the projects and deselect all other selection in all other boxes Select if you want to include archived and deleted items or for example you want to include only archived and deleted items to archive them somewhere else Apply the filter The result will be shown in the item navigator 245 Managing the system T Views u Aem Total number of tems found 1795 Filtered 1795 QN Baws Doonan 019 PROJECTS D aa mmm Project Tite Edit selection Sueus Responsible gt UP Tracks dx Ma 2305 Tode 3 x Abfragen in Tebetientorm 4 Copy set dened Friedrich Meg E Take Ax nm a6 Tracks 3 x Dateien festiegen H Reports dosed Friedrich Yo L Take Support Te 305 Tracks 3 x Retationen brsbrnmen ened Fnedrih rg T views in Oss me SQL formulieren wA Print
32. amp Der Star unter den PM 7 M ssen Sia gl ubig sein 1 Den berblick behalten 28809 In Joseph und seine Br der Ma36 beschreibt Thomas Mann wie dor Meier des Potiphar den Joseph in die Gesch fte eines Verwalters einf hrt und den berblick lehi Die Agypter f hren ber ales akribisch Listen und Joseph macht sich diese Mathoda schnell zunutza Hat ar am Anfang noch Bodenken orbus oni tall ee herstelen kann so lernt ar dass dies zum Verwalten auch gar nicht i Figure 8 3 Example Wiki Documents and document sections A document is just a regular work item that is treated in a special way As its children it contains a hierarchy of document sections Just as any other work items it has a number of standard properties like author last edit date and title Document inline and full edit mode You can switch between inline editing a Wiki document such that only a selected section is being edited or editing the entire document like in a standard Word processor In full edit mode you create new sections by formatting the Heading 2 etc H d section title with a heading format like Heading 1 Herrschaft und berblick Benn vor anders Geburt Din ich als sie und aus ance Figure 8 4 Switching between inline and full edit mode 8 2 Creating documents To create a new document go into the Wiki navigator and right mouse click on a workspace or revision node Then click on Add documen
33. and you may find that some screens and terminology on your system is different from what is shown here This document cannot explain how Teamdesk is being used in your organization In a well run project you will find this information in a project manual and company standards 3 2 Registering and changing your user profile In order to use Teamdesk you have to have an account on your server In your personal user profile you can set your preferences like user name password e mail address preferred user interface locale and e mail notification settings 3 2 1 Obtaining an account You have to have an account on your Teamdesksystem before you an use it Depending on your system configuration you can either register yourself or your system administrator creates an account for you Self registration has to be enabled for your system otherwise you will not be able to register yourself You have to know the URL of your Teamdesk server and when you point your browser to it you can see the login screen You may want to bookmark this URL in your browser since you will use it every day later on You have to know your e mail address which you have to enter in order to receive your password The pattern of allowed e mail domains might have been restricted by the system administrator 1 Point your browser to the Teamdesk server URL ol Login Open information window Farga password 2 Click on the link labeled Register 3 Fill out th
34. immediate pa Originater Admina Tracks System Anisasa pated Release LO Sar 16 Manager Admirina Track System Target release Release 1 0 Finish 05 28 2013 p Response Adcinisrator Track System Status closed Tite My Fh bert item Description Parent hi oy Hity 5 Comment g Attechmerds i Watchers 3 Seat odere 3 Hide soe 1 Date Changed by Type of change Hons vale Did vahar Corer a DEER 16 51 00 Aderiristratos Troche System Datus dosed opened 0505 2013 15 48 29 Adeninitaing Track System usta epened Verion 4 0240 Enterprise W 2019 menbesi Trackplars Figure 3 1 The item detail page The bottom part of the item details page consists of several tabs These will give you the complete item history trail access to comments on this item a tab with attachments the item work and budget plan a list of people that are on the watch list for this item and version control information in case there are files in a repository associated with this item 53 Teamdesk for team members 3 3 1 Working with items The item is the central object in Teamdesk Teamdesk helps to manage items All items have a life cycle At some point in time an item is being created People work on it changing the item state assigning another responsible person adding comments and so on At some point in time the item can be closed Items have properties When working on items you are either changing item property va
35. loginName Gets a JSON string of a user based on his login name getPersonEditBean java lang String personID Gets a bean of a user based on his object id getPersonEditBeanByLoginName java lang String loginName Gets a bean of a user based on his user name getPersonsForGroup java lang String group lp Returns a JSON string of person beans that are members of the given group getPersonsForGroupBeans java lang String groupID Returns a list of person beans that are members of the given group Managing the system static javaslabg otring getProjectEdit java lang Integer projectID Gets a project bean in a JSON string that can be edited and saved back to the database static java lang String getProjectEdit java lang String projectID Gets a project bean in a JSON string that can be edited and saved back to the database Static gavaslang otring getProjectEditByName java lang String projectName Gets a project bean in a JSON string that can be edited and saved back to the database Static WSProjectEditBean getProjectEditBean java lang Integer projectID Gets a project bean that can be edited and saved back to the database Static WSProjectEditBean getProjectEditBean java lang String projectID Gets a project bean that can be edited and saved back to the database Static WSProjectEditBean getProjectEditBeanByName java lang String projectName Gets a project bean that can be edited and saved back
36. rackplusDocumant Ls J Present lssueType IssueTypePresent Status J StatusPresent J Manager ManagerPresent Responsible ResponsiblePrasent ReleaseMoticedPresent 2 ReleaseMobced Haleasascheduled Property Value wah fTrackpiusDocumenit Pr Figure 8 13 Dragging fields into the document Tomake the template generally available you can upload it to the server when you export a document see Exporting documents 8 7 Creating LaleX Freemarker templates You can create beautiful PDF documents from the Wiki using LaTeX Freemarker templates There are thousands of ready made templates available for free in the internet This section explains how to get text and meta data from your Wiki document into a LaTeX document Obtaining a free LaTeX distribution To develop LaTeX templates you should have a complete TeX distribution installed on your server and your local PC Please have a look at the Teamdesk installation manual on how to obtain and install it Export workflow When you export a Wiki document Teamdesk proceeds as follows 1 The Wiki document is pulled together including inline referenced sections or items The attributes of the document itself and the attributes for each document section are placed into a Freemarker context A temporary working area is created at TRACKPLUS_HOME Reports LaTeX tmpxxx Figures from attachments are copied into this working area The template you chose f
37. the original author You must have retrieved the item to which you want to add a comment This can be done by entering the item number in the search field or by selecting the item from the overview report You must have been granted edit permissions for this item You will not see an Add comment action icon if you do not have proper permissions 1 From the item detail page select action icon Comment Alternatively go to the bottom part of the screen and select the Comment tab Then click on the Add button there 2 Enter your comment You may use rich text formatting elements to format the comment 3 Click on Add to file this comment for addition to this item The comment has been added to the item People that are on the watch list of this item are being sent an e mail containing the comment 37 Teamdesk for team members 3 3 7 Adding an attachment Each item can have any number of attachments The size of an attachment might have been limited by the system administrator Attachments containing text can be included in the full text search This section describes how to add an attachment to an item You must have retrieved the item to which you want to add an attachment This can be done by entering the item number in the search field or by selecting the item from the overview report or by creating a new item You must have been granted edit permissions for this item or you are permitted to create an item You w
38. 19 Ape 20 Ft Mash das mal H Mach dans mas Apr 21 Apr dl Apr dd Agr 24 Apr 25 Age 16 Ape 17 He Ganin einrirhten H Conabrucina Ehe casa sH Porro lager Ape EB Apr 25 Aor 30 May 01 H 2 H H idia niche At the top of the calendar there are two buttons Today and Weekly View With the Today button you switch to the current month and the current day The current day will be selected shown by the yellowish background The current day is furthermore marked by a red frame When you click onto the Weekly View button the week that contains the currently selected day will be shown If there was no day selected the current week will be shown Selecting Dates You can mark a date as selected by clicking into it The selected date is marked with a yellowish background When you browse forward or backward the date remains selected as long as you do not select a different date When you change from monthly to weekly view the week with the selected date will be shown Active Links When there is one of your items e g an item where you are either the original author of or the current responsible or the manager and this item has a start or a due date on any of the dates shown in your current calendar tile there will be an active link with a short text for this item in the corresponding field In front of the text there is a small symbol which indicates whether this is a start date or a due date for this item If the start date
39. 2 Select the users in the users list to whom you want to assign the new cockpit template You can use filters to limit the amount of users you see The filters are accessible from the column headers Jy My sens Bact feen Wor D acer Omacthete Mi Setuserievet GY Role awsome QA y Werkspeces User name Emad access MES Users A group admin Sort Ascending ten webemasber tra pound Ih Groups 7 Columns gt 4 Organicational units uodo ade cupan rasna gt QA 3 Click on Assign cockpit in the small toolbar 4 Select the cockpit template you want to assign and click on Ok up Warning This will overwrite the users own cockpit definition and could make them angry The selected users will now have the new cockpit 6 7 Importing data There are two ways to import data First you can import data from Excel sheets This permits you to create item lists offline and later on upload them to your Teamdesk server Second you can import data from another Teamdesk installation for example to merge two different installations Any user that is permitted to create items may import items from Excel spread sheets Only system administrators are authorized to import data from another Teamdesk database or export data from a Teamdesk database 6 7 1 Importing items from Excel You can import items from Excel sheets If Teamdesk detects that items already exist in its database these items are modified rather than created again Overview Tocrea
40. 3 qe Them type specific contig a HOORRS Toop sel to deprecated lo cee Gert Boa 4 Change the label and tool tip 5 10 Item properties sli ld sns Qus e standard ante oanfigurations A tribula configuration A Custom attr bubes p jiem type spedfic config ak E a Accused rev HOOPS 5 Click on the Save button in the toolbar In the tree area the property has changed from a light color to a strong color indicating that this is a derived property Q Add mirbute ny Drie O 4 QD Standerd aroue config ranons System arri ers A Custom attribute p lem type spect config You have created a derived property and overwritten the global property for item types Task with the derived version All forms for tasks will have the new label instead of the original one The property itself is still the same global property though Note You can revert this operation and return back to the global setting by right clicking on the derived property in the tree area and then selecting Reset Q ddamibus ll sr toser a Qj andad arde configurations hs Gestern attributes T Custom attributes Modifying properties You can modify properties globally For system properties you can only change the name label and tool tip For custom properties you can change anything except for the property type You must be logged in as system manager or system administrator 1 In the top toolbar select Adminis
41. 6 Save the change by clicking on the Save action icon in the toolbar All system users that do not have their own automail settings configured will automatically use the new automail settings 4 7 Configuring workspace specific cockpits Teamdesk supports to basic perspectives a user perspective and a workspace perspective The user is interested in all items that concern him possibly across a number of workspaces A workspace or project administrator is more interested in items that are contained in his workspace or project To facilitate cooperation you can provide workspace specific cockpits to your team members This helps to ensure that everybody has the same view on a workspace in discussions You must be logged in as space administrator system manager or system administrator When you click on Browse workspace in the top toolbar you can select a workspace in the left navigation area Then you will see a cockpit which is specific to this workspace You can furthermore have release specific cockpits within each workspace that is acommon cockpit for all releases within that workspace The general procedure of managing these cockpits is equivalent to managing your personal cockpit 1 In the top toolbar select Administration gt Workspaces Alternatively click on the Workspaces bar in the left navigation area o 7 Y mM 6x L Cockpit Eyam workers Find ems Reports ddimirisiraidon e Create hem e 2 Select a
42. Actions Report templates 2 Click on Automail assignment in the next navigation column You can 3 Toadd an automail assignment click on the Add button in the toolbar To edit an automail assignment select it in the right grid area and then use either the context menu or the toolbar button labeled Edit 5 8 Managing link types 4 y Adi sutomnall assignment p Vere IT Fiat paces Motificati n trigger Full Trigger v Atomai conditi Just chang ibism amp Y Baire Camel 4 Select a workspace an automail trigger and an automail condition T Tip There is a special entry for all other workspaces This assignment is taken for all workspaces that do not have their own assignment 5 Savethe assignment You now have a complete automail configuration which controls the kind of messages you get from the system 5 4 Automail for unregistered submitters Automail is also available for unregistered submitters of items i e such submitters that do not have an account with the Teamdesksystem Teamdesk can be enabled to accept items via e mail from submitters that do not have an account in the Teamdesksystem Such submitters can nonetheless also be informed about the state of their items Such submitters will be treated as if they were the author of the items The notification scheme and automail triggers are taken from the guest account Thus notifications to unregistered submitters are handled as if the guest use
43. Ehe global level vie HB Users A groups z ly p mouse contest click right mouse A Custpenize Manage filters Actions POLi Report templates T Haag Filters E Managesever Wp User roles Report lemplates E Cost niem aconunts Vg Uber roles Autnmail gt God codon A acuta a Automall Curt forces es Lii typis z _ Custom Felda Candice Boma x EO Wieekuguasae iy 7 2 In the second navigation column click on Global lists and then on Priority You can now add priorities delete priorities or modify them Customizing Teamdesk X Tracks men Adm nigrator Help Log off Y wl ai Cockpt Bre workapeces Find Reem Repair co Crete ien v track Jy My cating Ade ts kl Werkipanrs a Q Gobel lets Name kon i n fle sae Typeflag EM Users groups Sfi pocacionaly a Coo ng Teta Level 1 anon b son Test tent Level 2 Custo ie png T Manage Men D acon wisvedutt Ll immediate png Test text Lewd 3 Report templates m nec You can assign an icon 16 x 16 px GIF or PNG format to each entry You can furthermore assign a CSS style to each entry which will be used to format items in the item navigator For example you could use various shades of red as background color to illustrate the urgency of an item You can drag entries in the list on the right to another position The entries will be offered at the user interface in the same order as shown in the grid here A Attention When
44. Ernst Manuela Friedrich Barbe Fnecren eg Fredrich Matthars Guest John Henderson Fred Lang Hartmut Margincen Mihei Mira David Pich Gabriele Publ Viewer nage filters create new ones or ute an minting one to Qet specific view with a het of items Seem sees ees 2 In the toolbar area first select a folder then click on Add filter x dw ess d Give this filter a good name Mark the check box Subscribe if you want to add this filter into your Find items menu Y s La Fired dema s Tassuneslraban dd Prete aod c Broject AB bugs 40 In the window that appears define your filter a Add folder ICT Ad iter Mame Al bugs a Al impor Al Rem A onm B If you like select the property which should determine the colors in the Item Navigator This permits you to have different colors background and foreground depending on e g the priority of an item Save the filter 5 3 2 Deleting a filter 1 Select menu Find items Manage filters 5 3 Managing filters le cte By Deactivate Si User leva Y AS LI reste Reports Adminstration Y Oum v Al tems Ovtstand ng Name My items Acmicistrates Track System I m the manager Bojari Adrian I m responsible Erari Low I m the author Diechner Ovistogh Meeti Ernst Manuela Unscheduted Friedrich Meg Closed recently Friedrich Matthias Added recently Guest Jon Updated recently Henderson Fred My fi R gt Lang Hartmut
45. If the integration and assessment process reveals no further problems with the implemented item resolution the item can be closed In any other case the item is being set back to assigned As with state processing state assessing defines a process rather than the end of a process This again is to enable management visibility when the assessment process which could take some time has actually been started Managing priorities Priority urgency means how soon an item should be taken care of You can add delete and modify the list of available priorities For each item type workspace type or workspace you can select which priorities will be actually available at the user interface You must be logged in as system manager or system administrator The warning level is used by the automail notification engine In your user profile you can set the level beyond which you want to be notified of changes to items 1 In the top toolbar select Administration gt Customize gt Lists Alternatively click on the Customize Lists bar in the left navigation area i L eee i oe F Y ai A E Tacos aysoerm Adrministrac Cockpit Browse woriapaons Find erm e Reports Administration Create hem e Jy Hr etting Jy My settings j Giba Wurkspaces Ucn rin Qon e selection lets There are some predefined oyster bits hice tern ctl WS Workspace specific lists users groups P de any number of custom selection lets either at
46. Importing data from another Teamdesk instance is a potentially dangerous operation since it may add a lot of users and configuration items such as fields and lists you do not want to have Please also consider the following Input forms and form assignments are not being imported This means that you may not see some fields that are visible in the exporting instance of Teamdesk Teamdesk tries to match all data from the other instance to avoid duplication of any entries Users are identified by the combination of their login name and e mail Only if both match users are considered to be the same Most other items are matched by their universal unique identifier UUID Custom list entries are matched by their labels Items are not matched by their item numbers but by their UUIDs Item numbers most likely get moved in the process Currently inline links links to items in the description text and other links are not corrected or imported if they point to items not included in the imported data set Ifin your importing instance you provide a custom field of type text and name it OldTracklD the item numbers of your exporting instance will be saved there for reference Furthermore a file is written in TRACK HOME containing a map with the new item numbers and the corresponding old item numbers If the import data set contains projects that do not exist in the target instance these projects are created In this case any role used in the source
47. L EL Asd reir I y Workspace T1 Product bacilo n en em Filar d Lf OST Support Le Finanzen amp Verwaltung 5 Select the release to be deleted either in the right list area or in the third navigation area Click on the Delete release button in the toolbar or use the context menu 6 You will be asked to confirm the delete operation If the release contains items you will be asked to pick a replacement release Laici n Frodukt Discioc Name fysha Due de OF Assn Roles 13 amig RELION Backie 15 Release B ELO 7 1 PE E aa Delete release x Manage ers Report berep artes You ere about to permenenihy delete the release RELIDO from the database To replace existing iretaroes you have to mark replacement release in the EA below Think it over You can Aii cancel this operation Replacement release REL200 Click on the Delete button to confirm the deletion of this release The release you have deleted has been replaced with the release you have selected as a replacement release 4 3 3 he release status Similar to items and workspaces releases and phases have a status Via the release status you control the accessibility and visibility of a release You can create any number of phases for a workspace Phases have a status just as entire workspaces do The phase status determines accessibility of a phase Via the release state you can control visibility of a release and what kind of operations are possible
48. Required only in case of system problems for debugging purposes Performing database backups Restoring a database 7 2 Server configuration There are a number of parameters that need to be configured before Teamdesk can run in a meaningful way This section describes these basic system settings In particular this section describes how to configure licensing how to configure the e mail interface how to configure LDAP and single sign on SSO how to set up full text search how to setup various other settings like web services project specific item number handling directories for storing attachments and backups etc 7 2 1 System information and license data Teamdesk controls licensing via a license key The license key is bound to your servers IP address To access the server information and licensing page In the top toolbar select Administration gt Manage server gt Server configuration AU s L Adrmrenestrabon v Create item Es My settings ee extsearch LDAPASSO 08 HL User amp groups Customize Enterprise Actions Manage server i Server configoration A screen with a number of tabs appears as shown below 254 7 2 Server configuration License QOwtgoing e mail incominge mail Fulltext search LDAPASSO Other Server data System version 4 0 1 103 Enterprisa Database vergon 400 server P addresses E3 14 24 7 Hd Lice ta License key IZAN sui Pas vEngefjsnadwtiM
49. Responsible Release noticed Target release Siventy minor Originator Marginean Miha Crenbed 03 05 2013 13 53 06 a Mumber of itemi openid va choked repart Tithe a ri ROE working property WBS Code 183 Item Na Project sperifir 230 For further information http fan trek ue org treks printItem action leyz 1678 The following properties are available Variable title project itemNo marker submitterEmail subject changeDetail morelnfo isCreated isCopy oldlssue isAdd Comment isEditComment isDeleteComment isOtherChanged isManagerChanged isResponsibleChanged isDateChanged isMove isStateChanged isResponsibleChanged 225 Description The item title The space or project for this item the item number default is Teamdesk lt item number gt The e mail of the submitter when item was created by e mail or when it was entered by another user default is marker f project changeDetail A localized text string as described in the code below The link to the item within the Teamdesk system true if this item was just created true if this item was just copied only in case of copy the original item number true if a comment was added true if a comment was edited true if a comment was deleted true for any change that was not specified more eexplicitly true ifthe manager was changed true ifthe responsible was changed true ifthe start or end date was changed tru
50. Select a leaf node and enter the localizes Y Users A groups co 4D Gite less Qomat pe Hem type T Manage view iters aj Status A Report templates 9 Priority Mp User roles AL Severity gt Ostern BE Workspace spec n Mts J Atomai ig System statuses D field Xe Unk types Do Custom forms 5 Link Jd Custom fields y Role ies Personal basat Y Sytem statuses X Acton Ef Workspace types 4 C Backs Ut labels vn 4 Lj admin 4 3 actions ENTE Scip Dm Figure 5 1 Localizing resources To customize any object select it in the tree second column from the left In the right area you will get a screen as shown in the figure below ba j impor Benet Wb eene 2 Localzabie entibes Reference language Deffauk Target language English 4 i Us m inm Name Referee Legume Target argine 12 Tem type soos Meena 5 Property Problem Report Jn Severity Acts beni Requirement BE okwuue ipie Isis Figure 5 2 Modifying localized text In the leftmost column in the right area you see the identifier of the object to be localized If there is no default localization and no localized text for the object the id is shown In the second column in the right area at the top you can choose the original language For example if you are familiar with English and need to translate to Italian you would choose English here and Italian in the leftmost column The default language is English and is taken if there is not a more sp
51. TC command line client 229 Managing the system 6 1 System manager tasks overview This chapter deals with tasks that are usually reserved to the Teamdesk system managers The system manager can do anything a system administrator can do except for configuring the server itself System management tasks can be categorized as follows Managing users and groups Managing cost centers and accounts Managing organizational units like companies or departments Providing default cockpits Importing data into and exporting data from Teamdesk Sending broadcast e mails to Teamdesk users 6 2 Managing regular users Teamdesk can be configured such that users can create an account themselves However some supervisory activity is required to grant users permission to view or enter any data to spaces to assign them to organizational units and to activate or deactivate their accounts Access to spaces can be granted to users by the system administrator or system manager for all spaces A space administrator can grant access to the spaces he manages Adding users As s system administrator or system manager you can add users to the Teamdesk system To add a user go to the Administration gt Users and groups gt Users menu entry The most important parameter is the user name It must be unique and it is recommended to use the same name as for other accounts in your organization like the Windows user name In particular if a directory
52. This is called a set operation You will only be able to change properties that are actually being used in the projects you have access rights to Make sure you have the set selection column activated It always shows in the first column To activate the set selection column click on the Choose columns button on the top right 1 In the first column mark the items you want to modify using a set operation 2 CES pime Tota numberof tems found 19 Filtered 19 Lb Archon Issue Ma Progeht ro 39 10 Projekt einfach DORE A Propet eif act Weber erese Tibqhe en FI Erzgelt einfach Tapeten sussuchen urd b Hi 13 Frogelt einfach Tengedhbeden surcuchen d Projekt eif acn Tees Sup omen FIG Progelt srie Tapete enif eran 3 wie Progekt eid ech Error tent en Av h Projekt eiefadi Neue Sheckdosen installer LM Fragekt arte Letra F r elektriedee Mod 2 Click on the Edit icon in the tool bar of tems found 19 Fitered 19 a Adios ns Projekt Ips 2 Bukk qj T Propkt eet ach nere enovenut Dulk cog Change te Projekt erf ach Vorberetende Ta i US Reports Propht erf ach Tapeten usada Wa P3 twport Projekt einfach Teppichboden out c Projekt einfach Zimmer ocr ume tony Proyebt er ach Tapete ertfernen YA CSV x E Projekt emt ach Eeitrhberwbeten XML NY Y Projekt einfach Neue Stechdost X Excel 3 Onthe new screen that appears mark those item properties you want to change You must check at least one property When
53. When permanently deleting a user from the system a replacement user has to be named This replacement user will be entered in all places where the now to be deleted user has been registered in previously The replacement user will thus inherit the entire history of the user that is about to be removed To delete a user from the system use the delete action button for this user on the left side of the user list screen Viewing a users role assignments Select a user in the list and click on the Role assignments button in the toolbar You will get a list with projects and the roles this user has been assigned for these projects Assigning a cockpit to users As a system administrator or system manager you can assign one of the cockpit templates to a set of users Select the users with the check boxes then click on the Assign cockpit button in the toolbar Select the desired cockpit template and click OK Synchronizing Teamdesk with an LDAP directory You can synchronize your Teamdesk list of users with your LDAP directory Entries found in the LDAP directory but not in Teamdesk are created in Teamdesk Entries found in Teamdesk but not in your LDAP directory can be automatically deactivated in Teamdesk set parameter deact ivateUnknown t rue You can configure Teamdesk to perform the synchronization automatically on a regular basis or initiate the synchronization manually from the user administration interface By default automatic synchr
54. a reminder that you have transferred the item to somebody else The delegated waiting basket contains items you have delegated to somebody else and that have not been completed In your delegated waiting basket you keep a pointer to the original item while the original goes to the new responsible person You can delegate items by dragging them from the right panel of the item navigator to the delegated waiting basket You will be asked for the new responsible person and an optional follow up date The item will then stay in your delegated waiting basket and at the same time it will appear in the in basket of the person you have delegated it to 23 6 rash Can As items enter your in basket there may be things that do not require any action and that do not contain information valuable enough to keep Such items you can directly move into the trash can You should empty the trash can on a regular basis When you empty the trash can the items in there are automatically put in state closed if you have the appropriate permission The items will also be removed from your trash can when somebody else closes them 2 3 9 Incubator The incubator basket permits you to collect things that are not urgent but that you might want to get to sometime in the future Items in the incubator basket serve as crystallization points for future activities and projects For example your customers gave you some nice ideas on how to improve your product Howeve
55. access control permissions you define if you can create an item in a space if you can be assigned an item or whether you can see all items in a Space or only your own If you manage projects you can directly associate a project with a space If you manage products it is useful to relate a product or product family with a space and product components with subspaces Defining subspaces only makes sense if you have large teams and if you need to control access to different parts of your project or product For example if you are developing technical products comprised of hardware components software and mechanical parts you could create a top level project space for the system and below separate spaces for hardware 24 2 1 Access control software and mechanics In very large projects you could create more subspaces for components or you could create spaces for components at the second level and beneath that split into hardware software and mechanics SW component S1 SW component S2 Component K3 ME component M1 ME component M2 Figure 2 2 Spaces and sub spaces In some environments it is required that members of a group inherit permissions of other members in the same group For example if you have a multi company project members of one company should be able to see items of other members of the same company but not items of other companies In that case access rights need to not just depend on a role but also on member
56. and creates a link between the copy and the original import java util LinkedList import Java Utib Lae import java util Locale import java util Map import com aurel track beans TLinkTypeBean import com aurel track beans TPersonBean import com aurel track beans TWorkItemBean import com aurel track errors ErrorData import com aurel track fieldType runtime base WorkItemContext import com aurel track item ItemBL import com aurel track item link ItemLinkConfigBL import com aurel track linkType LinkTypeBL import com aurel track util event IEventHandler public class CopyItem implements IEventHandler Copies an item and creates a link between the original item and copied item m public Map lt String Object handleEvent Map String Object inputBinding WorkItemContext workItemContext WorkItemContext inputBinding get workItemContext IWorkItemBean workItemBean workItemContext getWorkItemBean Integer copiedFromItemID workItemBean getObjectID TPersonBean personBean TPersonBean inputBinding get user Locale locale Locale inputBinding get locale List lt ErrorData gt errorList new LinkedList lt ErrorData gt create a copy of an item WorkItemContext copyContext ItemBL editCopyWorkItem copiedFromItemID personBean getObjectID locale IWorkItemBean workItemBeanCopy copyContext getWorkItemBean change the copied item as needed workItemBeanCopy setSynop
57. area or select the workspace in the left navigation area and click the Delete button o L Y sali L a EA Cockpit Berane workepaces Fired ers Reports deieirisirs on Create item e i Ly My settings Lip Add Workspace LJ Add submpaeg Add private works coy fa 5 General Basie settings Default settings E mail sem L Gy Auge Roles Maaic propertaa TI rana Name CET Jm Description Dies ist der 4 iem amp Verwaltung TH 4 1 Managing spaces 3 Awarning appears unless the workspace does not have any items associated i e it had just been created and never been used When you confirm a second warning appears When you confirm again the workspace with all subspaces and items will be deleted Z This workspace contains Rema Do you really went to delete the workspace with all ls ibems Think it cer You can still cancel this operation You Ho Workin peca Rem n nostr The workspaces with all its associated items and properties has been deleted from the database There is nothing left There will be an entry in the server log of this delete operation stating the date and the user who performed it 4 1 3 Copying a workspace setup When creating a new workspace it can be quite helpful to copy its configuration like users and roles version control accounting lists queries custom forms custom properties and so on from an existing workspace You must be logged in as workspace adm
58. bemplabes Mange serrer Es Lir roles E Cost centers accounts J kutomall Linde typer Config mtm and custom Isis 0 9 priority wcerrity Po Wer pa 2 In the second navigation column click on Global lists if you want to add a list accessible to all workspaces or select a workspace to which you want to add that list Then click on the Add button in the toolbar or use the context menu Customizing Teamdesk a Q Gohal bs ad Status CE Priority ob Ser gu Bem type i Customer List Workspace specific lists 3 Give a name to the new list or modify the existing one Optionally add a brief description for book keeping purposes CHEER erani a Dorrating yen Here you can Aqua peleciion lees Thera V Aasign Moles Unis sate priority and Rem types You can add a E Reisma Vwa the ginbal level visible to all or a a workspa ue Situs oe t Lits Add workspace specific lint T Manage fiteri Report templates Name Customers NN Deseripton Ad our customer 9 Dustem a iribulis DE Viork im T Ausign ACCOUREE af Ama e Cockpit H Version control F Expert in MS Projeci lt 7 nut from HE Proper 4 Select the node to which you want to add list entries or edit an existing entry Use the context menu to add or edit an entry Edit global at io Delete global list Copy global list D Export global list 5 Name the new entry or edit the name of an existing entry and optionally give it some style info
59. can configure the reports you want to make available in the reports area of the tile Meetings Projects require meetings In good meetings there will be action points assigned that need to be taken care of In Teamdesk there is a special item type called Meeting The tile described here gives you a list with all your meetings and the associated action items The Panel The Meetings tile does not require any configuration The panel looks like shown below There are four columns The date column refers to the date of the meeting This is the due date or the start date if there is no due date defined Teamdesk for team members The little group icon is an active link that will open up the item overview with this meeting and all related action items The title is an active link that will directly open up the detailed view of this meeting The state summary column gives you active links to all action items all open action items and all closed action items It also gives you a simple graphical indication for the degree of completion for this meeting Date Title all resolved unresolved ee ee 1 2 me ng zur Verbas D des Requirements fngi 3 1 Drorerser Re hung t g 25 MEN Release Notes The release notes tile gives you a list with all resolved and unresolved items in a release grouped by item type The Panel The Release notes tile requires you to configure a project or release for which the overview shall be gene
60. column Only properties based on selection lists can be chosen like state responsible manager or priority 1 Click on the configuration button in the small toolbar to display the agile board configuration area 2 Select the desired column property 3 Clickon the configuration button in the small toolbar to hide the configuration area Setting the column sort order Within each column you can define the sort order for the cards based on item properties 1 Click on the configuration button in the small toolbar to display the agile board configuration area 2 Select the desired column sort order 3 Clickon the configuration button in the small toolbar to hide the configuration area Selecting column values to be displayed In some cases you may not want to display the entire set of values possible for the column property You may want to only display some states or some responsibles but not all of them Important Even though you may not have selected a value to be shown it will show if there is at least one item with that value 1 Click on the configuration button in the small toolbar to display the agile board configuration area 2 Select the desired column property values The order in which you select values determines the order in which the columns are shown 3 Clickon the configuration button in the small toolbar to hide the configuration area Removing column values You can remove column values from the agile boa
61. configuration Checkdox Single checkbox Mf You define a default value either marked or unmarked Specific canfigiaratian When you place this property on an input form it will look like shown below Urgent 2 Simple select Simple select lists permit to select a single item from a given list The default value is configured as part of the list not as part of the property Field type o Note You must have defined already a simple list before you start defining a item property of this type Otherwise you may not be able to complete the definition of an property of this type 5 10 Item properties Simple list name PC Manufacturer When you place this property on a form it will look like shown below Manufacturer Sun w Hewlett Packard Dell Medion Toshiba Siemens Fujitsu Extensible simple select The extensible simple select lists permit to select a single item from a given list Additionally it permits regular users to add new list entries directly in the edit or create new item mask Warne Customers o Note You must have defined already a simple list before you start defining a item property of this type Otherwise you may not be able to complete the definition of an property of this type Simple list name PC Manufacturer When you place this property on a form it will look like shown below Customers Multiple select Multiple select lists permit to select one or more items
62. control a J Fillers Li Lis Wi Test T Tip You can assign more than one role to a single user The access rights of all roles add up You have now assigned or removed users in roles to your workspace 4 3 Managing releases phases Teamdesk organizes all items in workspaces You can structure workspaces along the time line in phases for example to manage releases iterations or sprints Phases can be structured hierarchically just like items For example you could have a release with a number of iterations or sprints as sub phases 4 3 1 Adding a release This section describes how to add a release or sub phase You must be logged in as space administrator system manager or system administrator 1 In the top toolbar select Administration Workspaces Alternatively click on the Workspaces bar in the left navigation area 2 Select a workspace in the leftmost navigation area 3 Select the releases node in the second navigation area from the left This node will only appear if the workspace type this workspace belongs to has releases enabled 4 3 Managing releases phases a L i A O l Y al Cochpa Browur wir pac Fired deem n Fipa Miminho e Ju My settings EL A o reina y l WWerkipaces E Product backing A on F3 Beissue 1 Tl feoaee 2 l OBT Support T Manage fiters ger tems l Finanzen A Vereakung 4 Click on the Add release button in the toolbar If there are already releases available y
63. cost tracking has to be enabled by the project administrator for the respective project otherwise this tab will not be active Furthermore the user has to have granted proper permissions by the project administrator in order to be able to see the work costs tab and enter values there Adding work and monetary expenses by default changes the estimated remaining planned value PV Ifa change is not desired it is possible to keep the old estimated value even when work and money are being booked on this item It is possible to define the date for which the booking shall take place in case work and expenses are booked at a later date than the date when the work was actually performed For a regular user adding work and money is irreversible If an error was made a negative amount can be booked to compensate for any wrong values Work can be added in hours or workdays Internally Teamdesk keeps all values in hours The internal value in hours is calculated from the users profile settings where for each user the hours per workday can be defined If nothing is defined there the project default setting is taken Planned Value For each item those permitted to do so can enter a planned value PV This planned value or planned cost or budget serves as a baseline There is a difference between a monetary planned value and a planned value for work You can use either or both The planned value can be changed but the changes are recorded in the item
64. desired URL It is of the form http lt SERVER gt track releaseNotes action project lt PROJECT gt amp release lt RELEASE gt https www trackplus com track releaseNotes action project Track 2B 204 2Ex amp release 4 2El1 2Ex You need to escape special characters in the URL to work Space is 9620 Dot is 2E Plus sign is 962B Teamdesk for space administrators Release Notes for X3 Software REL200 Task KISW Installation funktioniert nicht X38W 3 Define hardware abstraction layer design Action Item a X35W 1 Image Rendering implementionn Edit Copy Release Notes The text area Below allows tha project measa notes to ba edaad and copied lo another document hl Release Hotes for X3 Software RELZOD h2 h2 Tasak h27 ful clasas ir 1 amp li spam classse cid X35W 2 amp span lt span classe title sInstallation funktioniert nicht spans li lt li gt cspa clasa oid XJ3N 3 apan span class title Define hardware abstraction layer designz span c li lt ful gt thirActlon Itest hz27 sul clasa it5 gt amp liz span classs nid z X35N 1 amp spam lt span clase title sImage Rendering implementiorens spanes li gt lt ul gt 142 Customizing Teamdesk Topics Customization overview Configuration scenarios Managing filters Managing report templates Roles and permissions Managing cost centers and accounts Customizing automail Ma
65. developed to help facilitate communication within groups as small as members of a project or as large as members of an entire organization In today s world action items levied against members of an organization are created from several different sources through various avenues either by email voice mail in meetings or by word of mouth resulting in actions not being completed because either the action was forgotten misplaced or miscommunicated The intent of the action item list is to centralize and organize all action items for a particular organization or project make the system available through the Internet and notify individuals via email when an action is assigned to them or is nearing or has surpassed the due date allow for a concise and up to date overview on a projects state Not all states the Teamdesk system has to offer are helpful when dealing with action items The figure below shows the state subset that could be used for action items 2 ho Fue RT EA Sli FERE 1 lud LR Y ug me a E p a i we nem 5 mas Th zh am meas VERRE RRL Ra PL La An action item is created and initially set to state opened Action items should always carry a due date and a person to which they are assigned This is unavoidable in the Teamdesk system Once work on an action item has started the state is set to processing by the current responsible This permits other people to see that something is actu
66. e ce neuer Zustand y ee gp tegrated f suspended p maming Q edat d tened Dl Meeting V suspondod F Problem Report oa Action Ttem You can assign which of all defined priorities will be available for spaces of the selected workspace type This you define for each item type Drag those that you want from the right column to the left column If you don t drag any there all will be available Wr Electron P Aan bem typt Gj Assign Satus E Avin Priority Jp Mcg Severity Eg Custem fields DA Custom forma AP Assn Woeklions EE Gener Project NE Methane Ez Mechatron cs ES Private Prospect ES Thesenspocke Assigning available severities Me amai D soon A neci E Action Jiem 5 14 Managing workspace types Assigned Available bed Tay D soon Ud ee You can assign which of all defined severities will be available for spaces of the selected workspace type This you define for each item type Drag those that you want from the right column to the left column If you don t drag any there all will be available ui ta LE Severity assgrments for Workspace type lextruscs and Item type Task gy Assign Tem type A mer di Assign Status Problem Report oo Assign Prorty 2 Action hem eu a Assign Severity minor A major Es Custom fields A moro S ocn Ga Custom forms bike DO Assign Worfiows Requirement BE Generic Project du Milestone Ot Mecharecs Bt Mochatoncs f Poren Bro BT Softwere Deveio
67. ell Cte NO O mG W ITEM STEP 2 OF 2 a RN A A A LA ete fa Save Quse Doce Mee Administrator Tracks System x Reise nobeed Release 1 0 Administrator Track System Y Target release Release 1 0 My fth test em B IU A Q K x3 c emos Femme sae s KA m B Soo Save the new item by clicking on the Save button in the small toolbar at the top of the pop up window 6 Repeat the last four steps a number of times You can attach some files when you create items or play around with the description text editor 7 Click on the big Find items buttons in the top tool bar You will be taken to the item navigator You should see on the right the items you have just created Fl Status Resporsitle Last modified E L comtruci n Example p me Test Project Beugrube auieben opened Adminisiratos Tracks 11 8 2013 19 98 98 gt eect E Tao Tet Pojet Fundament gielen Administrator Tracks 12 00 2013 17 81 32 gt LP Tracks im gea Tet Project Kellerseinde versrhalen memet Mdrminieirator Tracks 12 09 2013 14 19 13 Lei X0 Hardware a ga Tent Penject Kelleri gen oper Administrator Tracks 12 08 0013 14 19 13 Tos F ages Test Project Decke gielen pen Administrator Track 12 09 2013 14 19 13 4 PERSONAL BASKET Fl magma Tet Project Copla Kellermdeo giefen oprost Administrator Tracks 12 03 2013 14 16 00 pem F ama Ted Project Research erature cree Administrator Track DI OR 2014
68. enter a new known encrypted password string into the database There is information available on the forum on how to do this 1 Goto the login screen Click on the link labeled Forgot password 52 er name Panaon meras The rome ser on makas vaaka velth Trasckpolus ever ei 2 Enter your e mail address in the form 3 Click on the OK button An e mail will be sent to you with instructions on how to create a new password 3 3 Working with items that comes up Trick Forgol Patrail e Caper ind ion varios Forgot pampueord fera eto de te dere unes which ou Foro nee brid with the ysbem l Cancel Funiber 3 3 Working with items Each item consists of a number of properties and history information The properties are shown as fields on forms Forms permit you to enter or change properties They also permit you to act upon an item like closing it or changing its parent item Lar System Adminierator Help Log oft ES j pa Y wal aS o F vits K Cockpit Browpe PROCTER Find items w Reports Admiriirabion e Creeks item AAS track T Wien d TE isle aro om Taal rear af hana fid Tand E Ei tione UE sus UE ehe conca D Da E 3 MIEW ITEM E ailosod ly fith test item ox Q4 Dam Me P Cage Sai ee Choowe parent Mai Print fg Set Private gi Archive MA Delete LAE IP m Exe Na 5 Project Test Project losue bype Task ig Creabed 05 25 2013 15 48 28 Priory
69. falls together with the due date a dot is displayed If an item starts at that date there is a little bar left of the arrow If an item is due that date there is a little bar right of the arrow When you click on the link you are taken to the item When you hover over the item a tool tip will appear and show you more information on this item Custom List This tile permits you to display a list of items with their item number and title based on a pre configured query This is for example helpful if you want to display the items that have been changed lately in your tile rather than explicitly executing a query every time Configuration Before you can use this tile you need to configure it Follow the general procedure to configure a tile outlined above to get to the custom list filtered item list configuration page as described above Teamdesk for team members myF iRerview label imolemerted Last used op k pac Open wor ackages p pending bugs p Textfiter The description of the tile will include the name of the filter you have selected so there may be no need to customize the title of this tile The filters you can select depend on the query filters that you or your system administrator have defined and that you Can access Save your configuration by clicking on the Save button You will be returned to the tile configuration Click on the back button in the toolbar area to finalize the configuration The Panel
70. fields read only By default all fields are shown and all fields are writable except for those where it doesn t make sense to change them You must be logged in as system manager or system administrator You can define a role such that it will permit only to see certain item types This can be useful if you want to have other parties participate in your process but you want to keep some of your items visible only to people of your own organization 1 Inthe top toolbar select Administration Customize User roles Alternatively click on the Customize User roles bar in the left navigation area i XL Track Sytem Administrator Help oT A eee e s Li i i ckt Cipt ioeeveropeus diem pra Adeenesion Ce e track ELLA er ade soy Mytting Werkspaces Rode put rra Appears in selections for Acc s only bo kem types Hidden fue MB Users a pups e D Meeting a Curie m Customer n NY mmis s Action Mem Actions 2 m T Sais Ure El T DE Requirement ais ner cec A teorica arar a Manage roles that can be assigned to users Roles defina read any aj Mutua Scheie permitions for beri in workspices 2 Select a role by clicking on it and then click on Field restrictions in the toolbar Select the fields you want to hide and the fields you want to make read only Customizing Teamdesk Wo CETUR ALL x F Communes Peek Hider Read oniy Budget inp down h 7 Fat Jk Ilem type Li main S
71. from a given list The default value is configured as part of the list not as part of the property Nae Manufacturers Note You must have defined already a simple list before you start defining a item property of this type Otherwise you may not be able to complete the definition of an property of this type Semele leat mane PC Manufachirer When you place this property on a form it will look like shown below Mewlett Packard De Medion Toshiba Seemens Fuptsu Manufacturer Cascading select parent child Cascading select list of type parent child permit to select from a list of parent items and when a parent item has been selected the list of selectable child items changes as well For example the parent list could be products and the child list could be components Customizing Teamdesk Note You must have defined already a list of this type before you start defining a custom property of this type Otherwise you may not be able to complete the definition of an property of this type In our example we have a short list of customers Bosch and Siemens The children are divisions of Bosch and Siemens For Bosch we have divisions Benzin and Diesel for Siemens we have divisions telecommunication and medical All this information is contained in the list named Customers Cascading list reme Customer w When placed on the screen this selection would look like shown below BURSA Bosch Benzin s ia liad When
72. history Not everyone may be permitted to enter planned values there is a special permission flag for this It depends on your organization if you are permitted to enter and change budgets or if this is reserved to the managers Estimated Remaining Effort Beside the planned value there is a value called the estimated remaining effort i e estimated remaining work and estimated remaining cost Here one can enter actual estimates how much work and money it will probably take to complete work on this item As time goes by the estimated remaining effort may become more and more precise Together with the actual cost it also may be larger or smaller than the planned value Changes to the estimated remaining planned value are not recorded in the tracking database the last value entered is the only visible one including the person who entered it into the Teamdesk system The estimated remaining planned value can be selected to compute the earned value or grade of completion This can be more accurate than the oftentimes used 0 100 percent or 25 100 percent approach Actual Cost Overview For each item you can get an overview of the actual cost already booked and how they relate to the planned value and estimated remaining planned value This overview can be filtered and shown in different views There is a bar graph that concisely describes the situation for this item The blue bars show the total budgets while the other bars show the expen
73. immer diese Aktion ausf hren Abre TOR Save the file to your local disc drive In our example this file has a size of about 9 MByte The size very much depends on the size of the attachments This file can be imported into another Teamdesk instance 6 8 2 Exporting space type configurations You can export complete workspace type configurations including custom properties and screens from your Teamdesk instance and later import it into a different instance This permits you to develop a Teamdesk configuration on one machine and transfer it to a production machine when it is ready You must be logged in as system manager or system administrator 1 Goto Administration gt Customize gt Workspace types 2 Select a workspace type and click on the Exportbutton You will get an XML file containing the entire workspace configuration This includes tem types and item type assignments Forms and form assignments tem properties and fields Specific lists and options 246 FES 6 9 Using the TC command line client 6 8 3 Exporting workflows You can export sets of workflows from another Teamdesk instance This permits you to develop your own workflows on a development system and move them to a production environment once they are ready 6 9 Using the TC command line client You can perform many administrative tasks like adding and changing users groups workspaces and role assignments using the Teamdesk command
74. item numbers included in your Excel sheet If that is not possible you can define a combination of identifier columns which should uniquely identify each item For example you can set the originator project and title combined as a unique identifier This implies that these three fields are not modified between re imports and that their combination is unique If a matching item is not found a new item is created If a matching item is found the changes from the non identifying columns will be applied 4 Each row is validated against the regular field validators before it is being added just like it would when you create an item from the web interface If all validations described above succeed the row will be saved as a new item in the Teamdesk database Conflict Resolution When importing data from an Excel sheet there can be conflicts for example when Teamdesk recognizes an Excel row as an existing item but there is conflicting data within that item between the Excel version and the Teamdesk item version If inside the Excel sheet there is no column for the last edit date there is no usable history data available and all fields that have been changed in either Teamdesk or Excel can be in conflict If in Excel there is data for the last edit date Teamdesk can perform some intelligent conflict handling because it can take into account the temporal order in which changes happened The handling differs for fields that have an explicit hist
75. kind of catch all project from where the items are regularly transferred to their final points of destination Typically one or two people monitor this catch all project and take action when items come in Each project can have their own e mail inbox configured if it likes to do so In this case the global e mail inbox might be obsolete Allowed domain pattern To prevent users from unverified domains e g hotmail com gmx com to register a Perl5 regular expression can be defined so that only e mail domains matching that expression are allowed to register You most likely will have to change the example default on the site configuration page Example pattern 8 t bosch com This example permits just users from domain bosch com to register Some more examples 8 t t online de t computer org matches all users from domains t online de and computer org The pattern Nw Nw NG Nw N Nw 2 3 matches all e mail domains with no restrictions 7 2 4 Full text search configuration Teamdesk can index the text of item properties and some types of attachments like PDF OpenOffice WinWord Excel PowerPoint HTML RTF and XML The following section describes how to configure full text search in Teamdesk Enable full text search You can enable or disable full text search Full text search requires some storage space on disk particularly if a lot of large attachments need to be indexed The computational b
76. line client from a Groovy console Installing Groovy You can download Groovy from groovy codehaus org Downloadtt Follow the instructions to install Groovy on your personal computer Installing the Teamdesk libraries You can download the TC package from www trackplus com en download html Install the files in this package to Your home directory groovy lib This directory probably already exists when you have Groovy installed Running TC in a Groovy console or shell Execute Groovy install directory gt bin groovyconsole or lt Groovy install directory gt bin groovysh Make sure on your Teamdesk server the webservice is enabled see Various configuration items Then in the Groovy console type import Com trackplus TO login admimn tiesl htctps looalhost 9080 track s IC help replacing localhost 8080 track with your servers URL and the user name and password with your user name and password Ifyou want to get a JSON string with all users and print it to the console assuming you have administrator rights type String users TC getAllUsers System ot printlin users Some more methods to get you started are listed below See the TC API reference available via TC help for up to date information Modifier and Type Method and Description static java lang String addGroup java lang String groupName Creates a new group with the given name static void addPersonsToGroup java lang String groupID java l
77. lt entityAttribute gt lt entityAttribute name symbol gt lt entityAttribute name objectID gt lt CDATA 1007 gt lt entityAttribute gt lt entityAttribute name isDefault gt lt CDATA N gt lt entityAttribute gt 202 5 12 Custom selection lists lt entityAttribute name parentOption gt lt CDATA 1004 gt lt entityAttribute gt lt entityAttribute name sortOrder gt lt CDATA 1 gt lt entityAttribute gt lt entityAttribute name list gt lt CDATA 1003 gt lt entityAttribute gt lt entityAttribute name deleted gt lt CDATA N gt lt entityAttribute gt lt referredDependency dependencyld 1004 dependencyEntityType TOptionBean attributeName parentOption gt lt trackEntity gt lt trackEntity entityId 1008 type TOptionBean gt lt entityAttribute name label gt lt CDATA Honeywell gt lt entityAttribute gt lt entityAttribute name CSSSTyle gt lt CDATA gt lt entityAttribute gt lt entityAttribute name symbol gt lt entityAttribute name objectID gt lt CDATA 1008 gt lt entityAttribute gt lt entityAttribute name isDefault gt lt CDATA N gt lt entityAttribute gt lt entityAttribute name parentOption gt lt CDATA 1004 gt lt entityAttribute gt lt entityAttribute name sortOrder gt lt CDATA 2 gt lt entityAttribute gt lt entityAttribute name list gt lt CDATA 1003 gt l
78. lt value gt lt entry gt Sentry Enable user synchronization with LDAP gt lt key gt enabledUserSync lt key gt lt value gt true lt value gt lt entry gt Sentry lt Enable group and group users synchronization with LDAP gt lt key gt enabledGroupSync lt key gt lt value gt true lt value gt lt entry gt lt entry gt lt BaseDN for group synchronization gt 261 Administering the server lt key gt baseDnGroup lt key gt lt value gt dc itk engineering dc de lt value gt lt entry gt Sentry lt Deactivate users unknown in LDAP gt lt key gt deactivateUnknown lt key gt lt value gt true lt value gt lt entry gt lt entry gt LDAP filter expression for users gt lt key gt ldapFilter lt key gt lt value gt lt value gt lt entry gt Sentry LDAP filter expression for groups gt lt key gt ldapFilterGroups lt key gt lt value gt objectClass groupOfNames lt value gt lt entry gt lt entry gt lt key gt firstName lt key gt lt value gt gn lt value gt lt entry gt Sentry lt key gt lastName lt key gt lt value gt sn lt value gt lt entry gt lt entry gt lt key gt email lt key gt lt value gt mail lt value gt lt entry gt lt entry gt lt key gt phone lt key gt lt value gt phone lt value gt lt entry gt lt entry gt lt key gt groupName lt key gt lt value gt cn
79. mLocation gt SSTP lt if hocat on 2has contente St Location SSTP lt if gt oe oe o P lt tmacro gt SSTP lt macro makeTopicTable meetingTopics gt SSTP lt list meetingTopics as topic TP Nrule 4mm 0mm 10mm S topic IssueNo Voi topic 21 tle amp Xrule 4mm Omm 10mm S topic Priority amp Nrule 4mm Omm 10mm S topic Status rule 4mm 0mm 10mm pageref top S topic IssueNo MM htpline lt list gt TP lt macro gt o o o H FU o o o o o o o o H H FU o o ox H FU P lt macro makeTopics meetingTopics gt lt list meetingTopics as topic gt P lt assign slevel topic WBS WBS color tpred lt if slevel 1 gt chapter lt if gt lt if slevel 2 gt section lt if gt lt if slevel 3 gt subsection lt if gt lt if slevel 4 gt subsubsubsection lt if gt S topic title label top S topic IssueNo P S4 topLe Description 3a limp P lt macro gt oe oo oo o op o H FU o o o o o o H Fa HA FU oe oe oe newpage 6 begin textblock 150mm 160mm 10mm textblockcolour includegraphics width 28mm trackLogo jpg SXend textblock o 289 The Teamdesk Wiki vskip 8cm begin center LARGE color tpred bf S project Nvskip 1 0em Huge color tpred bf title wskip 1 0em LARGE color tpred bf StrRequirements Nvskip 1 0em end
80. mail subjects look like this Project yourProject Thus you can have your e mail client sort Teamdesk e mails into project specific folders You can also direct all Teamdesk messages by the X Mailer field in the mail header It is always named Trackplus 1 In the top toolbar select Administration gt My profile gt My settings AS K L Acmincstrabon Y Create tem w Ly My settings gt Projects W Automall assignments nd MAE users groups 77 Generate iCalendar URL let Customize b GENENENB 055 actions m gt A 65 Manege server 2 Select the tab labeled Reminder e mails 50 3 2 Registering and changing your user profile ri Sore Access data Reminder e modis Other settings Gener al settings Q po 4 MTM Flan Poles o y o 7 o Hemindes bevels and bead kwot gelegentich 0 9 oe gering 0 y 0 3 Mark the check box named Do not send e mail to me 4 Click on the Save button in the tool bar to save your configuration You will not get any e mails from the system any more at all except for password recovery e mails 3 2 10 Configuring the locale The Teamdesk system has been localized in many different languages You can choose which language is presented to you by either setting the preferred language in your browser or by setting the language in your profile 1 In the top toolbar select Administration gt My profile gt My settings ae Amer in we x
81. needs Full tracking of all activities all changes are recorded Compared to using a standard issue tracker or bug tracker Teamdesk will give you the following benefits Fully hierarchical permits you to handle thousands of projects with thousands of tasks with thousands of people Support for agile methods like Scrum and Kanban Powerful role based access control down to single properties You only make visible to others what they are Supposed to see Highly configurable via the user interface You can make it exactly fit your terminology and needs without programming skills Support for top down and bottom up planning effort tracking and project monitoring Full tracking of all activities all changes are recorded Teamdesk implements proven project management methods and build upon methods used for personal productivity management Teamdesk can be configured to a wide extend and it therefore takes a little time to understand how to adapt it to a particular application scenario 1 2 Installing Teamdesk Company Intranet Q Q Eclipse Client External Developer External Developer e Track Server 1 Developer 4 9 EFE EEE AAA AAA AAA Ka Eclipse Client Browser D Firewall Q Manager External Developer Qs Manager Home Supplier Figure 1 2 Teamdesk usage overview You can find more information on the ideas behind Teamdesk in Agile Teams Effective Task and Project Management available on o
82. new item The field is empty The field contains the current date The field contains a constant date The field contains a date related to another date field plus a number of days Defining constraints 5 10 Item properties You can set restrictions on the date values a user can enter The earliest date can be set to be either now or some fixed date The latest date can be set to be either now or some fixed date Epecific ooefeguration Cn ames O new O Data Create date plus X days E empty now O Date at ampty noe Date Compute boton up Validate divergence Ma restricbon Hierarchical behavior When used in an item hierarchy specific date fields come with a default behavior as described below System fields Start date and End date of parent items are calculated from the start and end dates of their descendants bottom up The calculated values cannot be modified System fields Target start date and Target end date of parent items are checked against the target start dates and target end dates of their descendents Any conflicts are indicated but not corrected or prohibited Conflicts between target start dates and start dates bottom up and target end and end dates bottom up are indicated but not prohibited You can overwrite this behavior as follows Setting the hierarchical behavior to Compute bottom up enforces that the date field value of parent items is calculated from
83. once they are ready 6 8 Exporting data from Teamdesk 6 8 You can export items and configuration data to a variety of systems including Excel sheets MS Project files and other Teamdesk instances Exporting data from Teamdesk You can import data from another Teamdesk installation for example to merge two different installations This is a powerful and potentially dangerous operation and therefore enabled only for system administrators This sections describes how to proceed and what happens during the process Overview Teamdesk permits you to import items and all associated data from another Teamdesk instance In the following we will call the Teamdesk instance that provides the data source and the Teamdesk installation that gets this data and makes it part of its own database target a Offline synchronization b Importing and merging 7 of ues and projects Ez m p men E Tracks E A Sanar d Source ee Track Seran A Sink To copy data from one Teamdesk instance to another you first have to export this data at the source To define the set of items to be exported you execute a regular query and export the result from the item navigator Note that you can copy entire spaces this way or just parts of a spaces and even all spaces of the source The export process creates a ZIP data file including all data and attachments which you can import into the target installation Export
84. overview pages called the cockpit or dashboard Based on the metaphor of cockpit in a car or plane this digital version of a cockpit provides you with the input necessary to drive your business 3 4 3 Baskets A special kind of predefined filters are baskets You can organize all your items in your own baskets Each user has his personal set of baskets Baskets permit you to perform personal productivity management based on the Getting Things Done GTD method while still keeping things in a collaborative context You can put items into a specific basket by dragging them from the right navigator area to a basket For some baskets you will be asked for further information For example when you delegate items by dragging them onto the Delegated basket you will be asked for the new responsible person These items will then show up in the In basket of the new responsible You can reach the basket predefined filters from the Item Navigator left area Figure 3 4 Baskets Related Links Tasks Items and Projects on page 31 Items are the central objects of Teamdesk Items can be of various types like mile stones bug reports action items Items have a lifecycle and items are contained in spaces Item Navigator on page 86 When you apply a filter the resulting set of items is shown in the item navigator 344 Filter repositories and folders You can store your filters in filter repositories You can organize e
85. people do not have an account with your Teamdesk installation Such access is also helpful when you are using the Maven build system to automate incorporation of Teamdesk items into Maven generated project reports Teamdesk permits you to create permanent links that run a query under your account returning the result as either an XML file or in the regular Teamdesk item overview You can choose parametrized queries and you can choose if you want to the user to remain logged in after running the query This can be useful if you use the guest user as the one providing the access and to give users the ability to sort and group the data in the item overview 1 Select menu Find items gt Manage filters Customizing Teamdesk Ld Find fuporte ies Create tom w te pym remm Si uer iava Outstand ng Name My items Acrmiristratos Tracks System Um the manager Bojari Adrian I m responsible Barbed Low Meetings Ernst Manuela Unscheduted Freen Keg Closed recently Friedrich Matthias Added recemtly Guest Jon Updated recentiy Henderson Fred My fiters Lang Hartmut T Last used AV GS Mira David Insti j Pich Gabriele ARANAN pero Penna ac at haan tomas 2 Select the filter you want to create a permanent link for from the list of filters available Y aL fa Li Fed items w Reports Administration Y Create item v My items vlder Add View filter T ft E Farado 5 Link 6 Delete Managers items Name Type z All open i
86. personal items and define via access restriction on the access permission page that only role Extern can access this list The third approach is to use the privacy flag on items you want to hide You can set this flag when creating items or later on when you modify your own items It is not possible to set the privacy flag on items you have not originated Small develooment teams lean informal Here is an example for a lean configuration This works very well for small teams in open cultures with less formal approaches The following item types are used tasks mile stones You may delete all other item types You can use the default priorities and severities The following states are being used opened suspended closed processing There should be no workflows configured thus it is possible to go from any state to any other state All team members shall have role responsible This will give you a solid yet open process which is very efficient for small teams Large development teams lean formal Here is an example for a lean but more formal configuration This works very well for larger teams where it may be necessary to restrict state changes to certain people e g that only a tester can close an item or that marketing should not see bugs only known to the developers The following item types are used tasks problem reports request for enhancements mile stones You may delete all other item types You can
87. prompted for a password If it hasn t been changed from the default it is changeit 7 13 Adding your company logo The license conditions permit you to replace the Teamdesk logo by your own company logo as long as the modified version of Teamdesk is not distributed outside the company to which this logo belongs For example it is possible to replace the Teamdesk logo with the Bosch logo as long as this modified version of Teamdesk is used inside Bosch It is not permitted to place for example a Sagem logo onto Teamdesk and have Bosch use this modified version inside Bosch To replace the Teamdesk logo with your companies logo you have to replace the following files 219 Administering the server lt TRACKPLUS_HOME gt logos trackLogo png 68x28 for the web interface top right logo lt TRACKPLUS_HOME gt logos tracklogo gif 98x40 for mail templates lt TRACKPLUS_HOME gt logos logo 254x105 png 254x105 for report templates 7 14 Configuring Teamdesk with Jenkins You can configure Teamdesk to work together with the Jenkins or Jenkins continuous integration server This section describes how the procedure of setting Teamdesk and Jenkins up properly Overview Jenkins or Jenkins are web based tools to automate continuous build processes in software development projects Continuous build processes are particularly beneficial when you have automated unit or system tests that you can run with each build These tests ensure that you do not
88. properties Teamdesk knows about In addition you can define any number of custom properties The labels can be localized and may have been changed on your system When you change the property name you have to use that new name in all places like report templates and TOL filters Table 3 1 System properties reference Field name Label AccessLevel ArchiveL evel Description not used deleted or archived Build a text property for software build nos Comment CreateDate Description Duration end date minus start date holidays are not considered EndDate The deadline In case of top down support this is the bottom up value as confirmed by the contractor IssueNo A system wide unique number for this item IssueType LastEditedBy LastModifiedDate Manager RACI accountable Originator Author Priority Project ProjectSpecificlssueNo 84 A project specific unique item number Together with the project prefix this makes Field name Label ReleaseNoticed ReleaseScheduled Responsible Severity StartDate Status SubmitterEmail SuperiorWorkltem Synopsis TargetStartDate TargetEndDate TasklsMilestone Attachment Link Expense BudgetPlan Fields in TOL on page 78 85 3 4 Finding items Description a system wide unique item number It is null if project specific item number support is disabled In case of bugs the release or phase in which this bug was detected Release or phase f
89. property types like text properties numeric properties selections and date properties provided with Teamdesk It is possible to extend the number of property types using the Teamdesk plug in architecture 5 10 1 Item properties overview Teamdesk has built in system properties and you can add any number of custom properties Properties and fields In Teamdesk we distinguish between properties and fields Properties belong to items and fields belong to forms or input masks On a form there is a field for an item property However items can have properties that are not visible on a form Note If you want to use an property you have to place it on an input form so that it can be accessed see Customizing forms All properties are global but their properties like label tool tip and selection list can be overwritten for each item type for each workspace type and item type for each workspace and item type Property properties are inherited down the hierarchy system item type workspace type and workspace A workspace manager may define or overwrite custom properties only at the workspace level For more information have a look at Configuration inheritance This approach fosters reuse of existing custom property definitions across many workspaces makes it easy to change configurations globally while preserving full flexibility down to each workspace The figure below shows at the top the global configuration When defining system a
90. receive from the Teamdesk system to the information you are really interested in you can configure the item change notification scheme For each project you can configure a combination of a trigger and a condition or work with the project or system defaults If you are a project administrator you can define a trigger and condition settings for your projects Configuring e mail notifications is a 3 step process 1 You define an automail trigger unless you want to use an existing one The procedure is described in Configuring automail triggers 2 You define an automail condition unless you want to use an existing one The procedure is described in Configuring automail conditions 3 You assign a combination of a trigger and a condition filter to a space or all spaces that do not explicitly have their own notification assignments The procedure is described in Assigning automail trigger and condition Related Links Triggers and conditions on page 29 You can receive e mail notifications from the Teamdesk system when items you have an interest in are created changed or due You can control under what circumstances you receive such information by means of automail triggers and automail conditions 3 6 1 Configuring automail triggers Automail triggers define which user induced actions trigger a notification from the system 1 From the main menu select Administration gt My settings gt Automail assignments UE diimaman se Great
91. server Windows Active Directory Server or LDAP server is to be used the user name you enter here must be the same as that used on the directory server The second important parameter is the users e mail The initial password is communicated to the new user via e mail so make sure the e mail is correct If the user has forgotten his e mail he has to ask the system administrator to look it up If you as the system administrator have forgotten your password and your e mail address or the e mail connection does not work the only way to reset the password is to directly write an encrypted known password into the database There is an explanation on the user forum in the FAQ section on how to do this Modifying user parameters As a system administrator or system manager you can modify user parameters to assist the userin the configuration process or when adding a user to the system A detailed explanation of all parameters can be found in the user task section since these are the same parameters the user can change Only the system administrator can assign users to organizational units assign them an employee identification number and configure their session timeout These fields are read only for regular users Deactivating users As a system administrator or system manager you deactivate users for example if they have left the company or moved to another location Deactivating users means they are still in the database and their ent
92. server for further analysis You can now select the sheet inside the Excel file from which you want to import items Teamdesk will try to map all columns in your Excel sheet to its own fields You can control this mapping process manually Teamdesk will memorize your last mapping definitions and reuse them in all subsequent imports so that after your first import all following imports typically require just uploading the file In the next step you define how Teamdesk should handle required values that it cannot find in your Excel spread sheet There are two options either the row is rejected or a default value is being inserted by Teamdesk If there are problems with the spread sheet Teamdesk will give you exact hints on the row and data it has problems with You can then correct the spread sheet and upload the file again 23 Teamdesk for team members If everything goes well Teamdesk creates one item for each row in your spread sheet You can only import system and custom fields It is not possible to import consulted informed information costs or budgets You don t have to enter a project in your spread sheet You can select a project during the import process for all items The order of the columns in your spread sheet is of no importance You should just keep it the same in all subsequent imports to minimize your configuration effort Column Mapping The column headers should be mapped to the Teamdesk fields If a column header
93. specu gire conf e M LH Fou can an E mi LT aS Ez az BS X3 Laser Printer System properties System properties are the properties that are built into Teamdesk Many of the system properties have some logic associated with them like the author property the manager property the responsible property the item type property and so on For an overview on all system properties have a look at System properties These properties always exist even though they may not appear at the user interface You can overwrite the labels and tool tips of these properties at each of the levels mentioned above thus permitting you some limited customization Custom properties As a system or workspace administrator you can define new properties An property has an property type like text or date If you want to define properties offering a selection list you first have to create the selection list before you define the property Custom properties do not automatically appear at the user interface You have to explicitly place them on at least one custom form before they become visible to users Deprecated and required properties All properties can be marked as deprecated or required 5 10 Item properties Deprecated properties cannot be selected anymore from the property selection list when managing input forms They are still in the database but they cannot be used anymore when designing new forms If an property is marked as required users h
94. system for projects where accounting has been enabled This estimated remaining effort shall give an indication on work progress It can be changed any time changes are not recorded in the history trail Your project administrator must have enabled accounting for this project and must have assigned accounts to this project You must have permission to edit an item that is you have been assigned a role in the project by the project administrator which carries this kind of permission flag 1 Select an item either by typing the item number into the search field or by selecting an item from the item overview 2 Inthe tab area at the bottom of the page select tab Work Costs History Comments 0 O attachments 0 Worndog Costs DL watchers 0 T Links 0 O Add Eo Delete E k Date Changed by Subject Work h Cost Account Description Total actual work 0 00 Hous Total actual cost 0 00 Work Cont Set by Budget Planned value PV 28 00 Hours Constructa Karta Estimated remaining effort Completan Actual esperse Larmated remaining effort 3 Goto the lower part of the panel On the right side there are two little edit icons Click on the icon in the row labeled Estimated remaining effort 4 A pop up window opens Add or modify the estimated remaining work and cost and click the Save button once you are done A new estimated remaining effort has now been assigned to this item There are no e mail notification
95. term like amp objectClass2group ou Groups firstName The LDAP property name for users first name lastName The LDAP property name for users last name email The LDAP property name for users email phone The LDAP property name for users phone number groupName The LDAP property name for the group name After you have modified this file save it and restart the Tomcat server Providing your own LDAP synchronizer There are many ways to set up an LDAP server If you want to synchronize groups and roles you can provide your own code to replace the standard Teamdesk LDAP synchronizer See Managing scripts for an example custom LDAP synchronizer LDAP via SSL Teamdesk also supports the secure Idaps protocol To use Idaps you have to deploy the Idaps keystore file under the name trackplus ks in the attachment root directory subdirectory keystore as described in Using SSL and TLS encryption on e mail and LDAP connections The LDAP server needs to be configured for LDAPS as well As an example for the Apache Directory Server there is a good description how to enable LDAPS under http directory apache org apacheds 1 5 33 how to enable ssl html For a Windows server we had to modify the ApacheDS configuration file as follows lt l SSL properties gt lt property name enableLdaps value true lt property name ldapsPort value 10636 property name ldapsCertificateFile value C jdk1 5 0 bin zanzibar ks
96. the reporting period it is not visible when exactly and what for the expenditures were made Table 3 2 Accounting report person project account Person Project Account John Doe PA 234789 432789 543214 PB 632789 756789 Diana Smith PA 432789 Time Money 400 00 250 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 Person Project Account 832789 PC 932 89 Project Cost Center Account Person Time 45h 40h 3 11 Using report templates Money 70 00 0 00 This report groups expenditures first by project then by cost center thereafter by account and then by person Expenditures are accumulated over the reporting period it is not visible when exactly and what for the expenditures were made Table 3 3 Accounting report project cost center account person Project Cost Center Account PA 850350 234789 543214 756 89 850351 432789 532790 PB 850350 123456 654321 Project Account Person Detailed Person John Doe Diana Smith John Doe Diana Smith Janet Age James Dean John Doe Diana Smith Time Money 400 00 250 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 70 00 0 00 This report groups expenditures first by project then by account and then by persons Expenditures are displayed with details i e each expenditure of time or money is recorded with the item it was made for and a brief description as entered This report is particularly useful as a detailed
97. those item properties you want to change When you check an property on the left the corresponding input field will be activated and you can enter the desired change B ouk copy M Number of items selected for buk operation 7 latus set to ge ffnet y Manager set to v Domin Hida v iy Responsible set to v Administrator Track You have a number of choices when copying items You can select to include the item history in the copy You can include attachments and you can copy items including all subordinated items i e an entire tree Furthermore you can copy watchers like informed and consulted with each item Click on the Save button Linking items You can link items directly from the item navigator le In the item navigator mark at least two items you like to link to each other 92 PR sl Li Cockpit Find items Mera Asmirigeratien Create item FILTERS al E T integration Toti camber of aun found 3 Filtered 3 WORKSPACES iem ha Project Tue f CET Support zi Satus opened 3 Finanzen A Verwaltung am Teimegalon Define all deadlines IT Heipeiesk ra Tr inergration Creer ean nr pubic serat Leader cine me TP integration Create test copes a a d Harris A Vestrieb Tante arie TP regrat X3 Laser Prinber a Y FILTERS Y All Ae B 2 Click on the Action button and select from the menu Link items 3 Select the desired link type eventually add parameters and save
98. time A good way to check is again the setting in your own e mail client software License Outgoing emal Incoming e mail Full text search LDAP 550 Other Ipscoem nsg aver E mail submissions IF T Mail server protocol d por C IMAP E Hall seras name e Mail server port 110 e Mailbox puthantercalion Mailbox user name ge Mailbox password Encrypted connection 3 Nene O TLS if avadabie O TLS O EL E More options Keep messages on server a Accept ur rcram Sender e E mail defaut project se 2 Alkon ema domain pabam ea peg Pe uw sw e Led e ad Test connection 257 Administering the server Mail server name and port Mailboxes are managed by mail servers Here you enter the name of the mail server where the Teamdesk system mailbox resides You can leave this empty if you do not plan to use the item submission by e mail feature and do not require authentication by first reading a mailbox before sending anything Typically you should leave the default port set 110 for POP3 or 143 for IMAP and 995 for POP3 via SSL TLS and 993 for IMAP via SSL TLS Mailbox user name and password All mailbox servers require you to authenticate yourself before retrieving any e mails Here you enter the user name and password associated with the Teamdesk system e mail inbox Be careful if you try to reuse an existing private account you might loose e mails since they would be read by the Teamdesk system and it is possible that contention
99. to extract these items from the Teamdesk database The FAQs contain the title and the description fields of an item The FAQs are generated in directory TRACKPLUS HOME Faqgs They are also offered for download at the browser interface You can modify style and appearance of the FAQ pages by changing files in the TRACKPLUS_HOME Faqs whc_template directory prior to generating the FAQs eoo FAC Link daesn t work E ala Dec TEA file Jopt trackplus Fags TRCW 51 htmi e LO whek index Suchen Link doesn t work When a naw issu es orvaled Ira Enk in theo emma which is sent to ho responsible 0 o 0 person dotant work With copy the Hyper link open a g frelox and paste the hypar Erik into the address held till adeo Eu Pauly Example al weror ln yeliow RD pop ups http arme vend muetier comtrack primthem motion kms 1054 Bom Anbi sgen ginis Supprecasa Malerial uua ogee Lini doen work I S not possible lo empty Lean Meda Eousscenar Data ieee type Support Case Creation of release oriy Projects and ries Checa Tre Via scroll up Suche nach Artica emmern Saenigennummem 2 Dialog WES Kopienen git lae Fidhaig Dis k zu langer WE Biszisichnung ru lr brik in commenes Figure 3 14 FAO example 3 11 Using report templates You can view a subset of all items through filters The items that pass a filter are displayed in a item overview The item overview serves as a quick way to display a number of items ma
100. transitions from yourself to anybody else 2 2 2 Handling incoming e mails The Teamdesk system can read e mails from a mailbox and either create new items or add comments to existing Items You can associate a single mailbox with the Teamdesk system or you can associate a mailbox with each space Teamdesk will behave like any other regular e mail client like Outlook Lotus or Thunderbird towards the e mail server If you like Teamdesk can read e mails from a mailbox and either create new items or add comments to existing items When creating new items the subject becomes the item title the body becomes the item description and any attachments are attached to the item as well You can control who may create items by e mails Using the workflow engine you can perform any operation on the e mail or the item created by an e mail before itis being committed mail server y imap prodobe com Track server support prodobe com projectA prodobe com Figure 2 7 Connecting with an e mail server Based upon markers in the subject line Teamdesk can detect if an item already exists In that case the e mail is added as a comment to the existing item 30 2 3 Structuring items 2 2 3 Handling communication threads You can send e mails directly from the Teamdesk system Responses to these e mails are automatically associated with the original item In a Support scenario a customer sends you an e mail stating his request Thi
101. v a oE gerra 0 o 9 3 Select the desired e mail format plain or HTML 4 Clickon the Save button in the tool bar to save your configuration From now on Teamdesk will send all notification e mails to you using the selected e mail format 3 2 8 Configuring e mail reminders In Teamdesk items can be assigned a start and a due date If a due date is assigned the Teamdesk system can remind you that such an item is due soon or is overdue You can set the weekdays on which you want to be reminded as well as the number of days before the due date that you want to get the reminder 1 In the top toolbar select Administration gt My profile gt My settings La Amr Ww Cresta Era ve Sy Hpsritimpa Prnjects Anomal azsigraments na M Users groups C Generate iCalendar UBL L fe Customize G idii bd Actions b D ene EM chs a Pianege server que Fz 2 Select the tab labeled Reminder e mails ra Sore Access data Reminder e mods Other settings Gener al settings Q pe MTM Plan Rotes Q z o z o Remue bevels and bead o gelegentich 0 vix geri 0 Y o o 9 3 Select the minimum priority level and severity level that an item must have to cause a reminder message This way you can make sure you get reminder e mails only for items important to you 4 Setthe number of days you want to be informed in advance before a due date comes up Days lead 5 Set the weekdays o
102. virible lo all ce Ma worktpe El ese Wires idea oa o las dl dad a A sai ji T Manage fiters fuat miim Mame Customers Custom foes Duseriptica All our customers A Dussiem afi ribules PY veorkfioss T Ausign AOCOUPER of Ankama e api k Y Version control F Export to MS Project Savr Cane e sport from MS Proper 4 Select the node to which you want to add list entries or edit an existing entry Use the context menu to add or edit an entry BS wisi Add custompentry o Edit global lat UR Debes global list Copy global list D Export global list 5 Name the new entry or edit the name of an existing entry and optionally give it some style information The styles can be used to control item appearance in the item navigator Then click on the Save button Gy AK a o Dinha ees Nara i Bahn de Miriy m Severity Add custom entry Rim t di m Name EMEA pl Listo List Defaut EZ riep speofic iri bobus ye Background color t Color Font aight x Font style Test decoraci n w You can assign an icon 16 x 16 px GIF or PNG format to each entry You can furthermore assign a CSS style to each entry which will be used to format items in the item navigator For example you could use various shades of red as background color to illustrate the urgency of an item You can drag entries in the list on the right to another position The entries will be offered at the user interface in the same order as shown in the g
103. want to move to another organizational unit Select the new organizational unit where you want to move these users to from the selection box below the list of users Click the Edit button on the right side The selected users have now been collectively moved to the new organizational unit 6 6 Managing cockpit templates For occasional users the configuration of the cockpit can be challenging and may require too much knowledge and time You can provide a number of cockpit templates that users can pick up to save themselves configuration work As a system manager or system administrator you can assign cockpit templates to users 6 6 1 Adding a cockpit template You can add a new cockpit template from scratch or you copy an existing one Two create a new cockpit template you first give it a name and description and then you configure it You must be logged in as system manager or system administrator 237 Managing the system In the top toolbar selectAdministration gt Users and groups gt Default cockpit Alternatively click on the Users 1 and groups Default cockpit bar in the left navigation area A v j i LL A Cockpit Browse ve Cus na fams v Reports Acsrracetraition Ww Create item v Aj My settings a Ones soy 4 Configure Workspeces unnerctrtor Add Default cockpit x MB Uses 4 gous 9 y A uses Name Standard cockpit complex AG Description 3 Save the new template definition by clicking on the
104. when it is ready It furthermore gives you the option to quickly pick up one of the preconfigured setups for your application area like software development hardware development mechanical engineering and so on You must be logged in as system manager or system administrator 1 Goto Administration Customize Workspace types 2 Clickon the Importbutton The workspace type configuration will be added to the importing Teamdesk instance The following rules apply will get an XML file containing the entire workspace configuration This includes Any item type not present in the importing system will be added Any form not not present in the importing system will be added Any properties not present in the importing system will be added Configurations that were inherited in the exporting instance will be made workspace type specific in the importing instance If you want to have them inherit from higher levels in the configuration hierarchy you must rest the specific configuration manually 6 7 3 Importing data from other Teamdesk installations You can import data from another Teamdesk installation for example to merge two different installations This is a powerful and potentially dangerous operation and therefore enabled only for system administrators This sections describes how to proceed and what happens during the process Overview Teamdesk permits you to import items and all associated data from another Teamdesk instance In th
105. with all their information Item information is inaccessible Warning Changing the workspace status may make the workspace inaccessible 4 2 Managing team members You can assign users to workspaces and grant them access rights via roles Without an assignment a user will not be able to see the workspace or any items within You must be logged in as space administrator space manager or system administrator 1 In the top toolbar select Administration gt Workspaces Alternatively click on the Workspaces bar in the left navigation area o y AO X 4 Cockpit epee nexus Find bers Reports idimi cw rme hen Y eer Js Add Workspace b Add suba General Vp siis Reden i TT Ree CET Support Cusbomine Lie R Actions Finarcen amp Veraaitung T Marage fiters id AA Report templates 2 Select a workspace in the leftmost navigation area 3 Select the Assign roles node in the second navigation area from the left Teamdesk for space administrators 2m A o Y ET AS i rack System Ademinutrator Help Log off d fis Qxkp Bromeworkspaces Find Rem y Repote Adminktration v Crate em v track Le My settings I7 Workspaces i Y Contes Drag one ox more users from the list on the right to the left column to assign l s car Ue assign Roles Veen them role Responsible for workspace Integration space N Release My informes CBT Support nue Ps Axugned Available IS Finanzen amp Verwaltung Y Manage
106. with this release When delivered Teamdesk offers four release statuses as shown in the table below Status name Description planned These releases appear just in the Released scheduled selection boxes Typically such releases have not yet started and are planned for the future Status name on hold released archived 4 4 Managing workspace specific lists Description These releases cannot be selected in the Release scheduled selection box However they will show up in the Release noticed box Such releases have typically been put on hold and no new items can be created for them These releases cannot be selected in the Release scheduled selection box However they will show up in the Release noticed box Such releases have typically been published and thus no new items can be created for them anymore Releases with a closed state will not appear in either the Released scheduled or Release noticed selection box Such releases have typically been published some time ago and are not supported any more You can change the names and the semantics of these statuses via Administration gt Customize gt System statuses You can also add new statuses there Each status has a type flag which determines the availability of a release The values and logic for each type flag is described in the following table Type flag name active e g under development inactive e g released planned closed
107. work sheet that can be given to customers as a work and expense report Teamdesk for soace administrators Topics Managing spaces Managing team members Managing releases phases Managing workspace specific lists Assigning accounts Default automail assignments Configuring workspace specific cockpits Version control Generating release notes 121 Teamdesk for space administrators 4 1 Managing spaces Teamdesk organizes all items in workspaces or spaces for short Spaces are administered by users that have space administrator privileges for their spaces This chapter describes tasks and concepts typical for project or space administrators Creating a new workspace System administrators and managers can create new top level workspaces Space administrators can create sub spaces You must be logged in as system administrator or system manager if you want to create a top level workspace You can create sub spaces for workspaces where you have space administrator rights 1 In the top toolbar select Administration gt Workspaces Alternatively click on the Workspaces bar in the left navigation area 2 Click on the Add workspace button in the toolbar 3 Anew screen appears in the right Fill out the forms on the various tabs Use the context help if you are uncertain about the meaning of an entry a Select the workspace type The workspace type determines large parts of your new workspaces configu
108. you check an property on the left the corresponding input field will be activated and you can enter the desired change B oa eae M Number of tems selected for buk operation 6 E Projekt et to Propkt onih w 7 issue Type ait to v Aufgabe v ts tat sot to wv ge ffnet v T Y 4 Click on the Save button If possible all items are now changed to the new values If it should not be possible to change an item for example if you have just read access to it or are not permitted to move a due date you will be informed that the change was not performed as desired There is a peculiarity about changing start or end dates You can set the earliest start or end date to some specific value and for all the other items in the change set their dates are moved relatively to the item with the earliest start or end date You can either choose the start or the end date for this feature For example if you choose to move the earliest start date all other start dates will keep their existing time difference to the item with the earliest start date If you want to keep the time difference to the end dates as well you need to mark this with the provided check box Teamdesk for team members Copying a set of Items You can copy a selected set of items or execute actions on a whole set of items and in the process change properties like start and end dates responsible persons states etc Make sure you have the bulk selection column acti
109. you set the switch called Do not include database schema to unchecked This will create a new database for the target system which should contain all information of the source database Caution There may be some losses during the data conversion process due to database mapping differences For example some database systems have limits on text field sizes in which case a truncation could result You should therefore check the conversion result carefully 2 2 7 11 Non western character sets 7 11 Non western character sets Internally Teamdesk uses Unicode and UTF 8 for page encryption We recommend that you use UTF 8 or UTF 16 for your e mail templates and database connection The configuration of the database character encoding very much depends on the database system being used so no general instructions can be given here We strongly recommend to use UTF 8 or UTF 16 at the database interface as well 7 12 Using SSL and TLS encryption on e mail and LDAP connections You can use encrypted connections between Teamdesk and your e mail server to prevent passwords from being transmitted clear text across your network G Note In case you use a certificate issued by a Certificate Authority like Verisign Thawte Geotrust or Comodo you do not have to do anything here it should just work In case you use a self signed certificate or a certificate from a Certificate Authority not known by your system you have to install the certificate i
110. you should decide to make the budget change public you can change the planned value to 45 hours The estimated remaining effort will not be changed by this operation 3 3 21 Permissions The options you have in working with a specific item depend on your role s in the project and your relation to this item This section describes the behaviour of Teamdesk with regard to item permissions Enabled and Disabled Tabs The following tabs are disabled when you create a new item History since there will be no history for a new item Comments since it does not make sense to comment on an item that hasn t even been created 68 3 4 Finding items The attachment tab is always active The Work Costs tab is enabled if accounting is active for the project this item belongs to and if you have any of these rights add expenses or view all expenses or modify budget These rights you obtain indirectly by the role s you have in this project The Watchers tab is enabled if you have the permission see all watchers or modify watch list These rights you obtain indirectly by the role s you have in this project The Version control tab is enabled if there are any links between this item and the version control repository set up in this system e Notice There may be entries here even though you have not set up version control for the project this item belongs to In this case it is likely that the link comes from a repositor
111. you wish The backup process can take some time You can select if you want to be informed by e mail when the backup is finished You can also choose if you want to include the attachments in the backup process or rather limit the backup to the data in the database Selecting to include the attachments has the advantage that the attachment meta data in the database and the attachments stay consistent You could also decide to backup the attachments using your regular operating system backup features o Note You may not be able to execute a backup when at that same moment an automated backup is running You will have to wait until the automated backup process is finished before you can execute your manual backup By default the automated backup is running from Monday to Friday at 23 15 each night server time o Note The backup data is placed into the directory you have configured for attachments in a subdirectory there called dbBackup Automated backup You can enable your system to create backups regularly by itself To enable automated backups activate the corresponding check box You can then choose at what weekdays and at what time on each weekday you want to create a backup 9 Restoring data from backup A system administrator can restore data from a backup file to recover from a crash port data to a new system or go back to previous date In the top toolbar select Administration Manage server Data restore On th
112. 06 5 13 System object states 2 Select Workspace state Click on the Add button to add a new state Select a state in the grid and click on Edit button to modify a state Click on the Delete button to delete a state O t t te T Up BS Workspace status hame Tyneflag 11 Aetease status progress active Ug Account stato on hold inactive archived closed 5 13 2 Managing release states Each release has a state which determines its visibility and controls what can be done with items belonging to it You must be logged in as system manager or system administrator There are four release state values in Teamdesk Each state has a type flag which determines the availability of a release There are four values a type flag can assume as shown in the following table Table 5 8 Release or phase states Status Status flag Description unscheduled unscheduled X Releases with an unscheduled type flag cannot be selected in either the Release scheduled nor the Release noticed box in progress active Releases with an active type flag are open to the entire functionality the system offers These releases appear in the Released Noticed as well as the Release scheduled selection boxes on hold inactive Releases with an inactive type flag cannot be selected in the Release scheduled selection box However they will show up as normal in the Release noticed box released inactive Releases with an inactive type fla
113. 10 57 08 LE Parmi um F mg Test Project Colect experimental dat oprea Aderinietrator Tracka DI OR 2014 10 57 08 8 Try to change the column size in the item navigator by dragging the separation bar in the column header 9 Try to rearrange the columns by dragging them to a new position 10 Add some more columns by clicking on the Columns button in the small toolbar 20 1 5 Taking Teamdesk for a test drive 11 Select the hierarchical view mode by clicking on the little symbol in the top right of the item navigators grid area 12 Select an item and drag it above or below another item 13 Right click on an item and indent it creating an item hierarchy hem nugae aja odia 7 a Uj mom Fl oaa Bem No UB Hy private project Fe Ul mampis n dires Ed Tes groune A Gan gt GQ made O man s El Tacke 4 Bn Gum ELIUEEEN Bl Tracks Suppert n dum F nues n aus Tio cry a euo SET rn an T Mitos m 317 T one meentty ri ig 266 X implemented ordi 5D A fig aar Ej messa n ye Tort open Bo gw T Unuhedued O we Track Son Track a Track Na Track La Tricks Son Track La Trick da Track dox Tracks fa Trick fa Track da rack La Trick f a Tracks da Tr ck fi Total number of ieri found IM Fiend 124 Tie lemplste foc e mail from iem Brihef iend trad componens tor ma Harmar m ewer reeni Synchronize ako departmerta by LBAP ure POF reparte doni vank w h chant ghee fortacecenedarcs whan Ro
114. 285 Eire VO OO SIC TEMAS A a 285 RIUS il OMe Olea GMO MING OCS etate do O nl MO oio Eee Lie 286 HINES Z Tmpoltiig tne VIS S ERUIE BIG el eti 286 Eure c t Dragging Teld sinto LOA E sso eu Re RR tac e RH RN RT edet i 287 Figure 8 14 Example Tor embedding the Wiki in a web SITE dac atico tt tet Dusche e ca ut lnc 292 oia ss E CDL ONE 292 FOWE SIO VS D 293 ROUES eI OUTS TN VST SIONS sacar tahoe mE 293 Foure ele Baneao MEA mmm 293 List of Tables Table Sel System properties reten tada dalt 84 Table 3 2 Accounting report PES on Pro SCT aC OUI raid 118 Table 3 3 Accounting report project cost CENTEF ACCOUNT PELSON cccccccccsssssssesssssssesesssssssssssseessssssccccecssssessssssssessensssssssssosssssssssseeeeee 119 sac etal ein NR m A A N 159 Ee 5o E ade e E O E 154 os o VSS 165 Table DOS Dad alitas 195 Table 5 5 Suggestions tar aoditional MSY DES ia 196 Table SO LISAME MS TO 203 Eo An Ne ET TUUS 206 o gol ora ra A 207 Table 5 9 Input binding keys for workflow STPS iii mmm 222 Tapis VC DITE SOUCIS est banane A inset 222 Table 6 1 LDAP synchronizer fer MNS i ENTE 233 Table 7 1 LDAP synchronizer DararMeters ssssssssssscsssssssssssccccccssssssssssssnssssssssssssssssnossessssecceecesssssssssenensssssssssssssssnsssessssssceeeeesssssssesnsenassesenassasss 262 Getting started Topics What is Teamdesk Installing Teamdesk First login and e mail setup Adding users and worksp
115. 7 configuring reminder e mails 49 consulted add 61 copy attachments 62 custom form 187 form 187 item hierarchy 62 workspace 125 create child item 62 custom form 182 form 182 sibling item 62 workspace 122 create item from Excel sheet 55 239 criticality 194 CSV configure 46 48 custom form assign 182 copy 187 create 182 delete 188 modify 185 overview 180 custom list import 205 custom lists 131 custom property add 174 customize e mail template 222 workflow 213 workspace type 208 CVS link to 64 D dashboard 100 define standard layout 89 define filter 74 146 delegated 35 delegated waiting 35 delete custom form 188 custom list 201 form 188 iteration 129 phase 129 release 129 sprint 129 workspace 124 delete filter 75 146 deprecated property 165 deputy 52 description to PDF 54 diagram 117 docx 285 285 due date reminder 49 E e mail automatic sorting 50 format 48 reminder 49 turn off 50 X Mailer field 50 e mail connection 273 e mail filter 96 e mail notification trigger 96 e mail submission automail 163 e mail template 222 e mail threads 31 edit custom list 199 edit role 153 edit sets 91 email incoming 30 encryption 273 escalation 36 estimated remaining effort 67 event 36 Excel CSV character 46 48 Excel import 55 239 expense add 67 estimated remaining 67 export LaTeX template 285 287 Wiki to MS Word 285 285 Wiki to PDF 285 287 workspace type 246 F FAQ 116
116. 8EF 21649 KV Bid JEXBAOSS3HS To NOonQeacjClyukAOrhivVi 2 mOHXQ KDBR 2 ven QER20 wecdZiuVbd65KkpiSO2IRCR60 MLOKb6VTmw7D u MIISMFheOLOT V7pgXQSkpaAQSCqDindbKu 16020 T d OrW9wEmSMIC T9mbf NIUSER 40K7 7xM k NijohelWzf7 Ts uUo Ow DMY Bd 1m93GWcZ5xAa 1EGqDvAQSH Y TON ATHWEMSOrcalABSEky Gx2hSINW KRZIOOGNCMODCVUTUZUQNKdSTQvxr PUYCALOSLANGOF IREXDNICGUBD2UIR ES Talca MBA YvvApaL Zqut4SOXGXDOJouel RejaoqGOWet 1228Nj 394 PIGBvw J5W SzZgRS2pnrhiSJA gFV7As613G4v2 5D0p TeCqwWYNuLF LGHAMcCIYa 3OomykDBw Inra Zh MxQcBBhhRn Passphreue 55m 4ype ALO SH Y SS Preferred public key Ato OSA RSA f Test 9 Test your connection The save the configuration by clicking on the Save button in the toolbar Your space is now directly linked to your version control system When editing item there will be a tab showing all files including their meta information that are related to this item Please not that it may take some time before any commits to the Subversion repository show up in Teamdesk since Teamdeskneeds to scan the repository on a regular basis to retrieve this information The time this takes depends on the size and number of your version control repositories 4 9 Generating release notes You can generate release notes and copy them to your personal website or include them in a document You must be logged in as space administrator system administrator or system manager if you want to ensure that you Catch all items Enter the
117. Bean import con zune track util event lEventHandier import Comi tune track errors Ermo Data import dir aune track in DADEactory import con auned track itao Person DAC import didun track beans TPersoniBean public class Processing Tolmplemented implements IEventHandier def public HathMap handleEv nt HashMap ingutEindng TWorklhemBean weorkPremBean inputBinding get esae String workFiwEwint inputBindig get workfiwEvernt iria gabs stabusChange Y Pers nDAO personat DAOFactory getFacteng J getPerson iD TPersocilean personBean personDat oadGneapirgName ge wewkEtenBean setFiesporsdtiel Dy personBean gerDbpect EX I In the following there are three example scripts The following script appends a comment at the end of the description field when an item status was changed Please be aware that you may not be able to copy and paste this code since import import import import import import public it might have an unsuitable encoding You probably must replace the white space characters with blanks java util LinkedList Java Uli List java util Map com aurel track beans TWorkItemBean j com aurel track errors ErrorData com aurel track util event IEventHandler class CommentByReopen implements IEventHandler private static SLING REOPEN_SEPARATOR EA I Te RES o S A E feos PRC LIP EL Oe ae ae Rem My INGNON US ANC CON ey NUR NRO A ly S public Map lt String Object gt handleEvent M
118. C i aa S ONICGUBDQU RjeSTaLsrM RN WA TAs SEP oy Pwl sda 7RCIVEYWEePeBH TDONZH NO Toa Rel HIQKRGET Ia O af Test 9 Test your connection The save the configuration by clicking on the Save button in the toolbar Your space is now directly linked to your version control system When editing item there will be a tab showing all files including their meta information that are related to this item Please not that it may take some time before any commits to the Subversion repository show up in Teamdesk since Teamdesk needs to scan the repository on a regular basis to retrieve this information The time this takes depends on the size and number of your Subversion repositories 4 8 2 Git version control Teamdesk can integrate with your source code version control system for example CVS Subversion or Perforce To establish links add item numbers to your version control system submits like lt item no e g 4711 This section describes how to proceed for Git You must know how to connect to your version control system Typically you already have used that information when you set up your version control client software For Git you need to create a clone of your master repository in a place where the Teamdesk application server can access it Log in on your Teamdesk server on the console not on the web interface and clone the repository ssh yourLoginName yourGitServersName git clone ssh yourLoginName yourGitServersName p
119. Click on the Apply icon in the toolbar area You will get a list of items corresponding to the filter expression in the Item Navigator 3 4 10 Applying an instant filter You use an instant filter for creating ad hoc views in the Item Navigator There is no need to save the filter or give ita name 1 Goto Find items gt Instant view Y il Fired items se Reports All itema Butanding Hy tema 2 Inthe window that appears define your filter Check the Menu check box if you want to add this view filter as a shortcut to your view menu under Find items 4 Ifyou like select the property which should determine the colors in the Item Navigator This permits you to have different colors background and foreground depending on e g the priority of an item 5 Savethe filter 34 11 Using TOL The Teamdesk Query Language TOL permits to define filters including search in attached files HTML text XML OpenOffice PDF Excel and permits to perform fuzzy and proximity searches Terms A query is broken up into terms and operators There are two types of terms Single Terms and Phrases A Single Term is a single word such as test or hello Z4 Teamdesk for team members A Phrase is a group of words surrounded by double quotes such as hello dolly Multiple terms can be combined together with Boolean operators to form a more complex query see below If the term consists of just a number only the item number property
120. DOCGQVUTU ApG V 7 Aus DIG V 23DpTeCqmWYNulF 15HAMCTa3OcnmkEi Pash 9 Save the configuration by clicking on the Save button in the toolbar Your space is now directly linked to your version control system When editing item there will be a tab showing all files including their meta information that are related to this item Please not that it may take some time before any commits to the Git repository show up in Teamdesk since Teamdeskneeds to scan the repository on a regular basis to retrieve this information The time this takes depends on the size and number of your Git repositories Teamdesk for space administrators 4 8 3 CVS version control Teamdesk can integrate with your source code version control system for example CVS Subversion or Perforce To establish links add item numbers to your version control system submits like lt item no gt e g 4711 This section describes how to proceed for CVS You must know how to connect to your version control system Typically you already have used that information when you set up your version control client software You must be logged in as space administrator system manager or system administrator 1 In the top toolbar select Administration gt Workspaces Alternatively click on the Workspaces bar in the left navigation area 2 Select a workspace in the leftmost navigation area In the second navigation column click on Version contro A th
121. E cons k a m Hiansge server 3 ms PS F 2 Selectthe tab labeled Other ki jam Access data Kerinder e mails gher settings 4 mganiz ation Last Loge 2012 10 19 1246736 Xoanrabond un Donii hd amp J o SW encodru Western oc BESO 1 t EM xoparabon choract r i hatin Sao atfachmon Fr Chas be COCO ry layout I 3 Set your replacement person 4 Clickon the Save button in the tool bar to save your configuration The replacement person now has all the rights you have and will assume all roles globally and RACI roles that you have For example if you are the manager of an item the replacement will now see this item as if he was the manager However all actions the replacement person performs will be recorded as his changes not yours 3 2 12 Obtaining a new password If you have forgotten your password you can have the Teamdesk system send you an e mail including a link so that you can create a new password It is not possible to retrieve the old password since passwords are stored in the database in an encrypted irreversible way Y Attention Be aware that all accounts with the e mail provided by you will be set to this new password For example if you are the admin user and registered as a regular user with the same e mail address both accounts will be set to the new password T Tip If you are the only system administrator and you have forgotten your password AND your e mail address you have to
122. ES SR Account status en hold inactive released inati archived drad 5 13 3 Managing account states Via the account state you can control if an account can be used to book work or expenses on it You must be logged in as system manager or system administrator When delivered Teamdesk offers two account states open closed Accounts that have been closed cannot be used to book new expenses on However all expenses booked on it remain visible 1 In the top toolbar select Administration gt Customize gt System states Alternatively click on the Customize System state bar in the left navigation area i gp 5 AL Tacks Sytem Adria Heip Log off o F T L Cockpit Browne woriapaor Pind Era gt Reporte ihdeninintration w rn hem w track Ly My settings Ly Mysetimgs gt Le Workspaces NS Workspace state 40 MEE estes for workspaces phases and accounts Select a node in the tree left MB Users A groups E Beier stet Users A groups ps BE Account ate Customize T Manage Miters CT Menos f Actions d Report templates Rest templates E Managasaness ti iy Uer redes 7 Caostcenberi A accounts T Cou cantera BOCOUPES yp u d Ara Link types M rk pus Zi Custom forma Bi cam fora A Custom fiekds el Citation fie emp stat Workings cuc can configure aos for weorkspaced phases and lt a axxxxanbi Select a node in che tren bef 2 Select Account state and click on the Add button to add a new state S
123. F y System states Lists m iC Jg System dates Defaut f mesi TT Workspace types detour e Y Feature y WM Locale editor iur Feature y Scripts Meeting E mail templates 3 The interactive form designer appears i Panent Ch d Grandehild i ire ied eed iina um ei 4 Delete a field from a panel Select the field with a left click Open the context sensitive menu with a right mouse click Parent Chuld iz fener ee 5 In the context sensitive menu click on Delete Confirm the operation in the dialog that comes up e Seite mit Ger Adresse http eandalf 8081 meldet Is Do you realy wart to delete screen field Parenk Ch d Grandchld s La nete 6 The field has now been deleted from the form and the space is available for another field Responsible Pnonty available field space available field space 7 Move afield to a new position by drag and drop In this example move the Manager field to the Author field and drop it there 5 11 Customizing forms PAR YT D ns ws nts sv nad sis Sd sd stall A nd Create Milestone Main Description Label 11 Add a panel to the new tab and change the number of rows and columns to 2 For this select the panel and change the rows and columns parameters in the Properties window dialog available field space available field space available field space available field space 12 Add two custom fields a multiple select and two r
124. Global Item type specific Space type specific Itern type specific Space specific Iter type specific Figure 2 15 Configuration inheritance The following configuration entities can be configured according to this scheme Custom properties Custom forms Workflows At the global level the configuration entities can be either configured the same for all item types or specifically for some item types The same holds true for the space type level and the project type level 40 2 6 Configuration basics You can overwrite any higher level configuration at a lower level For example if you have modified a custom property at the space type level for item type task you can configure this property differently for a specific project and item type task The higher up in the hierarchy you configure entities the less work you have maintaining the configuration Teamdesk for team members Topics Tasks and concepts for team members Registering and changing your user profile Working with items Finding items Item navigator Configuring automail Generating iCalendar URLs Working with the cockpit Browsing projects Preparing and generating FAQs Using report templates 43 Teamdesk for team members 3 1 Tasks and concepts for team members This chapter describes procedures for regular project team members like creating and modifying items searching for items or creating reports Teamdesk is widely configurable
125. Goto Administration My profile Generate iCalendar URL 2 Select the projects that you want to consider when importing start and end dates Then click on the button labeled Generate Calendar URL ri Genero Calendar AL Select a fitar and push Generate iCalendar URL PROJECT Re Promit einfach 99 Teamdesk for team members 3 Beneath the button you just clicked you see a URL Mark this URL like you would mark text in a word processor e g move cursor over text while pressing left mouse button and copy it to the clipboard e g right mouse click copy or CTRL C Then paste it into the proper place in your calendar application You will see your start and end dates in your calendar application Es 39 Januar 200 lhunderbird Dum Beebeten fret Aira Gaar Ebre he Ly 3 aladi das Ld a sisi ela a J uL EL LEA ns lir 3 Mesum Terms beum Fade Tage Haia Tiel Aena Maoa furl Miro Temra suchen Jai UMS d Qo Terre ir den nichsiben 7 Tagen wo ihik 2 Fo D M Do Pr m Tel Bayern Ende L 3 M The mad Fender ie eared Donner Z9 Jano 2009 0 Donnerdtag 29 Jane 200 a 60 1 reed a bile wath Umbsut Ceerestiey 27 Janus 2000 Gar Fresa 30 Januse 2000 Gan H gd d IN CA E IB IO 2 22 23 M 275 25 27 78 3 38 31 q Qe 25 31 Jamar 2000 Kalenderwoche 5 ww bo 25 Jan Mo 25 Jan Di 27 Jan M oo Jan E Fr 30 Jan 5 3 Jan Made barm atd Ern AHA sad ds ee es ber def thas st
126. Jl 11 You can define any number of roles Examples for roles are project administrator manager responsible developer technical sales Roles can be considered a collection of permissions li Users have to be assigned at least one role in a space to be able to access any space information Roles can also be assigned to groups all users in that group then carry that role Workflows can refer to roles In workflows the ability to make item state changes can be restricted to certain roles 2 1 7 RACI roles and the RACI matrix Roles exist to control access to items in general Beyond these generic roles there are four item specific roles based on the RACI method As a user you permanently work in the system under the space specific roles that determine what permissions and rights you have with regard to items in spaces Additionally you may have a more specific relation to a single item like you have created it or you are currently responsible for it These item specific roles are structured according to the RACI scheme N M The RACI scheme defines four roles Responsible Accountable Consulted and Informed 27 Key concepts Responsible Accountable Consulted Informed i responsible i accountabla can seg this om Can sog this item works On this item looks after this 15 informed i informed can modify GAN reassign might give input can modify can modify
127. LE LE LE LE E ES 50 Laser Printer 2 In the property navigation area click on the leaf node where you want to add the custom property In the example shown here we will add a custom property to item type Requirement 8 5 10 Item properties o Age ames d oe Gast Md x configaraisons Babtribuin configuration NL m hama 5 Artribuite ype Sangha checkbox x si Description bf pi e 4 Requirement bestem par babes P Gerveral canfigurabizn iy Label Tooiria B3 VWeorktoace type spectic attritwte config Exploit history WB Versace spec atir buti cong i aiii Apoctle esnfiguratiem Cofauk value Click on the Add button at the toolbar Fill out the form that appears on the right Select the type of property you want to create and give it a name Under this name properties will be searchable later on Name Under this name the properties will be referenced in reports and in search operations Property type Select from the list of available types Important You cannot change the type of an property once you have created it Description Optional field just for administration and book keeping purposes Attribute configuration Name Attribute type Extensible eiect Y esc pton General configuration Label Required Expect history Specific comfiguration Simple ist name Y Enter a label for this property and optionally a tool tip This label will appear on the input forms
128. LabelValueBean getAllRoles Gets all user roles with their names and object identifiers static java lang String getAllUsers Gets a JSON string with all users registered in the systems database static WSPersonBean getAllUsersBeans 248 static static static static static static static static static static static java lang String WSRoleAssignmentBean Java langs String WSGroupEditBean java lang String java lang String java lang String WSPersonEditBean WSPersonEditBean java lang String WSPersonBean 249 6 9 Using the TC command line client Gets an array with all users registered in the systems database getAssignmentRolesByProject java lang String projectID Gets a JSON string list with roles assignments which user has which roles for a project or workspace getAssignmentRolesByProjectBeans java lang Strin projectID Gets a list with roles assignments which user has which roles for a project or workspace getGroupEdit java lang String grouplcb Gets a group bean you can modify and save back getGroupEditBean java lang String group LD Gets a group bean you can modify and save back getPersonEdit java lang Integer personID Gets a JSON string of a user based on his integer object id getPersonEdit java lang String personID Gets a JSON string of a user based on his object id getPersonEditByLoginName java lang String
129. Ma System sues a ES Workspace types az BP Workflows I LE ME oaeeo ES 50 Laser Printer Songs 2 Anewscreen appears consisting of a tree structure on the left and a context sensitive edit area on the right The tree structure depends on whether your are logged in as system administrator or project administrator Click on the custom property you want to remove Add stinbute f Sre G s anderd aribute configurations Amiha aseigum System attributes Ns a ii Cuntoem attributes seca jm CRMCOonbact Gere Deprec p Onih Descrim 1 Participants Click on the delete button in the toolbar area 4 Confirm that you really want to remove the property If the property was never used and is not referred to on any forms it will be deleted Delete artrihute 2 Do you really want Do dielebe this entry Ma See ET 5 Ifthe property is being used either on forms or with items you will be asked again to confirm the delete If you confirm the property will be deleted Delete attribute 4 D There are items having valuls for this attribute Do you really wank to delete the attribute from Yes o If you have confirmed the dialogs he property has been removed from your system Customizing Teamdesk aly Warning Be aware that you will loose all information associated with this property from your system 5 11 Customizing forms You can layout and design your own input masks specific for each action type like create edit a
130. O TT a 16 18 32 22 24 26 28 30 1 hire Are JOL3 STATUS OVER TIME A 0 0 T ug tweet ama iusta el ite LackkiikibttIIIM i120 34 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 1 3 5 H Apr 01 implemented cloped ae apar varia Figure 3 10 Various state over time graphs STATUS OVER TIME see gs sal nu na part Boo m Eg pue 4 H ke tTTTTTT 7 7 222426 22 90 1 3 5 Mrz Apr 16 18 20 STATUS OVER TIME Figure 3 11 More status over time graphs Budget overview The budget overview tile gives you a quick overview of the current project or release state In a table you will see summaries for all items overdue item due this week items due next week and all remaining items For each category the estimated remaining work the degree of completion and the actual work performed related to the planned value is shown The tile can be configured by various aspects like project and release priority state etc Teamdesk for team members Configuration Before the budget overview tile is functional you need to configure it Follow the general procedure to configure a tile outlined above to get to the budget overview configuration page Configuration x Tate udgebSumenang Laid Propects Heiss a o Tracks Je Prajacts Ralenses aif LP Teen 4x Only ems of those projects and releases that are aj J Track Support sbectesd will be displayad Group by releases Grows by M
131. POF dosed Friedrich Meg T items nm es Track 2 x Please create a vertion release 3 2 08 a Export CSV dosed Friedrich eg Y ousada n Ou Tracks Jx I byot denad Friedrich Sing T Mtos Va on Tode Jx Rework responsible and manager List Y Export Excel ened RA Temas T tm the manager nm Ov Wack 2 x Teste para projeto PM dosed Lang Hartmut Tm responsible r O Track Jx zya dened Frecrkh Jorg Y Tm the originator Ow Tacks 3 x TOL Query Names should be unique dosed AM Tamas Y Meetings Inm Ow Track 3 x Maxomum attachment sae shovid be confurabie dosed Ruff Tamas Y ededi pm OQO1u0 Track 3 x Send e mail to all active Track users dened Ruf Tames Y Deer m 3039 Tacke Jx Test all pages with different browsers dosed Bojer Adrian d cub m Om Track 2 x Test al pages with 106 dosed Bojan Adnan nous 9 Qm Tracks 3 x Test all pages with 1E7 dened Boan Adnan e nad Ox Todt Jx Test all popes with Firefox 2 x dosed Bojani Adrian O nee m Os tracks Jx Test al pages with Opera 9 x dosed Bojan Adrian ZEE mp 20x Tock 3 x Test with different appir abon servers dened RM Tomes p O Tode 3 x Test all pages with Tomcat Gx dosed Ruff Tamas PERA P Ow Track 3 x Test with JBoss 4 x dosed Ruff Tamas Q netados r Q1 Tek Jx Test all pages with JBoss 5 x cerned Ruff Tamas E Vom Typ ZIP Archiv Von httpc www trackplus org Wie soll Firefox mit dieser Datei verfahren JOffnen mit Archive Utility Standard Datei speichern _ Fir Dateien dieses Typs
132. Panel3 Grid positions not used are specifically marked in the form designer and are left empty in the rendered form There is only a practical limit on the number of panels you can use You can move panels any time using drag and drop techniques Actions In Teamdesk forms are associated with actions For example you may want to keep the form to create an item as simple as possible while editing an item should reveal all item properties available Adding a comment should only involve a comment description field and nothing else Changing a state oftentimes coincides with a change in the responsible person so this action would require a comment field the state field and the responsible field Teamdeskcurrently knows of the following actions Create item Edit or modify item move item to new project or item type Customizing Teamdesk add comment to item Change item state add child item to existing item To each of these action a specific form can be assigned 5 11 2 Managing custom Forms This section describes how to create assign modify and delete custom forms Assigning custom forms to actions This section describes how to associate a custom form with an item action You must be logged in as system manager or system administrator 1 In the top toolbar selectAdministration gt Customize gt Forms Come tem v 24 My settings 9 o Mrt i din Workspeces Workspaces O sanas mask suugrmerts 1 assign fo
133. Phrase For example to search for a project and management within 10 words of each other in a item use the search project management 10 Range Searches Range Queries allow one to match items whose property s values are between the lower and upper bound specified by the Range Query Range Queries can be inclusive or exclusive of the upper and lower bounds Sorting is done lexicographically Lastedit 20060101 TO 20060101 This will find items whose Lastedit fields have values between 20060101 and 20060101 inclusive Note that Range Queries are not reserved for date fields You could also use range queries with non date fields Synopsis Aida TO Carmen This will find all items whose synopsis are between Aida and Carmen but not including Aida and Carmen Inclusive range queries are denoted by square brackets Exclusive range queries are denoted by curly brackets boosting a Term TOL provides the relevance level of matching items based on the terms found To boost a term use the caret symbol with a boost factor a number at the end of the term you are searching The higher the boost factor the more relevant the term will be 79 Teamdesk for team members Boosting allows you to control the relevance of a item by boosting its term For example if you are searching for project management and you want the term project to be more relevant boost it using the symbol along with the boost factor next to
134. Release 5 0 Teamdesk User Manual Service Desk and Task Management RUN Kr E Steinbeis Transferzentrum trac Task Management Solutions Teamadesk User Manual Service Desk and Task Management E Steinbeis Transferzentrum Task Management Solutions E Steinbeis Transferzentrum Task Management Solutions Steinbeis GmbH amp Co KG Task Management Solutions Eugen Ruoff Str 30 D 71404 Korb Germany Tel 49 7151 994 89 60 Fax 49 7151 994 89 61 Support support trackplus com Teamdesk No part of this publication may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechan ical photocopying recoding scanning or otherwise except as permitted under Sections 107 or 108 of the 1976 United States Copyright Act without the prior written permission of the Publisher Teamdesk and the Teamdesk logo are trademarks of Steinbeis GmbH amp Co KG and may be registered in certain jurisdictions The absence of a trademark from this list does not constitute a waiver of Steinbeis s intellectual property rights concerning the trademark All other company brand and product names may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders Steinbeis disclaims any responsibility for specifying which marks are owned by which companies or which organizations Copyright 2001 2015 Steinbeis GmbH amp Co KG All rights reserved September 2015 If you have any comments or suggestio
135. SECbess SECmLIHOAHTSO Ste ogATwANA WATSON MAZA IwHk7HLS3KBGYLBaEF Uw 1w 5 YokKBTLOL apinu AScR T SO nA GA o 3 LCPWETSS Su Hy Cie Hw pic ED Loses expires on DO O1 2013 Hie rwy users regulares 900 S00 0 License holder Here you can enter the license key Just cut and paste it from the file you have received into the text area Hit the nave button in the small toolbar The number of users and the expiration date of the license key shows in the area below the text box The licensing subsystem supports a number of features The number of licenses for each feature are shown in the bottom part of this tab In case you configure more users as clients than you have in your license the client users will be deducted from the technician user license count Important When requesting a license key make sure you supply one of the IP numbers shown on this tab Do not use the localhost IP number 127 0 0 1 or 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Make sure you are supplying the right Teamdesk version number as shown on the top of this tab area 7 2 2 Outgoing e mail connection Teamdesk can send e mails to notify users of events within Teamdesk To this end Teamdesk acts like any standard e mail client like Outlook or Thunderbird and needs to know how to connect to an SMTP server Teamdesk SMTP user License Outgoing e mar Incomeng e mail Full text search LDAP A 50 Other SMTP user name Track system send from Track Demo System ao System em
136. Save button 4 Proceed to Configuring a cockpit template 6 6 2 Configuring a cockpit template You can completely define what tiles are shown on your cockpit template and how they are organized You must be logged in as system manager or system administrator You have previously declared a cockpit template In the top toolbar selectAdministration gt Users and groups gt Default cockpit Alternatively click on the Users and groups Default cockpit bar in the left navigation area 0 ES L Code Browns workspaces Fed ima Reports Adminigration ee Create ham 1 Jy eng OMe Jee f Dein Ey Mysetia l Wraae Narea M Uses pros Standard Cockpit einfach L us Ai Grogs JE Onanzationel units 2 Inthe small toolbar click on Configure and configure your cockpit template as described at Working with the cockpit 238 6 7 Importing data 6 6 3 Assigning a cockpit template You must be logged in as system manager or system administrator You have previously declared and configured a cockpit template 1 In the top toolbar selectAdministration gt Users and groups gt Users Alternatively click on the Users and groups Users bar in the left navigation area By My settings Bas to By My settings q L sm Workspaces User name 7 Werkspeces Emas adores a en home some HL Users amp groups vebrmaster trackpius com NE HEN pec eni R Actions 2 on tered focale name ind i E E
137. You have deleted the selected role All permission to users via this role have been revoked A 5 5 3 Restricting access to item types and inaccessible to that user Attention When you remove the only role of a user for a workspace this workspace will become invisible You can restrict access to a set of item types for each role By default a role can access all item types You must be logged in as system manager or system administrator You can define a role such that it will permit only to see certain item types This can be useful if you want to have other parties participate in your process but you want to keep some of your items visible only to people of your own organization 1 Inthe top toolbar select Administration gt Customize gt User roles Alternatively click on the Customize User roles bar in the left navigation area X Tracks Symon Adm nigrator Help Log of i sA Or ES M Ju My settings er Add 0 Ly Mysettings Werkipaces Rode pi Workmpaces Appears in s lections For Access only bo iem bynes Hidden feeds MD Users gros beca eed El Meeting A Quim A Lema To Manage filters E Action Bem Consulte D ama T ar M ndge ttrr r a Oe workin ie j R3 rue Manage roles that can be assigned to users Roles define i J Anom Becess permistiona for utens in workspace Pron els a 2 Select a role by clicking on it and then click on Item
138. a system manager or administrator you can remove any template Y mo oc L Find ders e Reports A Ervale Arr D Add ieder hi Adel report Gel Edt bo Oeae mept oh d at Kamn Diet d sd eqpentt Eh pert r propadt Soc 4 Betaled expense with subprajed and Kem Greupod expense by person project merouri Brip exzernae by propre cenbirnirr tar peri 5 5 Roles and permissions Teamdesk manages what users can do with items and workspaces via roles You can assign roles for a workspace to users and thereby give them certain permissions For example you would permit them to view other peoples items or see certain item properties but not others or see only items of a specific item type You can define any number of roles and name them as you like For each role you can configure permissions 5 5 1 Adding and editing roles As system administrator you can add any number of roles to your installation This section describes how to do that You must be logged in as system manager or system administrator You have four different areas you need to address when defining roles 1 General permissions as described below 2 RACI selection list assignments as described below 3 Defining access to item types see Restricting access to item types for more information 4 Hide fields or make them read only see Restricting access to item fields for more information Table 5 1 General permissions Permission Description read any You
139. aces Taking Teamdesk for a test drive Getting started 1 1 What is Teamdesk Teamdesk is a powerful web based service desk for customer support and task management application for teams Teamdesk supports large numbers of projects tasks and users Teamdesk is highly configurable To use Teamdesk you just need a standard web browser Teamdesk is used for customer help desk integrated with project management of development projects task management in engineering projects bug and issue tracking in software and hardware development mile stone tracking meeting agendas and protocols with follow up tracking of action items innovation life cycle management Mechatronical Excel to do lists Leightweight systems replacement workflows Tack and project development Service desk amp as Agile software management customer support alcal Scrum Kanban qn db WM AI P Figure 1 1 Teamdesk use cases Compared to managing tasks and projects with spread sheets Teamdesk will give you the following benefits Web based so all information is consistent and up to date No mailing of files or corrupting a copy of the task list on a file server by unauthorized access Fully hierarchical permits you to handle thousands of projects with thousands of tasks with thousands of people Powerful role based access control you only make visible to others what they are supposed to see Highly configurable it will exactly fit your terminology and
140. ach filter repository with any number of folders just as you are used from a file system You can define any number of filters and store them in filter repositories You can organize your filters in folders like date related filters meeting filters tracking filters etc Over time you may accumulate a certain number of useful view filters As this list grows you may want to categorize the filters to better keep an overview For example you may have special filters for meetings or projects or for progress monitoring and so on Teamdesk permits you to structure filter repositories using folders just as you are used from a file system Teamdesk provides three types of repositories to store filters in a personal filter repository project specific filter repositories a system wide filter repository 2 3 4 Finding items From the public repository you can copy view filters into your personal repository to modify them there You can delete your own published filters from the public repository but not those owned by anybody else Y il sie Find ioma e Reports E inva view Eg Add Folder 73 Pra LE Arcsuniina 3 Cate related Alsa i dl Pubi T Al seen ites arg Each user if the Teamdesk system has his own personal filter repository Here you can store modify and delete filter expressions that you have developed for yourself and found useful You can copy some of your own personal filters into the public repositor
141. al address demojgtrackplus com Q SMTP server data SMTP server name smtp strato de Q SMTP security connection V None TLS Y avellable TLE O SA o SMTP authentication The outgoing mail server SMTP requires authenncaton SMTP authentication mode SMTP user patsword Mailbox ver pacoword Connect to mad server before send SMTP user name demojBtrackplus com SMTP password Clear The Teamdesk system can send e mails to its users For all system generated e mails like reminder e mails or password e mails Teamdesk uses as send from its own e mail address For user triggered e mails like changing an item you can decide whether that users e mail should be used as the sender address or the Teamdesk system address You need to use the Teamdesk system address if you want responses to these e mails being added as comments to items If you do not want to enable item submission via e mail this e mail address does not necessarily have to have a real e mail inbox associated with it it can be a virtual e mail address You would not see any messages sent to that address in the Teamdesk system anyway If you want to use the item submission via e mail feature there has to be an e mail inbox associated with that e mail address 255 Administering the server All e mails sent directly from the Teamdesk system will have as their from address the Teamdesk system e mail address and as the from name the server name For example su
142. ale ERROA com inel radio ubl Ere dated boo Maer ERROR Com poenam phon xesprkc valusator waldatons Eenadvalidator ERROR 3 IMPO 3 era comal lach dbaeve jota Ema foerninder Job INFO om awed rado ute Had bing Crna berate Hard INFO com inel back util Ennaiaod ing adl INFO 7 8 Data backup A system administrator can backup all data from the database and optionally all attachments into a ZIP archive file Furthermore it is possible to create such backups automatically on a regular basis The backup data can be used to restore the database and all attachments at a later point in time Note For production environments with more than 25 users we recommended to use native database and file system backup tools rather than the internal backup facility described here Manual backup In the top toolbar select Administration gt Manage server gt Data backup 270 7 9 Restoring data from backup bd Sart backup Create immediate Backup Send me an mail when backup i Gone Backup fie name 2013_04_25 13 26 Automated backup configuration A omabted Gata backup Y o Directory for backups opt trackplusd Backups ude attachments Bock jn these weekdays o Backup at this op thes m y 1 o Seve configuration Available backups in opt trackplusd Backups Backup fe name See Date You will see a list of backups that are already available The default naming scheme is YYYY MM DD HH MM However you can choose any name
143. alized png The density is usually a compromise between screen appearance and size in the PDF 290 8 8 Making the Wiki part of web site 8 8 Making the Wiki part of web site You can embed the Wiki in a standard web site making it part of a regular web presence You can asssign your own style sheet to customize the Wikis appearance To make your Wiki part of a web site include an i frame element in your pages HTML code using the following link lt iframe class wiki src http yourTrackServer track wiki action mainCls myCustom amp externalCss http YourWebServer files customWikiStyle css gt Wiki lt iframe gt On your standard web server for the example above you should have a CSS class wiki defined similar to this wiki width 100 height 100 min height 700px This will control the appearance of the iframe element You can add a frame shadow margins and so on On your standard web server you furthermore place a CSS stylesheet that is being picked up by the Wiki to control the its appearance You pass the link to this stylesheet as a parameter externalCss in the link with which you Call the iframe element Here is an example forthe customWikiStyle css from above myCustom myCustom headerMaster Hide the header display none important myCustom SstatusBarMaster Hide the status bar display none important myCustom westTreeNavigator table x grid row focused x grid td
144. ally happening regarding this item The item can be closed by the responsible or a manager once all tasks associated with this action have been completed Milestone tracking In a well managed project there will be lots of binary milestones those that are either passed or not passed lt is an often observed project sickness that milestones are not defined in a binary fashion You will hear people coming up with terms like conditionally passed 90 done almost there and so on If you hear such phrases you know you are in trouble Customizing Teamdesk It is in the nature of a milestone that you have either passed it or not It may take some effort to define project milestones but it pays well The best milestones are connected to assessable 100 complete results For example a good milestone would be customer requirements reviewed with customer and frozen A bad example would be customer requirements 50 finished A milestone has to have a due date associated with it It can be either opened or closed The state transition from Opened to closed marks the passing of the milestone It is quite common that the milestone passing dates as envisioned in the first project plan have to be moved In a badly managed project such movements become visible only at the milestone due date or worse at the next quality gate With Teamdesk it is no problem to move a due date but the change is recorded and you can watch
145. alue Description cockpit itemNavigator true false true false in hours e g 8 0 in seconds 1 1000 html plain in minutes Teamdesk can be configured such that external or client users can create an account themselves and automatically join a group Some supervisory activity is required to grant clients specific permission to view or enter any data to 234 6 4 Managing groups spaces to assign them to organizational units and groups and to activate or deactivate their accounts Handling of client users is the same as for regular Handling of client users Handling of client users is equivalent to that of regular users see Managing regular users with the differences noted below To manage client users go to the Administration gt Users and groups gt Clients menu entry Adding clients by e mail submission You can allow people to create items by e mail In this case a new client user can automatically be created if the e mail comes from an authorized domain The system tries to guess the first and last name The automated e mail response contains a link to the newly created item and a link where he can register even if self registration is not enabled Assigning roles to client users Client users cannot be assigned a role directly Instead they have to belong to a group and inherit their permissions from that group Limited client user permissions Client users can only View a fixed list of their open and clo
146. and not existing in the target instance is being added Users are assigned to roles in this new projects as they have been in the source instance For existing projects no role assignments or roles are being added New users are being added as deactivated users The import process can only add data it will not delete any data For example if in the source instance attachments have been deleted since the last synchronisation in the target instance these attachments will remain active To import data go to Administration Import Import from other Track eoo Administration u Administratii M WARNING This is a far reaching operator Piensa make a database backup first Flags smieci a fie Track ze Version 4D 2 71 Enterate 0 2013 5tesnbess Tractus Use the file selection box to select the file to import This file has to be exported previously from another compatible Teamdesk instance Click on the Import button in the tool bar The data in the file will be imported into your Teamdesk instance and merged with any existing data 244 6 8 Exporting data from Teamdesk 6 7 4 Importing workflows You can import sets of workflows from another Teamdesk instance This permits you to use one of the pre configured workflows for your application area or you can develop your own workflows on a development system and move them to a production environment
147. ang String person IDs Adds a number of persons identified by their object ids to the group with the given id Static java lang String addProject java lang String projectName 247 Managing the system Creates a new project or workspace and saves it to the database static void addRoleAssignment WSRoleAssignmentEditBean roleAssignmentEditBean Adds a role assignment a users role in a workspace static void deleteGroup java lang String groupID Deletes the group with the given object identifier Statue word deleteGroupWithReplacement java lang String groupblD gsava langsetbfrung replacementID Replaces all references to the group with object identifier grouplD with the replacement and then deletes the group with grouplD static void deletePerson java lang String personID Delete a user from the database based on its object id Static void deletePersonWithReplacement java lang String personID java lang String replacementID Delete a user from the database based on its object id static void deleteProject java lang Integer projectID Deletes a project or workspace based on its object identifier Stacie vord deleteProject java lang String projectID Deletes a project or workspace based on its object identifier static Java lang String getAllGroups Gets a JSON string with all user groups Static WSGroupBean getAllGroupsBeans Gets an array of all user group beans static WS
148. ange cost and budget related information for each RACI and item role manager responsible author consulted informed watchers and for each item property whether a message is triggered or not Important Automail triggers cannot be used to exclude others from notification e mails Any user can overwrite for himself the space or system wide settings Automail triggers define how YOU will be informed or others that also use the same trigger As a standard user you don t have to define your own trigger settings In this case the space or system defaults will pertain to you If you want to define your own trigger start with copying an existing one With automail conditions you can define complex filter criteria based on new and previous item property values For example you only want to be notified if an item was reopened or when it was closed You can define your own conditions or use existing conditions and you can assign your personal condition specifically for each space If you do not do this the settings provided by the space or system administrator prevail All properties can be selected with either their new or their old value New means the property value that was the result of the action causing the automail trigger and old means the value the property carried before the action This makes it possible to define conditions that check for transitions for example state transitions from anywhere to closed or responsible
149. ap lt String Object gt inputBinding TWorkItemBean workItemBean TWorkItemBean inputBinding get issue String comment workItemBean getComment if comment null comment trim length 0 List lt ErrorData gt errorList new LinkedList lt ErrorData gt errorList add new ErrorData Comment is required by reopen inputBinding put errorList errorList else String description workItemBean getDescription if description null description e description description REOPEN_SEPARATOR comment workItemBean setDescription description 5 17 Managing scripts workltemBean setComment null return inputBinding j The next script changes the responsible to a certain person guest Ju This script changes the responsible to guest when a status change occurs import import import import import import com com com com com com aurel aurel aurel aurel aurel aurel track track track track track track beans TWorkItemBean util event IEventHandler errors brrorData j dao DAOFactory dao PersonDAO beans TPersonBean j public class ChangeResponsible implements IEventHandler def public Map handleEvent Map inputBinding TWorkItemBean workItemBean inputBinding get issue PersonDAO personDAO DAOFactory getFactory getPersonDAO TPersonBean persornBearn personDAO loadByLoginName guest worklItemBean
150. are these entities with others in your project or you can make them available to anyone via folders similar to folders in a file system There are three kinds of folders 28 2 2 Communication e private folders only accessible to yourself e project specific folders readable by anyone having a role in that project and modifiable by anyone having project administrator privileges for that project e public folders readable by anyone and modifiable only by a person having system administrator rights You can organize folders hierarchically if you have a lot of entities In the item navigator you can turn of the folder structure for queries and display them flat for quicker access 4 C3 ABFRAGEN Meine Vorgange j Managers Vorgange Bearbeiters Vorg nge Verfasser Vorg nge Besprechungen 4 C Privat gt EJ Datums bezogen gt Meine eigenen Alle Beispiel einfach Diesen Monat f llig z Letzte zwei Wochen geschlossen Neue diese Woche Neue in diesem Monat t EJ Projekt gt EJ ffentlich 2 2 Communication Teamdesk can inform you about any events within the system as you like You can tune the notification system such that you get exactly the right amount of information For example when an item has been changed that you are interested in you can get an e mail notifying you of the change The notification system is structured into automail triggers automail conditions and automail a
151. as in its first child list Child 1 1 Child 1 2 and in its second child list Child 1 L1 Child 1 L2 Child 1 L3 The names can of course be anything At the user interface this would look like shown below When the parent selection is changed the two children lists change along 5 10 Item properties Cascading select parent child grandchild Cascading select list of type parent child grandchild creates a hierarchy of dependencies The child list is unique for each parent The grandchild list is unique for each child This can be thought of as a tree with a nesting level of two For example if the parent item list would contain car manufacturers the child list could contain models for each car manufacturer and the second list could contain engine sizes for each model of that manufacturer The engine size that could be selected would depend on the specific model of that manufacturer Note You must have defined already a list of this type before you start defining a item property of this type Otherwise you may not be able to complete the definition of an property of this type Parent Child Grandichal Fold by pe Cascadang pelea pee ge In our example we have defined a parent list with three parent entries For each parent we have defined three children For each child we have defined a number of grandchildren aca beck mare Parent Chuild Grandculd At the user interface this property type would look like shown below When you chan
152. at O Tree vem Bk Heeranctucal yate AIRS 10 18 E Gantt apa 1 14 00 Se Agit board 8 Teamdesk for team members Flat list view mode The flat list view mode permits you to see items across all workspaces disregarding any hierarchical order This permits you to group and sort by any field and see items ordered exactly by these criteria This mode further supports pagination Tree view mode The tree view mode permits you to see items across all projects including their hierarchy This view furthermore permits you to see the item history and comments and the full description You can drag items to other places in the tree but you cannot order them within the same hierarchical level The order within the same hierarchical level is determined by the sort criteria you have applied Compared to the flat list view mode this mode might take slightly longer to load since it can contain much more data Hierarchical Work Breakdown Structure view mode The Work Breakdown Structure view mode groups items in projects You can drag items to any new position within that project and determine the position even within the same hierarchical level This is essentially the same behavior you know from structuring text documents or from tools like MS Project You would use this mode when you need to structure items into a hierarchy and the order of items is important Agile Board view mode The Agile Board view mode displays items as cards The i
153. at estratta tas 38 PPP AA 38 PP m 39 Adol o eM E Stasera ede ML A 40 2 6 1 Workspace TUDO S sionismo ini ni ia 40 202 COMO IIA ia 40 3 Teamdesk for team MeMbeLS ccccccccsssssssssssssssscsccocssssscssscsscsscsocsocsacsacsacsacscsscssscsessassacsacsaceaces 43 a Tess ano concen or te Men EC E a 44 3 2 Registering and changing your user profile eene ttt tette ttt 44 A tg UU Rm 44 AA UNE ae eom EP 45 22 3 ACUVALING central password storage LOAP aora 46 3 2 4 Configuring CSV separation CHALACTOM a aacscsssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssseeeeeeeeeeceseeeseeeseeeseeeeseeseeeee 46 2245 Contig ring the layout Minds 47 2426 CONMOUNING attachment download OSI el VICI sostenere ani iui Dti d 48 7 O n T E TM UR IMMER 48 328 COMO ING e mail reminder assem aida 49 2429 Tumma On e ma NONATO eS 50 PALE cs RT 51 321 ena teplacement PESO rra 22 3212 ODAMNING A NEW pass WOT ide ideo 52 INONT IS aaa 53 ID o ON Es 10 S m E NO ET 54 Joa HNOS pun RS OPM a M SNR ea ass sa abate cates ccd at ade oa 54 ERA yeP aM ane 1 PC 54 A Ean A Room 54 AS MS a 55 EE A EEE TS 57 337 PAU atache 21 EUR 58 EN B AGaNg d Screen o ER Rm 58 o a E a a i E 58 EEEE iNT Ste A A A econo PA A Aue dama E T 60 Sak Lan Ina san ana OWS O Oonain a i A Um 60 232412 Changing The kemi watches riada 61 Sy lS Pua Vs E E E ll E E A m 61 E T A O onar o O POE O A 62 3 3 15 Creating a sibling O
154. ated or modified You must be logged in as system manager or system administrator When items are created or changed depending on the automail trigger settings a message is prepared for this item to be sent to you With automail conditions you can investigate the item belonging to this message and depending on the result of the evaluation the message is passed on to you as an e mail or it is stopped and discarded Automail conditions are logical expressions that relate to item properties If the condition evaluates to true an e mail is sent to you With automail conditions you can take a look at all item properties and not only their new value but also their value prior to the change This permits you to filter on absolute values as well as on value transitions Each automail condition can be named and can be stored in a repository The system administrator can place conditions into the public repository so that all users can access and use them A space administrator can copy conditions to a space repository so it becomes available to all users that have a role in any of the spaces the space administrator manages You can copy a public automail condition into your private repository and modify it there to your liking You can modify and delete your own conditions and you can create new conditions 1 In the top toolbar select Administration gt Customize gt Automail Alternatively click on the Customize Automail bar in the left nav
155. athToGitRepository path To Your Server Clone Dir It would suffice to create a bare clone with just the administrative information ssh yourLoginName yourGitServersName Git clone bare ssh yourLoginName yourGitServersName pathToGitRepository path To Your Server Clone Dir Now log in on the Teamdesk web interface You must be logged in as space administrator system manager or system administrator 1 In the top toolbar select Administration gt Workspaces Alternatively click on the Workspaces bar in the left navigation area 4 8 Version control 2 Select a workspace in the leftmost navigation area 3 In the second navigation column click on Version control Y Attention The version control node will only be available of the space type for this space supports this feature y aT Ae L1 A Tracke System Adminatrator Meo Log off y oi Cocks Browse veorkpaons Dem navigator w Reports Adrmiridretion w Create tem e track Ly My settings hd Save uj Workspaces dl General edet csi a Anien O5 B varala al co eniro or ein AI doe Gh Enache ty higo Roles repository web browser to directly view files or file sets d with a specific item in this application ul Geschaftegebaude El Retease ue samme a RM T Manage Filters T o a Servier Desk a Seuergerat az forms item snie PP Wortkfiows e Basin Account ad atomai verson control Ceneral options DER am y pato f sers friedi renos test gt o Import from sje
156. ation that all required fields are present This means that they are either defined in the spread sheet and have been associated with the required field in Teamdesk or you have selected that default values should be used in case there are no values in the spread sheet 2 Each cell value is read and verified whether it contains a valid value The specific handling depends on the type of the cell a Label text fields Selection list entries are specified by their label For persons the label pattern is last name first name It will be verified whether an entry with that label exists If it does exist it will be checked if it is valid or not For example for the state it is checked that it can be the initial one or for the manager it is checked that this person actually has manager rights in that project and so on b Boolean check box fields the Excel cells should be either of boolean type or the text value should be Y or N true or false c Numeric fields either the Excel cells should be of number type or the number format should correspond to the user s locale or should be in ISO format Other values are taken as text as they appear in the cell d Date fields the Excel cells should be either of date type or the date format should correspond to the user s locale or the date should be in ISO format YYYY MM DD 3 Rows are checked for duplicates before being added The most robust identification is possible if you have the Teamdesk
157. ation turned on in Teamdesk see LDAP and SSO 7 Locate the Tomcat server configuration file server xm1 usually at lt TOMCAT_DIR gt conf Make sure you have an entry like this lt Define an AJP 1 3 Connector on port 9006 gt lt Connector port 9008 protocol AJP 1 3 tomcatAuthentication false redirectPort 8443 gt This should enable your Teamdesk to run with SSO behind an Apache web server Caution This is not a complete description for setting up a secured production environment In particular you should disable the standard access port 80 or 8080 in server xml and you should force SSL encrypted connections from your Apache web server to the browsers for the t rack location 279 The Teamadesk Wiki Topics Wiki overview Creating documents Creating document sections Embedding items Exporting documents Creating Word templates Creating LaTeX Freemarker templates Making the Wiki part of web site Document versioning tbd 281 The Teamdesk Wiki 8 1 Wiki overview The Teamdesk Wiki permits you to collaboratively create documents that can be viewed by a larger audience Wiki documents can be exported into Word documents based on Word templates making the resulting document look like a handcrafted one The Wiki document navigator To access the Wiki navigator click on the Wiki mode switch in the main menu To go back to regular mode click on the cockpit zo TG keh bin der Baehr Ges
158. ative functions like creating spaces or managing users System administrators have full access to the system including the permission to add and delete spaces and users Users with system administrator rights are marked with a I at the end of their name System managers have full access to the system including the permission to add and delete spaces and users In contrast to a system administrator however they cannot modify the server configuration like setting index or attachment directories or enabling and disabling LDAP and web services A configurable level for users that prefer basic functionality and a simple user interface The difference to an easy user is that the simple level has no restrictions regarding reading other peoples items or filtering A configurable level for intermediate users that don t wantto use the entire system functionality and have thus some user interface elements removed A configurable level for users that want to use most of the system functionality Managing the system Removing users permanently As a system administrator or system manager you can remove users from the database permanently This is particular useful if test users had been added or mistakes were made when creating the user name Otherwise this is arather grave operation since it affects all items this user has ever worked on Since Teamdesk is a tracking system it will not delete any users activities from the system
159. avallabia System Infcemation Diesplmys varius nronrenal infomation lo aes Irouble aAoolirg Build Executor Status nr System log capturas output from java atil Legging oup rotated to Jenkins Step 3 Configure the Teamdesk Jenkins Connector You need to establish a connection between Teamdesk and Jenkins To this purpose you add one ore more Teamdesk connectors to your Jenkins installation From the Jenkins main page select the Manage Jenkins link E New tam Manage Jenkins amp People A New version of Jenkins 1 512 ls available for download changelog E Paca Sly Configure System CGondigun global soffings and patna Secure Jenkins defina who is slowed lo accesshrsa Ma system Poland Configuration from Desk Discard all he loaded daba in memory and reload ewendhing from file system Usetul when you modified config filos dirscthy an diak ins enabds plugins that can extend the Tunctionalty of Jenkins updates avallabla aysien Information Displays viribus arronmenal indormnafon lo assist Tnouiblis shooting Bulld Executor Status System log captus output iram java atil legging output nalatad m Jenkins Download the Teamdesk Jenkins plug in from the Teamdesk web site and install it in Jenkins 2 5 Administering the server supports groups SSH Credenbals Plugin Y This plugin allows you to store SSH 161 credentials in Jenkins SSH Slaves plugin Y This plugin allows you to manage 18 s
160. ave Cancel 3 When you are done click on the Save button in the lower right corner of the configuration pop up window You have now restricted access to some item fields for users carrying this role in a workspace 5 6 Managing cost centers and accounts Teamdesk permits to budget and track times and expenses for items To this purpose the system provides accounts and cost centers All expenses are accumulated in accounts and each account belongs to a cost center Projects write their expenses against those accounts that they are permitted to use Accounting overview There may be as many accounts in the system as required Accounts may assume states for example they can be open so authorized people can place their expenses on them or they can be closed and it will not be possible any more to write expenses against them A single account may belong to one or more projects For example there may be accounts for common tasks or overheads like department meetings vacation illness etc Teamdesk is not a bookkeeping system However it is easy to connect an enterprise management system like SAP or Oracle to the information stored in Teamdesk In this case it has to be made sure that the account and cost center numbers in Teamdeskmatch those in the bookkeeping system Accounting can be enabled for each project separately So if a project manager does not require accounting and budgeting for his project this function can be disable
161. ave to enter information for this property when an item is created If they do not enter information an error message is displayed The required property pertains only to creating items General confiquration qi Caution It is possible to create problematic configurations that prevent the user from creating new items If an property is marked as required but does not appear on the associated input mask for this workspace and item type the user will not be able to create an item Property names Each property has a name This name is used in the full text search index When an property name is changed this change is always global even for properties that have been derived or have been overwritten at the workspace workspace type or item type level Label and tool tip Each property has a label and a tool tip property The label property is the one shown at the user interface as the label for this property The tool tip property will be displayed as a tool tip when hovering over the property 5 10 2 Item property types Items have properties like a title or the date they were last modified This section describes the types of item properties that are available in Teamdesk New item property types can be added as plug ins without modification of the core software Short text Short text properties can contain short one line up to 50 characters text Attribute configuration ShortText Short text x You can define a default te
162. avigator if an item has an property with this option set symbol An optional symbol that can be shown in the item navigator isDefault Marks this option as the default sortOrder Determines the order in which the options are presented in the selection user interface components label The label for the option as the end user will see it Please note that you can localize the option labels with the localization editor later on list The objectlD of the list this option belongs to It is not being used in the import process The following listing shows a minimized example for a list definition that can be imported into Teamdesk lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 gt lt ns2 trackplusExchange xmlns ns2 http www trackplus com exporter version 4 0 0 gt lt entityExchange entityId 1008 type TListBean gt lt entityAttribute name repositoryType gt 2 lt entityAttribute gt lt entityAttribute name objectID gt 1008 lt entityAttribute gt lt entityAttribute name listType gt 1 lt entityAttribute gt lt entityAttribute name name gt Simple global list lt entityAttribute gt lt entityAttribute name owner gt 1 lt entityAttribute gt lt entityAttribute name deleted gt N lt entityAttribute gt lt subEntityRelation parentAttributeName list type TOptionBean gt lt trackEntity entityld 1023 type TOptionBean gt lt entityAttribute name label gt Entry A slg lt entityAttribute gt lt entityAttribute name 1
163. be at the same time the file server Or the database server and file server can be put on the same hardware Teamdesk itself does not care about all this as long as you ensure that you have exactly one access point JDBC URL for the database and exactly one file path to the attachment and index directories for all Teamdesk instances of that cluster Start up behaviour When a Teamdesk instance is started it registers itself as a node in the database Then it checks the database for other nodes If there are nodes in the database which have not updated their record during a certain timeout period default is 5 minutes can be set in file WEB INF quartz jobs xml that entry is cleared from the table Thereafter Teamdesk tries to set itself as the master node unless there is already another node marked as master node If this is the only node the operation succeeds right away Otherwise is may take as much as the time out period until a new master node is completely established The master node is responsible for 1 updating the full text search index 2 getting e mails from an e mail server when submission of items by e mail is enabled In all other aspects the master node acts like a regular node Master node goes down In case the master node goes down the full text search facility is temporarily not updated However no activities requiring update of the full text search index get lost they are stored in the database Furthermore o
164. ble Table 5 7 Workspace states State State flag Description in active This is the standard workspace state You can create and modify items as you like progress on hold inactive The workspace will not permit you to create and modify items all existing information remains visible as well as the workspace itself archived closed The workspace will not accept new items and will not permit to modify existing items Furthermore the workspace is invisible with all its information Items are inaccessible 1 In the top toolbar select Administration gt Customize gt System states Alternatively click on the Customize System state bar in the left navigation area i A Ted Septem Amino Heg of o gt AO 3 i Fa Er Codpit Erme woriespaons find Era Reporty Adminin w Create Ber gt tra Ly My settings Li My settings jo Werkspaces I wortapece state o RP p sates for workipaces phases and accounts Select a node in the tree left a ia oa Vackeerur tabr E Users A groupe T Acro abe Casto Ze d Curtin Fo Ma i Lo Acn Report templates UT Manage Filler Manap serer y Weer roles Report lemplales T Costoent rs A accounts Ur Uu roli any J Awtomail T Cou carters accoures Link types d Anna Custom forma Link types Custom Fields 3 Gumom fem Ji Cunpm fict P um 1 EI c WOFKEBREE Vere you can configure gates tor werkipbces phases and nants Selec a node in the Crewe def 2
165. btaining e mails from the e mail server is temporarily disabled Again no submission will get lost as they are stored on the e mail server After at most a timeout period default is 5 minutes set in WEB INF quartz jobs xml negotiation between the remaining nodes will begin for who will become the replacement for the original master node The outcome is random The new master node will begin to update the full text search index and start retrieving e mails from the e mail server 267 Administering the server Thus the drop out of a master node will result in slightly decreased performance and a lag of about 5 minutes in updating the full text search index Regular node goes down In case a regular node goes down there will be some decrease in performance The other nodes will need less than the timeout period default is 5 minutes set in WEB INF quartz jobs xml to realize that a node has dropped out However this does not have any further consequences Forced switch of master node Usually all application nodes will negotiate among themselves who is going to become the master node The outcome is random It is however possible to force one of the nodes to become the master node This requires to tell the current master node to seize its master node related operations like updating the full text search index and giving way to the new master node This process may take up to the timeout period 5 minutes by default before the n
166. built in bar charts number of items vs responsible person grouped by state total number of items for all projects grouped by state number of opened items over the last four weeks Pie Charts The built in pie chart depicts for each user the number of items for all projects included in this report This way a manager can get a quick overview on the workload of each person included in the report Gantt Diagrams For items including start and end dates it is possible to draw Gantt diagrams Items that have neither a start date nor a due date are disregarded for Gantt diagrams Items which have just a due date are displayed as milestones Parent items are drawn as super tasks 3 11 3 Accounting reports With Teamdesk you can record work and expenses incurred when moving items through a workflow Recording takes place on an item level This section explains how to retrieve accounting information Overview There are a number of predefined reports that can be used to retrieve accounting information from the Teamdesk system It is possible to extend this list of reports with custom reports In the section we will describe the accounting related reports that come with Teamdesk To access accounting reports click on the Reports button in the main toolbar Open one of the folders Private Project or Public Select the desired report and click on Create report Setting the Reporting Period A typical use case for accounting reports are
167. bute gt lt entityAttribute name symbol gt lt entityAttribute name objectID gt lt CDATA 1009 gt lt entityAttribute gt lt entityAttribute name isDefault gt lt CDATA N gt lt entityAttribute gt lt entityAttribute name sortOrder gt lt CDATA 3 gt lt entityAttribute gt lt entityAttribute name list gt lt CDATA 1002 gt lt entityAttribute gt lt entityAttribute name deleted gt lt CDATA N gt lt entityAttribute gt lt trackEntity gt lt subEntityRelation gt lt subEntityRelation parentAttributeName parentList type TListBean gt lt trackEntity entityld 1003 type TListBean gt lt entityAttribute name parentList gt lt CDATA 1002 gt lt entityAttribute gt lt entityAttribute name objectID gt lt CDATA 1003 gt lt entityAttribute gt lt entityAttribute name listType gt lt CDATA 4 gt lt entityAttribute gt lt entityAttribute name name gt lt CDATA Configure child 1 gt lt entityAttribute gt lt entityAttribute name deleted gt lt CDATA N gt lt entityAttribute gt lt entityAttribute name childNumber gt lt CDATA 1 gt lt entityAttribute gt lt subEntityRelation parentAttributeName list type TOptionBean gt lt trackEntity entityld 1007 type TOptionBean gt lt entityAttribute name label gt lt CDATA GE gt lt entityAttribute gt lt entityAttribute name CSSSTyle gt lt CDATA gt
168. c e mail for creating items via e mail select the E mail settings tab and mark the topmost check box With this you could have an e mail address like support productfamiliylamycompany com to channel all customer request to the right support space You need to have these e mail accounts on your e mail server first Important Don t use the same e mail account for more than one workspace Also do not use the system wide e mail inbox account at the same time for a project specific e mail inbox account This could result in erroneous behavior 6 6 Notice You have to set up the e mail account you are using here on your mail server Notice You can globally configure that you want to accept e mails from people whose e mail address is notin the Teamdesk database or that you do not Furthermore you can globally restrict the domains from which you accept e mails This permits you to minimize spam to your projects even if you have published your e mail as a support e mail on the internet Teamdesk for space administrators A Tacke Synem Admins Help Log off o 17 Y tl AN 4 Cockpit Browse workspeon fied eem v Reports Administration Create hem v Ly My settings bd See Canes lb Works pcm Basic settings Defauitsettings E mail settings gt cr 708 E mail an missions o CBT Support Finanzen amp Verwaltung y Integration space IT Helpdesk Leader arde k Marketing amp Vertrieb y Testraum T
169. ccess items even then if their role would not permit them to access them This is useful when you deal with another organization and you want them to be able to see only their own items but not yours o Note By marking the check box Automatically join new users to this group users that have registered themselves or which have been registered by a system administrator will automatically be part of that group and inherit all rights from that group You can now add users to the group Select the group and then drag users from the right column Available to the left column Assigned o Tip You can set filters on the columns to limit the amount of users yo see at a time A Piy pobre ES Add group JU Edi group Ed Doleo group Cy pare armes Projects Ml Developers Assign uters to group Developers Ha Users amp grows Assigned Avniladile LA Uses name Mame Degeneres un User name Marre Cegaeizaeonal y idl SE rre as ja ute adb Bojani du El Sort Descending QR Default ipt dbess Boss Dar kean Chestnut Columna k Fibers F frsedj Fraedrich J rg guts sues hin 5eppert po Pan Peter Y Attention The user will inherit all access rights of the groups he is a member of If you need to remove a user from a group drag him back to the Available column Note The users you have removed from the group will loose all access rights they previously had inherited from that group Removing groups Groups can be removed just like users Ifa group i
170. center XE IIT NMoegin tabularx Ntextwidth NVIJI NVI1 X NV1 1 NV1 noalign hrule height 1pt rule 3 5mm 0pt f10mm Created amp S Responsible S LastModifiedDate VN htpline rule 3 5mm Opt 10mm Assessed amp S Manager amp Ao1LastModifiedDate VN htpline rule 3 5mm Opt 10mm Released amp S Manager amp S LastModifiedDate VN htpline Vend tabu lars vskip 1 5cm newpage Nbableofoontents o o STP lt if noOfFigures gt 0 gt newpage listoffigures lt if gt op op op P lt if noOfFigures gt 8 noOfFigures 0 gt lt if noOfTables gt 0 gt newpage lt if gt S Mire P lt if noOfTables gt 0 gt listoftables lt if gt o o o o o o T TP TP T o o o newpage S TP lt makeTopics meetingTopics gt end document Scaling of figures Figures are scaled based on the scaling in your Wiki document If the original size was 800 pixels times 400 pixes and you would scale it to 400 pixels times 200 pixels the image would be rendered with a scale of 0 5 in the LaTeX document The real size depends on the dpi of the original attachment It is advisable to stick with the same dpi for all your images using a tool like imagemagick to convert from other densities convert units PixelsPerInch original png resample 96 normalized png or without resampling faster convert units PixelsPerInch original png density 96 norm
171. ch an e mail would appear as coming from Your server lt yourserver yourdomain com gt SMIP server name To send e mails Teamdesk needs to have access to an SMTP e mail server This e mail server can be located on the same machine as Teamdesk or can be placed anywhere as long as it can be directly reached For example it is well possible to use an SMTP server on the internet Typically you would enter the same parameters here that you are using inside your regular e mail client software You should not use the same account as this may lead to access contention depending on the authentication scheme you are using SMTP encrypted connections You can use an encrypted connection between your Teamdesk server and your SMTP e mail server You can select between SSL TLS and TLS if available For encrypted connections you first have to import a certificate from your SMTP server into your Teamdesk server local keystore How this is done is described under Using SSL and TLS encryption on e mail and LDAP connections SMTP authentication mode Teamdesk offers four ways you can authenticate against an SMTP Server no authentication at all with a special user name and password for the SMTP server using the same user name and password as for the incoming mailbox server by first connecting to the incoming mailbox server i SS SMTP user name and password Many SMTP servers require user authentication before permitting to send anyth
172. ch ilet Hei piel einfach 32 Ene neues Beknredhung apened ima leh zu Hoch sra Madera opened iwteabeh 23 Still diskutieren opened urnwabch 5nltware Projekt 45 Checking the zd level opened umatch 32 Testissue opened yreateh You can remove yourself from the watch list by clicking on the unwatch link Files Modified with Release This tile shows you all files that have been modified for a specific release This will only work if you have your version control system connected to Teamdesk and have added item numbers when committing changes to your version control system Tile configuration Before you can use this tile you need to configure it Follow the general procedure to configure a tile outlined above to get to the modified files configuration page Teamdesk for team members Configur ation x 1 tion for Two dimensional statisti Tale modiiedFiles label Projects and Beispiel ewtach releases Beispiel eimfach Sammelbox Despiel einfach Demnachst beispiel erfach Geplant Beispiel ardach irgendwann w Save Reset ese 4 You have to select a project or a project combined with a release as a filter The modified files list will be assembled based on all items of that release that have files that were committed to version control with these item numbers in the commit text Appearance The following figure gives you an impression of how the file list looks like If you have a version control web viewer enabl
173. ck on Save in the toolbar area Then click on the Edit icon in the Action column on the right 1 E e Bew tab Kev pone Maru Edit Milestome Mime available field space available field space available field apace available field space available field apace available Field space 5 The interactive form designer appears with the new form This designer supports drag and drop Click into the top panel to select it In the Properties window the panel properties appear You can move the Properties window to a convenient location in the main browser window by selecting the blue bar and dragging the window to a new position a a Name Panes Desenption Pane desengt Rows 3 Columns 3 E System fielde a 6 You keep the default of 3 rows and 3 columns for this panel To add a field to a location you select the field from the field list in the Properties window Here you have selected the itemld Customizing Teamdesk Hi Priority miw embar s REPETI H rigiater sie eae abe 7 You drag the selected field to its position in the panel and drop it there left mouse down in the field list drag to position release mouse Iysueiio abc aval 1 i i avwablahle lichi spare awal i awallsahble field spare dal i 8 The same procedure you repeat for some more fields You can leave spaces empty without any problem You can also have fields occupy more than one row or column You can add a new pan
174. ckpit Browse WI Aird Rera gt Anpi Administrar Croste hera ce tra Jy Prang au Wert a Qi caca is icon boon Fils ye Percent complets Tyneflag HE Used gx opened aa opened gif Test bext Bait anahyzed t analyzed gi Test bad ichs Guineas assigned assigned gif Test beg aktive T Mangt Fiery Phan s ne DES Dust tema 7 processing processing a processing nif Test tex he he User rins gi implemented E E bmpiermenedci Test bet enhe You can assign an icon 16 x 16 px GIF or PNG format to each entry You can furthermore assign a CSS style to each entry which will be used to format items in the item navigator For example you could use various shades of red as background color to illustrate the urgency of an item You can drag entries in the list on the right to another position The entries will be offered at the user interface in the same order as shown in the grid here Y Attention When you rename an entry the change may not be reflected at the user interface This happens when you have specific localizations for the selection entries which is the case for all predefined entries In this case the localized values will be shown and not the label you define here Example workflows This section presents some examples for useful workflows The examples are based on the standard Teamdesk state space and role definitions Action item list The action item list is the most general in the Teamdesk system It was designed and
175. configuration There is little configuration for this tile You can set the number of events to be displayed per project e the update interval in seconds Set this to a reasonable value to keep server load low Appearance The tile looks like shown below Activity st Beispiel einfach 4 days ago 33 Vorbarerande TMigkaiten Administrator Track Syster 4 da 9 33 Verberetende Titigheiten Adeninistrator Track System Matus Common ade 9 34 Tapeten autiuchen und bestellen Adeninistrator Track System 4 db 9 IS Tegpchboda aurruchen und bestellen Adeninistrator Track 4 days 90 36 Zimmer surr urmen Administrator Track System Status Common 4 day 9 37 Tapete entfemen Administrator Track System Status Common 4 de 9 32 Ee neue Besprechung Adeninistrator Track System Status 4 de 0 18 Leung for elektrische Koliden installieren Administrator Trach System 4 deve 400 19 Letuns for aab trachea Bolten in cztalieret AMINO Track Pta rm 7 days ego 25 Noch eine Maleraufgabe Administrator Track System Software Deo olt 4 hours ego 45 asd asdfasdi Guest John atu jurs 9o 44 ua t t 16 Hours 1490 49 ancther ittue Quest Joh 19 Hours go 42 Test rue h My Watch List This tile gives you a list of items where you are currently registered as either consulted or informed It permits you to de register yourself from these items Appearance There is no configuration associated with this tile It looks like shown below My wat
176. configuration a new responsible and other parameters 3 Click on the Save icon in the toolbar to finalize the operation If you want to close this item and it has children that are not closed you will be asked if you want to automatically close them If you deny the current item will remain in its current state The item will now have the new state Be aware that this can change accessibility of the item and the list of available states for another state change may have changed This is defined by the workflow for this project and item type For example it may not be possible to change an item from state closed to opened only reopened may be possible People that are on the watch list of this item will be sent an e mail of the state change if their automail is configured such 3 3 11 Changing start and due date Items can have start and due dates These dates are being used to notify users of items that are due soon and to mark unresolved items as late Start and due dates are also being used for Gantt diagrams This section describes how to add or modify start and due dates You must have retrieved the item where you want to add or change start and due dates This can be done by entering the item number in the search field by selecting the item from the item overview or by using the Edit entry of the context menu of the item overview You must have been granted edit permissions for this item You will not see an Item A
177. ction box with new and old refers to the item property value before and after the triggering change This permits you to filter on transitions In the example we filter on the state transition from any state except for closed to closed Thus if changes were made in state closed we would not receive an e mail Important Current user always means me as seen from the user that utilizes an automail condition n iki gt E E a one Just cion bers l Add new w Status ot WL prd sid Delot AND VA off Rahs lt Bro dosed ue dd i Sane tance 5 Save your condition You have created or modified an automail condition You can now use it together with an automail trigger to control the kind of messages that you will get from the Teamdesksystem 5 7 3 Assigning automail configurations To control the e mail messages you get from the system you assign a combination of an automail trigger and an automail condition to a workspace or all other workspaces not explicitly mentioned You must be logged in as system manager or system administrator 1 In the top toolbar select Administration gt Customize gt Automail Alternatively click on the Customize Automail bar in the left navigation area Y mE L Find Era gt Reports Ajmain reste hem gt Jy Mysettinga xj Automall signen y Workapaces D ada triggers HO Users A groups T Adora critico Eustomira H T Manage fers
178. ctions menu entry if you do not have proper permissions You must have been granted permission to add and change start and due dates for this item If this is not the case you will see these fields deactivated 1 From the item detail page select action icon Edit 60 3 3 Working with items 2 The screen switches into edit mode By default the start and due dates are on the main tab Your system administrator may have changed this 3 Using the little calendar icon add or change a start date or a due date or both You can also enter the date directly in the text field but you have to know the format 4 To make this change persistent click on the Save button in the tool bar The item will now have the new start and or due date All watchers will be notified of the change if they have configured their notification triggers and filters accordingly Changes to start and due dates are recorded in the item history Reminder e mails will be sent for items due or overdue if the e mail reminder facility is configured appropriately 3 3 12 Changing the item watcher list Each item comes with two watch lists one for people in RACI role consulted two way communication and the other for people in RACI role informed one way communication This section describes how to add and remove users from these watch lists You must have retrieved the item for which you want to change the list of watchers This can be done by en
179. ctions into this basket automatically moves this item to another persons in basket You keep a reminder in our own basket You need to review the planned items basket regularly Part of the items in this basket you may move to one of the actionable baskets or you modify the planned items set 2 3 2 Item properties To support effective teamwork items need to have a number of tags and other properties Tags and other properties help you categorizing and structuring your set of items Fig 2 10 shows the most important and required set of tags and other properties for items managed with Teamdesk Properties are being shown as fields on forms who is responsible Status ond optional monitoring and planning Figure 2 10 Main tags and properties The following properties are mandatory The space mostly serves to control access to items The phase further structures a space along the time axis for example in releases or sprints Phases are optional RACI refers to a scheme where you associate a number of roles with an item like who is currently responsible for this item who should be informed in case the item is changed etc Each iteem has to have a person responsible for it The item type classifies an item more precisely for example as a feature a problem report a customer request for a quotation or a simple action Item types may determine workflows and other item properties You can have an item type of unknown fo
180. cular helpful if you use more than one instance of this tile in your project for example one grouped by state and one by responsible You can select which projects and or releases you want to consider in this tile Selecting a project will include all releases of that project Last you need to select the grouping criterion You can group by Item type enables you to see the distribution between different item types like problem reports requirement changes tasks or whatever you have defined here Item state enables you to monitor project progress Current manager gives you an indication of the managers workload Current responsible gives you an indication of your team members workload Priority gives you an indication of the number of urgent items Severity gives you an indication of the number of critical items Author original author gives you an indication of who reported or authored how many items Save your configuration by clicking on the Save button You will be returned to the tile configuration Click on the oack button in the toolbar area to finalize the configuration The panel The project summary tile shows you the number of items grouped by projects and or releases and the second grouping criterion you have chosen for this tile PROJECT SUMMARIES 212 90 Track Support opened 62 8 8 closed 682 Ga 91 Track 4 x opened 75 25 processing 1 0 implemented 6 2 verified 1 0 closed 213 SEND 71
181. d Cost centers can be deleted in this case their accounts are being transferred to a replacement cost center 5 7 Customizing automail Setting up accounting The first step in enabling accounting is to create cost centers Teamdesk associates but little information with cost centers a unique number which should match that of the larger bookkeeping software if available and a name Oftentimes cost centers correspond to departments The second step is to create accounts Accounts carry four properties a unique account number aname a cost center a state The account number should match that of the bookkeeping system being used The account name can be any string and should briefly describe the purpose of the account Each account is assigned to exactly one cost center The person responsible for the cost center thereby is also the person responsible for the account Each account has a state The state determines if the account can be actively used or if the account is closed If the account is closed it will not appear any more in the selection boxes when users need to record their expenses Accounts can be deleted however their entire history has then to be mapped to another account that still exists Accounts can accumulate either monetary expenses cost or time expenses efforts Each project defines the base currency for the monetary costs Their can be different base currencies for different projects The base currency fo
182. d all related data first define a filter For example if you want to export all items from all projects select the projects and deselect all other selection in all other boxes Select if you want to include archived and deleted items or for example you want to include only archived and deleted items to archive them somewhere else Apply the filter The result will be shown in the item navigator o 1 m E 2 Tracks System Administrator Help Log off Y iJ Ss p Bs T Views e Batters Total mamber of ters found 1795 Fihered 1795 O aios vj E cop E Choose colums ein amp PROJECTS r a Item No Project Tite 4 Edit selection Saus Resporsble a L Take 3 x 2Q Teck 3 x Ablrager in Tabellenform Copy set dened Friedrich Meg L Take 4x a2 Taks 3 x Datesen festiegen oN Reports closed Friedrich 359 L Take Support 39 53 Take Jx Retationen besbrmmen Ca ewo 7 dond Friedrich rg Y views ou Tracks 3 x SQL formuleren 9n Prim POF dened Fresren Mes T items Os Track 2 x Please create a vertion release 3 2 08 YU Export CSV Oosed Friedrich Jorg T Outstanding n Ou Tracks 3 x n Seton ound Fnecreh Yrg Y My tens on Pecks Jx Rework responsible and manager List X Export Excel dosed RA Tomas T tm the manager Ou Track 3 x Teste para proyeto PM coset Lang Hartmut T im responsbke n O Track Jx ryo dened Friedrich Meg Y mei a O 10 Tracks 3 x TOL Query Names should be unique dened Ruff Tamas T de O10 Track J x Minimum attachment sa
183. d enter costs You can also give a short title to this booking or a longer more descriptive text or justification for the expense With the radio buttons you can select if you want to leave the estimated remaining effort as it is or auto adjust the value Auto adjusting means that the new efforts are subtracted from the current value of the estimated remaining effort If desired change the date for this expense in case you add all expenses at one time but you want to have them listed as they occurred Y Add work cost m 250801 SW Development v Expense date 09 25 2013 t Bug analysis Leave eir esumate Y ALO acyust 4 Clickthe Add button to add this expense to the item A new expense has now been logged towards this item There are no e mail notifications associated with writing expenses towards items A new estimated remaining effort has now been assigned to this item in case you have chosen the auto adjust option For example if an original planned value of 50 hours is entered the initial estimated remaining effort will be set to 50 hours If work of 10 hours is added by default the estimated remaining effort will go down to 40 hours Let us assume you now manually change the estimated remaining effort to 45 hours since you found out in the meantime that this task will take you longer than originally anticipated If you now add another 6 hours of work the estimated remaining effort will go down to 39 hours If later on
184. dd comment and so on You can assign forms you have created globally or for each item type project type or even project For example you can have a very simple form for items of type mile stone and a complex mask for items of type problem report This section describes basic concepts of forms fields and actions how to assign forms to actions how to create modify and delete forms 5 11 1 Custom forms actions and fields In Teamdesk you can define any number of forms that are used for creating items editing items changing item state adding comments to items and moving items to new projects or item types Forms contain system properties and custom properties and forms are associated with the actions mentioned above like creating items These associations can be configured globally item type specific project type and item type specific project and item type specific This approach supports configuration efficiency while preserving flexibility o Y SS Cockpit Brows MOTOR ICE find Rem gt Reports Administ Ae My settings i1 c Qi Add form o Werkapeces cancers mak ees fe ibea pps spec Form assignments E Workypace type spec form agigements s Customize El Wyb spec nem ements CT Manage filters Report templates de Uer roles k T Cost oenters A accounts HE Usd gnum J Autorail Unk tymes Each form consists of tabs panels properties The procedure to create and use a new form is 1 C
185. ded to the corresponding form where you can make the desired changes After you save the item you will be returned to the item navigator Managing standard layouts With each filter comes a standard layout When you own the filter you can make your personal layout the standard layout for this filter Other users can overwrite the standard layout with their own They can also go back to the standard layout 1 Using a filter e g from Find items create a list of items in the item navigator 2 Arrange columns grouping sorting etc 3 To define this arrangement as standard layout for this filter click on the Action button and select from the menu Save as standard layout You can only do this if you are the owner of the filter you used Q Am BE Gee Cheese celum Edit selection i Copy selection Link lees AB m pl Rirporis 23 3 m pq Export 35 02 E Print POF 0 38 E x Export cay 35 00 n E net work i ic E 4 To overwrite your own arrangement with the standard layout click on the Action button and select from the menu Use standard layout Right area configuration You can configure the right area views ofthe item navigator What can be configured depends on the view mode 1 In the item navigator click on the settings button all the in the top right corner below the logo o R P3 A Tracke System Administrator Help Log off w L ot e Cockpit Browse workspaces Item navi
186. dentifying your e mail server in your local Teamdesk keystore You need to proceed as follows 1 Obtain a certificate from your e mail server How to do this depends on your server You can ask your provider to give you this certificate The certificate is usually bound to a certain internet address like your domain com 2 Import the certificate into your local keystore using the keytool utility that comes with any Java installation mkdir lt TRACKPLUS_HOME gt keystore keytool keystore lt TRACKPLUS_HOME gt keystore lt your domain com gt ks import file theServersCertificate cer The keystore file must be in directory TRACKPLUS_HOME keystore See Various configuration items for how to configure TRACKPLUS HOME The keystore file itself has to have the ending ks and the basename should correspond to the e mail server hostname The certificate file you got from your provider in the above example is theServersCertificate cer If you experience problems with the approach above or your want to use TLS encrypted connections rather than SSL you need to import self generated certificates into the Java keystore directly Change to the bin directory of the Java runtime environment being used by your application server e g Tomcat and import the certificate as follows here for a Windows system cd SJAVA_HOME bin keytool import alias lt alias gt file theServersCertifticate cGrt keystore lib security cacerts You will be
187. dministrator 1 In the top toolbar select Administration gt Customize gt Lists Alternatively click on the Customize Lists bar in the left navigation area n A Tie Sytem Administ 3 r aUl 3 o Y T Cockpit a Mod hera Reporta Admito w Costa Ena gt Ly My settings Jy Mysettings Le Workspaces Q oes ies wi epee b anecon tats _ Tare ar sone predefined orte s hem si EB User A groups ME workspace speci leas IB Users A groups fe any number of custom selection lets either periere d i Custamiza pitocapelesla nagalm Customize T mp Actions t id Report bemplates T Haag Mea Manageserrer gt Uy User roles Repent Lemplates xe 7 Cost centers A accounts T Cmi centers B omuia a j 3 Link typet Mb unk types Coston forme fr Casio Bora FTO Wort pa T 2 In the second navigation column click on Global lists if you want to edit a list accessible to all workspaces or select a workspace with the list you want to edit Then click on the Edit button in the toolbar or use the context menu Qu h gt Name D Stats Americas 9 Prony EMEA A Severty 3 EMEA BF Workspace specific lists 3 Give a name to the new list or modify the existing one Optionally add a brief description for book keeping purposes Customizing Teamdesk Q Ao Ay iment Conca 37 Operating Sera Here you can cont lecion labs Thay wf Ande Bebe Lira mate priority and item types You can add a nec Che global level
188. drich Meg Closed recentiy Friedrich Matthias Added recently Guest Joon Updated recently Henderson Fred My fi x Lang Hartmut Margncen Mhai T Last used Mira David Ing e Pich Gabriele page filters create new ones or ue an minting one to pet a specific view with a Est of items See sees anra tomas 2 In the toolbar area first select a folder then click on Add filter T aL a E Fired ierma w Eryaris Aimeairaban E instant E AE Add ihe di Prhe Hare gn opened Mi bugs a L Prije impor All kema O Y Albugs 4 0 Mionm NI 3 In the window that appears define your filter 74 3 4 Finding items 4 Give this filter a good name Mark the check box Subscribe if you want to add this filter into your Find items menu 6 If you like select the property which should determine the colors in the Item Navigator This permits you to have different colors background and foreground depending on e g the priority of an item 7 Save the filter 3 4 7 Adding a filter to your menu 1 Select menu Find items gt Manage filters 3 create new ones or uti an exiting one to pet a specific view with a lst of items 2 Selecta filter by clicking on a folder and then double clicking on a filter in the right area 3 Check the Subscribe check box to add this filter as a shortcut to your view menu under Find items Edit filter x Heme Open bens from meetings Style Meid None m Filt
189. e BR Figure 2 5 RACI roles If you are Responsible for an item you need to take care of it If you delegate an item you effectively change the Responsible It is good practice to have a single person be responsible for an item Only in special cases early in a workflow it might be useful to have a group as Responsible As a Responsible for an item you will always be able to edit it regardless of your general role permissions in a space If you are Accountable for an item you look after it that it doesn t get lost or stuck For example it could be that somebody left your team and she is still responsible for a number of items You as Accountable make sure that these items are reassigned to somebody else As Accountable you account for the time and money that has been and could be spent on items As an Accountable for an item you will always be able to edit it regardless of your general role permissions in a space If you are Consulted for an item your input might be required to generate the desired outcome for this item It is quite common that more than one person would have to be consulted for an item As a consulted of an item you may deal with it as if you were responsible E g you may read it edit it add comments or change its state As a Consulted for an item you will always be able to edit it regardless of your general role permissions in a space If you are informed for an item you would need information from this item
190. e For example if the scan time for all repositories is 20 minutes the repositories will be scanned once each hour The parameters for the initial scan time and the delay factor can be set in file TRACKPLUS_HOME quart z jobs xml 4 8 1 Subversion version control Teamdesk can integrate with your source code version control system for example CVS Subversion or Perforce To establish links add item numbers to your version control system submits like item no e g 14711 This section describes for Subversion SVN how to proceed You must know how to connect to your version control system Typically you already have used that information when you set up your version control client software You must be logged in as space administrator system manager or system administrator 1 In the top toolbar select Administration gt Workspaces Alternatively click on the Workspaces bar in the left navigation area 4 8 Version control 2 Select a workspace in the leftmost navigation area A this feature o Y iL Jy My settings bed Save y Workspace y General n My dose Roles D Rete CBT Support 7 us Finamen amp Verwaltung T p integration space Report templates IT Helpdesk Custom forms Leader arde J Custom felts Marketing amp Vertneb PO eres yy Testraum ad Atomai magrenerts Thesnenapeicher WTP integration Y O Wi Test 2 iL 30 Laser Printer y X Det w X Mechenical Parts MU Users A groups
191. e exported to a Word document based on a template Document section A document section is a child part of a document It can be exported into a Word document as a paragraph Document sections can contain other docuemnt sections Customizing Teamdesk Item type Document folder Description Documents can be organized in folders s Table 5 5 Suggestions for additional item types Item type Implementation error Milestone Risk Release notes Templates Description There was some problem found in the implementation i e the requirements are correct but the implementation is not Keeping a list with important milestones could be the shortcut version of keeping a list with work packages Project management without a current list of relevant risks is not really complete Once a requirement has been implemented or a bug has been fixed you can copy it from the bug list to the release notes list Once a release is assembled you can extract a report filtering for the release notes list This way you can make sure you have all changes included in your release notes This list permits to define templates that may be copied to new lists changing certain parameters in the copy process This is very helpful for defining assessment plans and quality gate check lists that can be reused and copied to a protocol list The protocol list may be worked off for each project release and build Note that for the different item t
192. e as informed this is always active You can take yourself of a watch list any time Add me as consulted always active when creating an item For an existing item this is only active if you have modify any permission via the role s you carry in this project Add me as informed you must have the read any permission via the role s you have in this project 34 Finding items A Teamdesk database may contain thousands of items even for a single project Teamdesk permits you to select subsets of items by means of views and display them in an item navigator This way you only see those items you are interested in 69 Teamdesk for team members 3 4 1 To find items or view a set of items you use the Find items button in the top toolbar area A view consists of a filter and a layout The filter determines which items you see and the layout determines how the items are displayed The layout is always personal while the view filters can be public The view is presented in the Item Navigator The Item Navigator permits you to further filter and structure the result set in form of work breakdown structures Scrum or Kanban boards and so on View filters can furthermore be reused for reports A second way to get items is by using the full text search capability of Teamdesk Just enter any text or TOLPlus expression into the search box in the top right Teamdesk will search for items having this text in any text field or attachmen
193. e bem se My settings By My settings Propecia La Aut amena Users groups 51 Gencratt l Cusbamnire b mM Action ee BS lp Hanage server 96 3 6 Configuring automail 1 2 In the second navigation column select Automail triggers 3 In the small toolbar click Add 4 n the new windows mark those check boxes where you in that specific role want to get information There is one line for when an item is created and a line for each property when an item is modified A marked check box in column Manager and row Status means you will get a notification if you are the current manager of an item and the state of that item was changed Add nobdcatios trigger Hame Medem verbosd Arhan Eye Feti Pye Fiski COngnater Manager _ Responsible Edit item Chem flelds Project z Imma PDE HANT aux T J E F P MERAT y T 5 Give your new trigger a name and save it Before it becomes effective you have to assign it to a workspace see Assigning Automail Trigger and Condition Related Links Triggers and Conditions on page 29 You can receive e mail notifications from the Teamdesk system when items you have an interest in are created changed or due You can control under what circumstances you receive such information by means of automail triggers and automail conditions 3 6 2 Configuring automail conditions In the second step of a notification process notification messages are passed through a noti
194. e data source determines the set of items you will get in a report The report template defines the layout and visual appearance of the item data You can download a report template for modification or to create a new derived template On your computer you can design a template and test it with XML data from Teamdesk Once you are satisfied with the result you can upload the template to the server To download a report template from the server to your client computer select it in the list and click on the Download button in the toolbar Alternatively use the context menu al AS LL Li Rind items v Reports Admiristrabon w Create item v DO Add folder a Ad report ag Ede ng Create gt Delete Ph import D Export Nave Type Detailed expense with person project account pat Y Detailed expense with subproject and kem pdf Edit report pal Grouped expere by person project account e gt pdl 5 4 4 Uploading a report template You can upload report templates to the server from your local computer You can upload your personal report templates to the server Depending on your role in the system you may only upload report templates to your private template repository to a project repository or for system wide use with a Upload Report template ZIP file Jwerwrite existing A cre ZIP Browse To upload a report template click on Upload report in the toolbar In the window that opens select the ZIP file containing t
195. e following we will call the Teamdesk instance that provides the data source and the Teamdesk installation that gets this data and makes it part of its own database target a Offline synchronization b Importing and merging 73 of issues and projects a ay qm ay Track Sonror A a A Source Track Tracke Sere A Soran B aink To copy data from one Teamdesk instance to another you first have to export this data at the source To define the set of items to be exported you execute a regular query and export the result from the item navigator Note that you can copy entire spaces this way or just parts of a spaces and even all spaces of the source The export process creates a ZIP data file including all data and attachments which you can import into the target installation 242 6 7 Importing data Export To prepare for an export observe the following You must be logged in as a user with system administrator or system manager rights e g admin user You must have at least read access for each project from which you want to export items For this you need to assign yourself a role in these projects You can only export items and related data via regular queries This means that you will not be able to export items from releases that have been archived Such releases will not show up in the selection boxes of the query definition any more To export items an
196. e form that appears Register lor the Track Tracking System gt Seve Cancel a Enter your login or user name The login name should be the same that you use in other systems for example your Windows login name This will facilitate central password management via an LDAP server b Enter your first and last name and your e mail address A confirmation e mail will be sent to this address c Select your preferred language for the user interface and all system e mails 44 3 2 Registering and changing your user profile Your system administrator will get a notification that you have registered He can assign you to an organizational unit and can give you roles in projects You will receive an e mail with a link to confirm your registration In case you do not confirm your registration within 24 hours your registration will be cancelled G Notice You will not be able to access any data until your space administrator or system administrator has granted you access rights in a project 3 2 2 Changing your password In case you are not using the central password facility LDAP you must manage your system password within Teamdesk If you are using the central password facility your password is managed there for example on your Windows system You have already logged into the Teamdesk server You are not using the central password facility LDAP or Single Sign On SSO for authentication 1 In the top toolbar select Administration g
197. e gt lt value gt lt entry gt lt entry gt lt l LDAP filter expression for groups o lt key gt ldapFilterGroups lt key gt lt value gt objectClass groupOfNames lt value gt lt entry gt lt entry gt lt key gt firstName lt key gt lt value gt gn lt value gt lt entry gt lt entry gt lt key gt lastName lt key gt lt value gt sn lt value gt lt entry gt Sentry lt key gt email lt key gt lt value gt mail lt value gt lt entry gt lt entry gt lt key gt phone lt key gt lt value gt phone lt value gt lt entry gt lt entry gt lt key gt groupName lt key gt lt value gt cn lt value gt lt entry gt lt job data map gt job You enable all automatic synchronization by setting key enabled to true You may have to modify the mapping of LDAP properties to Teamdeskproperties The Teamdesk properties are the keys and must not be modified The LDAP properties are the values and you may have to change them to the values you use in your directory Table 6 1 LDAP synchronizer parameterss Property in quartz jobs xml Description enabled enabledUserSync True if users and groups shall be regularly synchronized with your LDAP directory If False properties enabledUserSync and enabledGroupSync have no effect True if users shall be regularly synchronized with your LDAP directory 233 Managing the system Property in quartz jobs xml enabledGroupSync baseDnGr
198. e handling differs for fields that have an explicit history enabled in Teamdesk and those that don t You can select explicit history for all fields but that is not the default In case a fields history recording is enabled in Teamdesk the conflict resolution handling is as follows It will be verified whether the first old value form the Teamdesk history after last edit date is the same as the actual value from Excel If it is the same then the change was made only in Teamdesk and not in Excel Consequently the Teamdesk value will be silently preserved and the user will not be asked for conflict resolution Otherwise the user will be involved in the conflict handling process In case a field has no explicit history recording field changes are only recorded in the common history For such fields there is no reliable way to find out whether such a field was modified only in Teamdesk or also in Excel Therefore when at least one common history entry exists after the last edit date in Excel then each changed field without explicit history is subject to conflict handling If there is no history data since last edit then the change in the Excel file will overwrite the Teamdesk value without conflict resolution 3 3 6 Adding a comment Anybody with proper access permissions can add a comment to an existing item Comments are always related to an item This section describes how to add a comment to an item Comments may be modified and deleted by
199. e if the item was moved to a new item type or space true ifthe item state was changed true ifthe respsonsible was changed Customizing Teamdesk Variable isClose isReopen changedBy createdBy shortFieldChanges shortFieldChanges fieldChange shortFieldChanges fieldChange changed shortFieldChanges fieldChange newShowValue shortFieldChanges fieldChange oldShowValue longFieldChanges longFieldChanges fieldChange longFieldChanges fieldChange changed longFieldChanges fieldChange newShowValue longFieldChanges fieldChange oldShowValue Description true if the item was closed true if a closed item was reopened the person causing the e mail event the person that created this item in case of create A list of item properties for short properties A single property true if this property was changed the new or actual property value the old property value A list of item properties for long properties like descriptions and comments A single property true if this property was changed the new or actual property value the old property value The following table describes how the changeDetail variable is constructed private String getSubjectSuffix Integer workItemKey String synopsis String newStateLabel Locale actuallocale String subjectPatternKey null the last complying flag wins if isAddComment subjectPatternKey item mail if isEditComment subjectPatternKey item mail
200. e mail Full text search LAP ESO Dior dp Peaje templates Directaries ana URLa ME Users A gps bl Otome D Actions kl Menge server WE Sener configuration Restrictions gt zn ga El Login page text a ora em Various tt r EH Serer status adi recitation anablad o Long dono Automat ma cin I7 ME pota backus token Q Data restore hier los bihdon IB e oe a a o o Virgen 500 55 Trace Dipit D 2015 Senbes Trackplus Step 2 Install Jenkins Plug In To enable Jenkins to interact with Teamdesk you need to install a plug in for Jenkins The plug in consists of a single file trackplus hpi which you need to copy into the plug in folder in your Jenkins installation as shown in the figure 274 7 14 Configuring Teamdesk with Jenkins below The Jenkins plug in folder is located under lt Servlet container path gt webapps Jenkins WEB INF or wherever else you had installed Jenkins previously You need to restart Jenkins after copying the file Jenkins donk Manage Jenkins A Mew version of Jenkins 1 812 ls avallable for download changelog cy Configure Syglam K Ganfiqunn global sattings and patna aara Jenkins colina who is allowed ta ancess usa me system Poland Configuration from Desk Discard all he loaded deba in memory and reload ewenylhing from file system Useful when you modified config filos directi an disk riii area mugia that can extend the tunetionalty ef Jenkins Qupeates
201. e respective release when uses within a release cockpit 3 8 Working with the cockpit The Panel The project navigator does not require any configuration when used within a project or release cockpit It requires the selection of a project and or release when being used in the general cockpit In any case you can select the reports that you want to have included as links from the list of all reports available in the system The panel looks like shown below There are three areas Reports these are links to reports that you can run The project and release are automatically configured but there may be other report parameters that you may have to enter when you want to run the report Preset filters these are a number of commonly used filters augmenting the ones available from the Find items menu In particular the result set is limited to items belonging to this project or release Open items this gives you an overview over all open items in this project or release grouped by state priority and responsible Configuration When you use this tile in the general cockpit you must define for which project or release you want to enable the tile When you use the tile in a project or release cockpit you do not have to configure anything Configuration iton Tar Release Notes Ls releaseN tes label Projects Manuchast Tr and Manuxtest vJ E Am wd Maniartext Try hout bns Meeting agni In any case you
202. e screen that appears select the file from which you want to restore data Then you need to enter 271 Administering the server Qv A a C9 P Before you can restore a backup you must have crested a new empty database The connection parameters to this database you then have to enter here JOBC driver less orga mm mysal Driver JOBC URL chenge idbx mysql ocelhost 3306 trecktO0d useUnicode strue amp charecterEncodings JDBC users trap JOBC password esses f Test connection Send me an e mail when restore is done IJ Not incluce database schema Restore attachments Attachment restore rectory Available baciosps in opt trackplusd Backups Name Sar Date A JDBC driver class When you open the screen you see the same driver class your current Teamdesk instance is using For a standard backup into the same type of database system this selection is fine If you want to move to another database system you would have to enter the driver class for your new target database system here A JDBC URL Here the JDBC URL of your current Teamdesk database instance is already entered but with a renamed database name Important You need to create a new empty database and enter its name here before you can proceed with the backup It is not possible to use the same database the current Teamdesk instance is running on A JDBC user name and password as you have configured when you created the database Do not restore the database schema w
203. e should be configurable dosed Raff Tamas Y Unscheduled Quo Toke 3 x Send emal to all active Track users dened Ruffi Tamas TY Oed recently 30 319 Tracks Jx Test all pages with different browsers dosed Bojer Adnan TY Added recently m Track 3 x Test al pages with IEG owed Bojan Aran TY Updated recenti o 3 4 Tracks 3 Test all with 1E7 dened Adrian C x pagos Boyors Ox Tode 3x Test all pages with Firefox 2 x dosed Bojani Adrian o Om Track Jx Test af pages with Opera Ya dosed Bojer Adnan 4 j O no Tace Ta Test with different application servers dened Ruff Tareas F a Om Tode Tx Test al pages with Tomcat Gx dosed Ruff Tomas U Gm Tracks 3 x Test with JBoss 4 x dosed Ruff Tamas o Next Om Take Jx Test af pages with JBoss Sx consed Ruff Tamas Sie m chten folgende Datei ffnen TrackReport zip Vom Typ ZIP Archiv Von httpc www trackplus org Wie soll Firefox mit dieser Datei verfahren JOffnen mit Archive Utility Standard Datei speichern F r Dateien dieses Typs immer diese Aktion ausf hren Abbrechen OK Save the file to your local disc drive In our example this file has a size of about 9 MByte The size very much depends on the size of the attachments This file can be imported into another Teamdesk instance 243 Managing the system Import To import data from another Teamdesk instance you have to be logged in with system administrator privileges e g as admin user Danger
204. e you only want to get notifications in case an item was closed This implies that it was in a different state before 97 Teamdesk for team members 1 From the main menu select Administration gt My settings gt Automail assignments LP Projects rnm a Users B groups i K Cusbnenize t Actions IE Manage server 2 Select Automail conditions in the second navigation column and click on Add automail condition 3 In the new windows define the logical expression for the automail condition Add Automad condition x farne Only closed iter Lan t mod Sets pes not iii Sond m na tet AND ali be mew js Status px be jr dosed IE in Add Delete Save Cancel 4 Give a name to the new condition and save it Before it becomes effective you have to assign it to a workspace see Assigning Automail Trigger and Condition Related Links Triggers and Conditions on page 29 You can receive e mail notifications from the Teamdesk system when items you have an interest in are created changed or due You can control under what circumstances you receive such information by means of automail triggers and automail conditions Automail Trigger on page 96 Automail triggers define which user induced actions trigger a notification from the system 3 6 3 Assigning automail trigger and condition What e mails are being sent to you is defined by a combination of automail triggers and automail co
205. ears 4 The form that appears depends on the kind of tile Make the appropriate changes and save them 5 You will be returned to the cockpit design page When you are done click on the Back icon in the toolbar You have changed the device configuration You will now see the cockpit configured with the new device options My items overview To obtain a quick overview how many items related to you are not closed yet the My items overview tile is well suited It displays in a concise manner for how many items you are either the original author or the current responsible or the current manager The Panel The My items overview does not require any configuration The panel looks like shown below There are three columns Responsibles items those items you are currently responsible for My items all items where you are either the original author author current responsible or manager Managers items those items you are the current manager of Mr ITEMS Dm earns 1 Pra Ehe originator 43 Tm the manager 7 Track Tae 1 13 ENENEB Duk 1 4 13 ENENEHE Tracks dax 5 1 MO Trick d x ee Wrack 4c E Trac Ax pa Figure 3 6 The my items tile Note Only item are shown that are not in state closed To get to the closed items you have to execute your own query for example via the Find items menu There are furthermore a number of rows containing numbers with active links and graphs The topmost row is the sum of it
206. eating child items copying project templates and so on When you select an item property change activity you can put a parameter into the workflow instead of a concrete value When you assign such a workflow to a workspace or item type or workspace type you can then assign a real value States A workflow is described mostly by states and transitions between states In addition to the states you have defined in your system there are two more states available in the workflows editor The initial state is the one where an item is in after it has been created and before it is saved For example if you permit to create items by e mail you could add guards and activities to that transition which based on the submitters e mail address would assign the item to a specific workspace or responsible The transition to the final state is taken when an item is deleted This is not enabled right now 5 16 Managing locales and terminology You can modify practically any term in Teamdeskand customize it to your liking in as many languages as you need This permits you to fit Teamdeskto your terminology rather than have you to adapt to the Teamdesk terms To edit Teamdesk terminology or localize your own properties and list entries go to Administration gt Customize gt Locale Editor Customizing Teamdesk e o f Y AL s Compt Browse workspaces ied toms w Reports Administration Lu My settings Ai impor boot ocete 4 Workspaces vi etie
207. ecific localization for the desired locale available You can only edit the target language in the leftmost column After you have made your changes save the modifications The localization facility is quite powerful You can name an property in one project or space A and in another B For example in a certain context you may want to talk of products and in another context of projects for the same objects That is well possible The localization is stored in the database it will be preserved across Teamdeskupdates Importing and Exporting Resources You can export a whole set of localized resources from Teamdesk to a Java properties file You can also import a set of resources from a Java properties file When you import select the file to read the resources from Select the language for which this resource file is targeted Select if you want to overwrite resources with the same identifier that you have previously edited directly in Teamdesk If not such resources will be preserved and the values from the resource file are being ignored 5 17 Managing scripts Plone select a Me properties Import for lenguege English lt Owerwrite modified Import for Track UI lebels v Figure 5 3 Importing localized texts from a resource file Last you select if the import file is for standard user interface texts or for system list custom properties etc After you have made your choices click on Import to import
208. eck box It may also be that your system administrator has disabled the selection and you have to use your LDAP Windows Unix password 1 In the top toolbar select Administration gt My profile gt My settings ae Admiristrahion e Cresto em ce JA Hiparttinga Projecte Automall assigreneents jog M Users groups C Generate iCalendar UBL L fei Customize Pe ide bd AF actas k er m Manege server a 3l ee o 2 Select the tab labeled Access data ta Lour Acce alata Brinker r rih Mile sera Legin arii arab kar rame hermann o DAP a fm vord Emal address hermanrribbesch com Q llama anal language Last Hesse First 9 Hammam Prete Je Engkh 5 e rone Central European Summer Time EnrcpeBeir ie 3 Mark the check box labeled Use central password LDAP 4 Click on the Save button in the tool bar to save your configuration With your next login your LDAP password is being used by Teamdesk for authentication 3 2 4 Configuring CSV separation character Teamdesk permits you to export reports to Excel and OpenOffice spreadsheets Depending on the locale of your Office installation there may be a different separation character for these file formats If you find that on opening a Teamdesk report in Excel you do not get nicely formatted columns you may want to change this character In most locales it is either a comma or a semicolon 1 In the top toolbar select Administration gt My pro
209. ed status within each reporting interval For example if the granularity has been set to monthly and the atan status to implemented the diagram would show for each month how imcicmortiod many items have changed to status implemented during that mont marini and all months before that WER boats 280 43 ml Haight pixels 250 Figure 3 9 Status over time tile configuration You have a number of options on what you want to see First you should give your tile an expressive name so you later on know what you actually see in the tile Then you need to set the projects or project releases you want to monitor You can select an entire project which includes all associated project release or just some releases 3 8 Working with the cockpit Next you select the reporting period you want to monitor You can either set a fixed interval starting and ending with a specified date or probably more useful just consider the last X number of days Next you need to set the granularity of your tile for example to daily weekly or monthly The granularity determines the time interval which will be used for computing the associated values If the granularity is weekly the reporting interval goes from the beginning of a week to the end In the next step you need to select the type of algorithm you want to use for computing the values to be displayed There are four different algorithms available New items in interval This diagram
210. ed you can directly go to the file in the version control repository by clicking on the list entry Modified files Track Modified Aruck corm trackphus ceore dibase My SOLAnt370 549l Modified Aruns com trackp us core src phogms dashboard mages myWatch ot Version Control Activity Stream This tile permits you to see the last X commits for a number of projects where you can configure X and the projects to consider Tile configuration Before you can use this tile you need to configure it Follow the general procedure to configure a cockpit tile outlined above to get to version control activity stream configuration page Van irs d icr X y Contiqurabi n for Twin dimen sTatisT Tite versinncanireehviby label Propecia Sales Tracks Support Na ol LO Commis i You need to select at least one project or release and the number of commits you want to see for each project or release Appearance The following figure gives you an impression of the version control activity stream tile Version control activity Track HOG 38111 1 53 EM mad Teit comen for edie 1014 2705 11610 5 04 FH adib fix 76 Upgrade behavior Cockpet views loose configuration 2687 11 4 10 5 34 PH db fie 974 Releases nob viable e project apres esekpil and 075 Naveaahinra x557T C8110 5 00 Fr frindi Som Fito Teeth Genie n Phi raal daba Halstad ty duad IOS Aud 2543 26 10 2501 FH adib TestdS 1673 747009 12 32 PH adh Fiz amp 16 Handing of beet breaks m pla
211. egory is further structured by items that you yourself work on items where you are registered as the manager and all items of that temporal category The all row includes the two previous rows The completion is calculated as the sum of booked work sum of booked work estimated remaining work Note that the original planned value is not considered in the calculation of the completion grade The rightmost column display how much of the original planned work has already been spent If this value exceeds the completion grade the project will most likely suffer a cost overrun 3 8 Working with the cockpit Budget summary Number of Sum planned Sum booked Estimated remaining Completion Consumption of issues value h work h work h plan 9 29 739 0 666 0 70 0 09 5 Issues I m ad snp 1 300 0 270 0 30 0 90 0 moos sues All overdue issues 3 455 0 422 0 39 0 son iii machin 19 on My manager s ses Alli issues due My manager issues Sum of overdue estimated remaining work 33 0 h Sum of estimated remaining work due this week 8 0 h At the bottom two additional numbers are displayed The first number gives an indication how much a project is behind schedule The second number gives an indication how well a project performs just looking at the current week If this figure is close to the number of people currently working on the tasks due times the remaining number of working hours this week the project is pretty
212. egular fields The multiple select requires more vertical space SO set its row span to 2 For this select the field by clicking on it in the panel area then go to the Properties window and change the row span parameter Percent complete 13 When you are done click on the Back button in the toolbar area You have modified the custom form Whenever the associated action is called the new form will be used Copying Custom Forms This section describes how to copy a custom form You must be logged in as system manager or system administrator 1 Inthe top toolbar selectAdministration Customize Forms Customizing Teamdesk t o Workspaces O surcar mask asugrmeres 7 Workspeces ii MB Uses amp groups e hem type spec form essignmer ME Users amp groups EUR IT Workspace type spec form assi A Customize Y Manage filters Customize 07 WB Workspace spec form assign i Actions 5 iQ Rapert templates Y E Manage server de User roles w Report templates User roles n Aat mi E UL ente Qa P Cost centers amp accounts O Accent d P Auomat Se Unk types A hem attributes t ste a y System dates EE Workspace types 2 Anew screen appears Click on the Copy icon in the Action column on the left for the form you want to make a copy of JR ap You have created a copy of the original form You can now edit this new form without changing the original form Delet
213. el by clicking on the panel button in the toolbar You can drag a panel to another position available field space Responsible available field space available field space available field space available field space available field space available field space 9 For the new panel change the number of rows and columns to two rows and one column Panell Panell descripto 10 Add a title or synopsis field and a description fields These fields are rather large so you need to give them more space by having only one column for the entire width Notice that the label for the description is in the middle It might be better to have it at the top porro rr cr rr rro rro rr rro rro 11 Select the description field and in the Properties window change the label alignment for the description field to vertical top Name Deco phon Desenption Label hor alignm Left Label wert Top v n 12 This looks better the label has moved to the top 5 11 Customizing forms Descripban 13 Now add a custom field of type cascaded select These fields can be rather wide too wide for one column 1 Responsible Priarity Parent rid rand shila See gquailatw 14 Select the new cascaded select field in the panel In the Properties window change property column span to 2 This will give this field 2 columns space amne WHIT Middle w alignm Cehamn span 2 Roe p 1 15 When you are done click the Back
214. elect a state in the grid and click on Edit to modify a state or on Delete to delete a state o AgJ ES Workspace status fun Taa TI Aetesse sabus opened ache 27 Account shai iiad dosed 5 14 Managing workspace types Workspace types help you minimize the effort of configuring a large number of workspaces or projects Workspaces inherit their configuration from their associated workspace type By configuring a workspace type you configure all workspaces that you have associated with that type With workspace types you can provide different configurations for different types of spaces or projects For example if you are in embedded systems development or develop mechatronical systems you may have a workspace type for the electronics part for the mechanical part and for the software For the mechanical part you don t need releases for the electronic circuit boards you may have three editions and for the software you need a lot of releases a product backlog sprints and so on For a workspace type you can configure the following entities 208 5 14 Managing workspace types if it can have phases and releases e if it Supports accounting and progress monitoring e which item types are available e which states are available e which priorities are available e which severities are available e which child workspace types are available custom properties custom forms e workflow assignments To edit create or delete wo
215. ems for each category You can click on the respective number and you will get the complete list of items This works for all numbers shown in this panel For each category the numbers are detailed towards each project they belong to They are further detailed into items that are in time blue numbers and that are overdue red numbers The graphs give a quick indication on the percentage of items overdue related to all items of that category and project Project summary This tile gives you a concise state of your projects and releases You can configure which projects and releases you want to consider You can group the item numbers by various aspects such as priority item state current responsible etc As with all other views you can of course have more than one instance of it in your cockpit for example one grouped by responsible and one grouped by state Configuration Before you can use this tile you need to configure it Follow the general procedure to configure a tile outlined above to get to the project summary configuration page as described above 3 8 Working with the cockpit Tite projectummary label Projects and releases Sb JF Track da 3 Fo Tc x 35 Ei 4o El te Age 15 f ex 12 B iA E El Rel 4 0 backlog El Product backlog i y Wack Support Group by Status M Lave Close Figure 3 7 Project summary configuration You can change the description of the tile to give it a more precise meaning This is parti
216. en with the new one For rules how the system identifies the list see Importing and exporting custom lists Clear children means that the resulting list in the database will have exactly the same structure as the one in the XML file Otherwise new child entries could be added to the list in the database and existing ones would be kept 205 Customizing Teamdesk Upload List file XML x List fie XML List x QOverwribe testing Otat cni dren Upload Done 4 Clickon the Upload button to import the list definition into the system database You have now imported a list from an XML file into the system database 5 13 System object states Spaces releases and accounts just like items have a state The state determines whether regular users can see or use such objects or items linked to them This way you can release archive or delete spaces releases and accounts keeping them in the database but hiding them from regular users or for a particular purpose like creating new items for an archived release 5 13 1 Managing workspace states Each workspace has a state which determines its visibility and controls what can be done with items belonging to it You must be logged in as system manager or system administrator There are three workspace state values in Teamdesk Each state has a state flag which determines the availability of a workspace There are three values a state flag can assume as shown in the following ta
217. en you disable an account or disable accounting all together for a workspace existing information will be preserved 4 6 Default automail assignments For occasional users the configuration of automail settings may require too much knowledge and time It is therefore possible that a space administrator system manager or system administrator configures automail settings for a workspace or all workspaces for all users that do not overwrite these settings with their own You must be logged in as space administrator system manager or system administrator 1 In the top toolbar select Administration gt Workspaces Alternatively click on the Workspaces bar in the left navigation area Be 5 A e BP La Cockpit Browse workspaces Find tems v Reports Admiristration v Cresta hem v Lu Te Je Add Workspace Add sutapa o Copy gt Ties A a pann Ea Us hasan Roles TU CN E Retease Customize b uss finaren amp Verwaltung T fers Q Actions zol Manage server gt P F heungtkreis 2 Report templates yy brtegratiorsroun Se Custom forms 2 Select a workspace in the leftmost navigation area 3 Select a workspace in the left navigation area and select Automail assignments in the second navigation area Select again Automail assignments in the third navigation area 4 7 Configuring workspace specific cockpits 4 Click on the Add button in the toolbar 5 Select an automail condition and an automail trigger
218. ent of your choice with a special XML file using the OpenDoPE authoring tool plug in for MS Word 285 The Teamdesk Wiki Obtaining the OpenDoPE plug in You can get the OpenDoPE plug in for MS Word from http www opendope org downloads authoring friendly setup exe After installation you have a new tab in your top menu band called Authoring Adding fields to your document To add fields to your own document that will be filled with content from the Wiki proceed as follows In MS Word open the document you want to use as a template Click on the Authoring tab in the menu band Start Einf gen Seteniayout Verweise Sendungen Uterpeuten Antient 2 2 ox wo Show sion Remove ings About XMI po mapping vanto ADS E E ERE existing KMI sample ME ETT ken mu um Add In Hiife Test Specification Figure 8 11 OpenDOPE authoring mode Click on Replace XML in the menu band Choose to copy the content of an existing XML into the Word document The file you can find in the TRACK_HOME wordTemplates directory It is the only XML file there This wizard allows you lo specify the XML part lor the current document Choose a method to create the XML part Copy the contents of an existing XM Type or paste Figure 8 12 Importing the XML structure Now you can drag the desired fields into your document and format them to your liking 286 8 7 Creating LaTeX Freemarker templates T XML Mapping xii
219. er Herm Link types gt Custer forces r A zw T i FTO Wheelie poes 2 In the second navigation column click on Global lists and then on Item type You can now add item types delete item types or modify them 5 12 Custom selection lists A Track System Administrator Help Log of Codpt Browse workspaces Find ems w Reports Administration w Create iem v track Jy My senos Q ma K Q Weorkspaces 4 aos tests nore kon Icon fle Stywe Typeflag a wee D ww MEETS n E Ou inem Meets J mag Testen Mecano rang tun Probiembenct i problem Report Test text Generi oap Acton em a actionitem ong Test text Genera G ritis EA Meetieg Requirement E requirements pro Test text General f Cos comers amp accounts T Problembericht TOP o mo teg Test text General le Acci n hem Problem Report amp milestone pag Test text Generel The type flag influences how items of that type are treated The task type flag controls synchronization with MS Project and Project Libre Only items with that type flag will be synchronized The meeting type flag controls which items will be treated as meetings You cannot delete the task and meeting item types You can assign an icon 16 x 16 px GIF or PNG format to each entry You can furthermore assign a CSS style to each entry which will be used to format items in the item navigator For example you could use various shades of red as background color to illustrate the ur
220. er criteria E Y Ti v E E opened aralned aegned g Y C00 Meeting YON add criteria More criteria 4 Save the filter 3 4 8 Deleting a filter 1 Select menu Find items gt Manage filters 75 Teamdesk for team members gt Estat query Pp And feuer Taie ese CE Meo ee Burk Mh nete Werkspaces gt 3 Private Name Te El Temini M inteprabontraum Aker ac Mie gienen Vorglnge fiker hers fiber E instant query FO Ada folder T Add fer Pest CL Acoy fuer CE Provate Name Type Ail Integrationsraum fiker Alle offenen Vorg nge fher rre fier finer In den letzten 90 Tage geschiossen Noue Themen der letrten Woche Offene Punkte aus Bescrechungen 3 49 Applying a filter 1 Select menu Find items Manage filters 6 3 4 Finding items A FIA Ke itae i Deacovate Juse len Ovtstand ng Name My items Aciminsstratey Tracks Sytem Um the manager Bojari Adrian I m responsible Barbed Low I m the author D schoer Christoph Meetings Ernst Manuela Unscheduted Friedrich Meg Closed recently Friedrich Matthias Added recently Guest John Updated recently Henderson Fred My fi A Lang Hartmut Margcan Mihei TF Last used Mira David Inst J Pich Gabriele age create new ones or ut an existing one to pet a specific view with a ist of items 2 Selecta filter by clicking on it in the right list area You may need to open folders to see all filters available 3
221. er in the search field or by selecting the item from the item overview report You can also select the Copy entry in the context menu of the item overview report You must have permission to create items 1 Click on the Copy icon in the toolbar 2 On the screen that appears mark the check box if you want to copy the item including its history otherwise leave it unchecked You can also select if you want to copy attachments as well and if you want to copy the entire item hierarchy below the current item This is a very powerful operation you can create a large number of items that way in one step 3 Click the Copy button A new item has been created which is a copy of the original item The new item is by default marked with Copy in the subject field In case you chose to include attachments copies of the attachments have been generated as well In case you chose option copy with all children the entire item hierarchy has been copied 3 3 17 Linking items to other items You can create links between items such as is duplicate of or is duplicated by To use this feature your project administrator must have enabled linking for your project Sometimes it is helpful to create links between items to express a certain relationship Teamdesk permits you to define any number of link types like is duplicated of or its reverse is duplicated by or is test case for requirement and so on There a
222. er of the item navigator screen The two modes are Global first level view filtering mode Second level sub filtering mode With global view filters you select a subset from all items you can read from the database With the sub filtering mode you can further filter the result set from the global first level view In either mode you can change item properties by dragging an item to the respective node in the navigator left area 86 3 5 Item navigator 7 5 I j 1 i 7 wil fhe o f i Un D Cockpit rows Dro Find ems we Rupert Ar n SUBFILTER WITH DRAG amp DROP a E Added recency Total number of it G PROJECT Them Ko Project J Tracks 3x at i Them type Problem Report 127 J Teka 4x Q 1905 Trek Suppos 4 Tracks Support Que Trsck Suppcs a U PERSONAL BASKET j 1588 Tracks Suppos T inbe O in Tak Suppom JP Panned tems J 1990 Tuck Suppos QR Hen actions 3 1591 Tracks Suppos a Reminder 3 182 ke dx de Delegated 501 Ti Suppa S tan IVA Tack ppa ireua J3 1995 Tite dox M nere Cin Pukk 4x 2 d Status 2000 Teneis dox Ww opened 3 qnem type Requirement 3 Global filtering Pme maras mode i gg Tox d Tara ir a Sub filtering 8 mode You apply a filter by clicking on the respective node in the left navigation area Here you find a tree with all projects and releases you have access to some predefined filters your own personal filters project specific filters provided to you by your project administra
223. er than created again Overview Tocreate items from an Excel spread sheet you enter all required data into that sheet on your local computer The first row of the spread sheet contains the field or property names all following rows contain item data one item per row Fetal em FK y WE 3 3 EH UP etd EE A As gH G A B LE oO E F 5 1 Project lexue Type Status Manager Responsible Title Descilpilon 5h Track Militari pentd Fit Brad Br ambock Jenny Test impor tle 1 This is plain Text desenption with no x fermatting Fi Wie have included some ling breaks lo sep E Track Problem report opened Fil Brad Moore Dern Test Import bile Here we his sore very long tent unformatted y In the h ginrang was the Ward and the Word 3 wat walh Ged and ho Word was Sod Track Problem report opened Pi Brad Moore Dern Test impor ble 3 prosbongeboldesbonge emilia uunderlngc u lt siike gt siike 4 theousgheshspikic br i 5 Track Milang opendd Pit Brad Blrambock Jenny Test impot ttle 4 Same moro descnptsian hero L B Track Milestane opened Fit Brad Erambock Jenny Pest import ble 5 ee CY f I LA Then you upload the sheet to the Teamdesk server To import items from an Excel sheet go to Administration gt Import On the next screen you will be able to select the Excel file from which you want to import items into the Teamdesk system Teamdesk will upload the Excel file to the
224. ere If you create a new action item in any workspace you will not get the standard new item form but the Action Item w o release form Creating custom forms This section describes how to create a new custom form You must be logged in as system manager or system administrator 1 Inthe top toolbar selectAdministration Customize Forms 5 11 Customizing forms o Y Y aL E L Repos AmO v Creme mem v Ju My settings e o retina hi I y 4 Werkspeces z Ee assign forms to actons by draggne rm hem type spec age Users amp groups 1 d MB Use amp groups a AA LE Customae m Customize Y Manage filters Workspace spec form asgari 4 T puc Q Actions gt i ia Report templates J E Manage server gt de User roles q O uns Cost centers amp accounts Fo Cost centers A accounts Acuon Eu dd Atom J A omal Action fy Unk types Unk types nm ELLA i Defaut F al Tem attributes Coie LL we O System states t Lists Defaun F Ss p Workspace types pe Feature UA Locale editor BE Locate editor 1 Meeting E mail templates 2 Anew screen appears Click on the Add button in the toolbar OD add Form list Names Description Default Form ADD COMHENT Add cement te existing Hus 3 Give the new form a name and a description e u Seve Cancel Form list r Mame Description Edit Me tons Edir form for eda cone 4 Cli
225. ers The item has now been moved to the new project or item type and has been removed from the old project or item type Be aware that this can change a number of things including your right to access this item For example there could be other states available or other properties or input forms People that are on the watch list of this item will be sent an e mail of this change if notifications are configured accordingly 3 3 10 Changing item state The life cycle of an item is characterized by its state As work on an item progresses it is typically moved from one state to another one Oftentimes a state change coincides with a change of the responsible person You must have retrieved the item which you want to move to another item type list This can be done by entering the item number in the search field or by selecting the item from the item overview From this report you can also directly change item state using the context menu LE LN Honaram O Wiews in news babs 5A INT bonaraumn Edit a INT Benaraum Copy 34 Pee Qraon More LP br Printer Change Salus IGF shred 2 Add Child 4 ak int a bon riium 1 35x g a bees e nd Hj Set Private FE Ord y FE M7 B i rator Fi pa Ti inhenearinin You must have been granted edit permissions for this item 1 From the item detail page click on tool bar icon Change Status 2 Anew screen appears Select the new state and depending on your system
226. es Teamdesk can be operated with many applications servers database systems and operating systems Furthermore Teamdesk can be configured in numerous ways Should there be any problems in such configurations it is very helpful for the support team to get diagnostic messages Usually during normal operation the number of diagnostic messages saved by the system should be minimal in order to keep good performance and reduce disk space consumption However sometimes it may be necessary to increase the number of diagnostic messages for certain modules to track down a problem In this case the logging level is being increased for such modules This causes more messages to be written to the log files by such modules There are six logging levels or verbosity levels defined The lowest verbosity level is FATAL the highest ALL The standard configuration is to set all modules to the WARN level and set modules to be inspected closer to DEBUG level 1 In the top toolbar select Administration Manage server Logging configuration The screen that appears is a plain list with all Teamdesk modules 2 Type a filter expression into the filter box to reduce the list If you want to change a logging level for a specific module look for the line with the module name and change the level using the selection box behind the module name Filter Emai Clear Class name Liggeng Mesa d ERROR 3 ibora Com deuil bate util Lead aodkg an
227. es and the query URL build plugins lt plugin gt lt groupId gt org apache maven plugins lt groupId gt lt artifactId gt maven compiler plugin lt artifactId gt lt configuration gt lt source gt 1 5 lt source gt lt target gt 1 5 lt target gt lt configuration gt lt plugin gt lt plugin gt grouprd com trackplus mvn plugin groupld lt artifactId gt trackplusChanges lt artifactId gt lt version gt 1 0 SNAPSHOT lt version gt lt configuration gt 82 3 4 Finding items lt guery gt http gandalf 8080 track xml report query nKsW4DX15WsxX 3D lt query gt default action type gt lt defaultType gt fix lt defaultType gt mapping between Teamdesk item type gt and Maven action type gt lt issueTypesMap gt lt Task gt fix lt Task gt lt ProblemReport gt fix lt ProblemReport gt lt Requirements gt add lt Requirements gt lt issueTypesMap gt lt configuration gt lt executions gt lt execution gt lt phase gt compile lt phase gt lt goals gt lt goal gt changes generate lt goal gt lt goals gt lt xecution gt lt executions gt lt plugin gt lt plugins gt lt build gt 1 Select menu Find items gt Manage filters Y T Ld Find Reports Admito Y Create tom All items Me By Activate Luce Suse leva Outstandeng Mame My items Mmiristratey Track System I m the manager Bojar Adrian Um responsible Brace Low Meetings Ern
228. es from being displayed so that you only see the columns that interest you You can choose the sort criteria within each column You can arrange columns by dragging them to a specific place 94 3 5 Item navigator e h F al AS A Trace Symon Adminigrator Help csl ied X SR Ne ckt Cockpit Browne weorkupaces ter navigator cw Reports Administration e Create ltem e tra e El Instant fer Total number of Bers found 115 Fiber 115 O action FA bord e Hd Columns Saba ve Sort by em No o4 ascending descending opened processing dosed suspended ba k opened 108 x processing 5 x gasd 1 Xx szixpended 1 x E Boss Dun E mimistrados Tracks System 1 Pan Peter Pan Peter ALIS 4 Exmittein des Umfangs der 95 ALG Bectanteabrmolerung d y E Pan Peter Ej Sass Dan B AUS 6 Ermittein von Anforderungen ASS Promese vor y E fan Peter Et AUS 7 Festiegen der Administrator Traci System Akguisesirateges und des E Fan Peter E Serum Civis 8 AUS 9 Erstellen des DE BEP 33 Definieren des i Geriamas 7 Adminstrates Track System ALS 10 Plan und Strategie f r E fan Peter AUS gt domaine dar Mitgluver ES Serum Chris T AS Festiegen der Bewertungsintenen fPanktrkante pemos Tn Vergon 4 10 28 Enterprise 2013 Stpinibels Trackplus Setting the column property Cards on the agile board are organized in rows and columns You can choose which item property is taken to place an item into a
229. essible 58 3 3 Working with items Private visibility means that no person except for the author of an item will be able to see this item anywhere in the system 14 Change state s Choose parent a Add expense i Reports Figure 3 2 Moving an item from the context menu To move an item you will have to either select it from the item overview using the context menu right mouse click on the item number or be on the item detail page of that item Changing item type Teamdesk organizes items in different lists called item types You can move an item from one item type to another How to do this is outlined below You must have retrieved the item which you want to move to another item type list or project This can be done by entering the item number in the search field or by selecting the item from the overview report You must have been granted edit permission for this item Item actions will be disabled if you do not have proper permissions 1 From the item overview click on tool bar icon Move 2 Anew screen appears Select the new item type 3 Click on the Next button 4 A new screen appears Here you may change other parameters related to the item type change This form might have been configured by your system administrator 5 Once you are done with changing other parameters click on the Move button The item will now be in the chosen item type list and has been removed from the old list
230. et us call the directory where it is located APACHE DIR conf 2 Add the following line at the end of the file Include lt APACHE DIR gt conf track conf 3 Make sure that the following modules are loaded somewhere in your Apache web server configuration LoadModule proxy_module modules mod_proxy so LoadModule proxy_http_module modules mod_proxy_http so LoadModule proxy_ajp_module modules mod_proxy_ajp so 4 Create or modify file lt APACHE_DIR gt conf track conf For basic authentication it should look like this lt Location track websvn crm otherApps gt AuthName Steinbeis GmbH amp Co KG Login AuthType Basic AuthUserFile lt APACHE_DIR gt conf htpasswd AuthGroupFile dev null require valid user lt Location gt 278 7 15 Configuring Apache Tomcat FroxyPreserveHost On ProxyPass track ajp localhost 9008 track ProxyPassReverse track ajp localhost 9008 track In a real environment you would use something like LDAP authentication or SSPI here which would permit authentication via your Windows PC login without further password requests We use basic authentication here only because it is simple to set up and permits you to test your installation quickly 5 Tocreate the basic authentication password file open a command shell and type htpasswd c APACHE DIR conf htpasswd firstUserLoginName htpasswd APACHE DIR conf htpasswd secondUserLoginName and so on 6 Make sure you have container based authentic
231. ew node can take up its responsibility as the new master node 7 4 Configuring login page text The login page of the Teamdesk system provides an area where messages to existing or prospective users of the system can be placed like downtime schedules or registration policies The message can be provided in several languages at the same time This section describes how to edit this text In the top toolbar select Administration Manage server Login page text The screen that appears has a selection list for the locale a title or teaser and a text area Select the locale for which you want to edit or create the login page text You can use any HTML tags here The locale displayed to the user will depend on the users preferred language setting in his browser since this is before login and Teamdesk does not recognize the user yet 7 5 Observing and managing server state Sometimes it is necessary to prevent users from accessing the system for example if a new version is to be deployed or other maintenance tasks have been scheduled Server accessibility may also be effected by the number of users registered because of license restrictions There is a state page available which permits to disable new server logins and which gives an overview over the number of users currently logged on the number of active and deactivated users the total number of projects and items In the top toolbar select Administration Manage server Server
232. fed S Customize j i actions H e m Manage server amp 2 Selectthe tab labeled Other ki Be Access data Reminder e mails gher settings Organization Last Loge 2012 10 19 12 46 36 roanzabona A Demon w 7 Phiri iw encoded Western 90 0059 1 E raton char e o yv cass 9 ne e i i 3 Choose if you want to always offer a Save as dialog when downloading attachments 4 Clickon the Save button in the tool bar to save your configuration Next time you download an attachment from Teamdesk you will be prompted by your browser how you want to handle it 3 2 7 Configuring e mail format You can select if you want to receive e mails in plain text format or in HTML format The HTML format looks much better and quickly gives you an overview on what has changed Most e mail clients support the HTML format well so there may be little reason to not choose this 1 Inthe top toolbar select Administration My profile My settings ie h Amira e Create inm sw JA oyscttings f Projects Automall aczzigraments jog M Users groups C Generate iCalendar UBL L ie Customize Pe dii fet AE actas ke a br us A ar k a Manage server ee GF 2 Select the tab labeled Reminder e mails 48 3 2 Registering and changing your user profile ra Sore Access data Reminder e modis Other settings General settings o po MTM Han Poles o z o z o Hemindes bevels and bead gelegertich 0
233. fication filter with an automail condition Only if messages match the condition an e mail is actually sent For example you may only be interested in e mail notification for items that have both a high priority and severity or which were changed by a certain person With automail conditions you can define complex filter criteria based on the new and previous item property values For example you may only be interested in items whose new state is closed or whose old state was closed You ask yourself why would anybody make changes to a closed item you want to be informed in that case And you don t care about all the work until an item is closed you just want to see the results This can be done with automail conditions You can define your own conditions or use existing conditions and you can assign your personal condition specifically for each project If you do not do this the settings provided by the project or system administrator pertain You will notice that all properties can be selected with either their new or their old value New in this case means the property value that was the result of the action causing the automail trigger and old in this case means the value the property carried before the action This makes it possible to define conditions that check for transitions for example state transitions from anywhere to closed or responsible transitions from yourself to anybody else As an example let us assum
234. file gt My settings hes ty Adminatrahion w Create Bem ow Ly Mysettings J Projecte Automall assignments no M Users te groups C Generate iCalendar UBL L fee Customize as i actions F m Hansge server J E F 2 Select the tab labeled More settings 46 3 2 Registering and changing your user profile ket rre Access data Kerinder e mails gher settings 4 Onganization Last Loge 2012 10 19 Li Waita un Denon Wr amp Sv encoding Wester 150 0059 1 q Cov sroarabon Chirac ion i JE chuc zi o T e Enable query layout 7 o 3 Go to the field set Behaviour and set the CVS encoding and the CSV character to the value your Office installation requires 4 Clickon the Save button in the tool bar to save your configuration Next time you export a report to a CSV file columns will be separated by the character you configured 3 2 5 Configuring the layout manager You can enable Teamdesk to associate a specific item overview layout with each filter you have defined For example a list of mile stones might require different columns and a different sorting than a list of requirements When you enable this feature Teamdesk will remember for each filter even from the cockpit tiles how you had laid out your columns the sorting and grouping the last time you used that filter 1 In the top toolbar select Administration gt My profile gt My settings Ld Administration wr Create tem se S
235. filter automail 96 basics 73 basket 71 define 74 146 delete 75 146 parameter 73 reporting 69 filter layout 89 filter repository 72 final state 36 flat list view mode 87 flow control 36 folders 28 follow up 35 35 forgot password 52 form action 180 assign 182 copy 187 create 182 delete 188 modify 185 overview 180 G Gantt diagram 117 Gantt view mode 87 Getting things done 71 Git 138 global filtering 86 groups 26 GID calendar 35 delegated 35 follow up 35 in basket 34 next actions 34 planned items 34 guest account 163 H help desk 16 16 hide fields 157 hierarchy 61 HTML tag 54 iCalendar configure 99 import custom list 205 import from Excel 55 239 in basket 34 34 inactive project permissions 68 incubator 35 informed add 61 initial state 36 input mask assign 182 copy 187 create 182 delete 188 modify 185 issue management 16 item add parent 61 change item type 58 change project 58 create 54 date 60 hierarchy 61 link item 63 move 58 59 private 54 properties 31 31 property 33 public 54 rich text 54 to new workspace 59 item description 54 item filter 38 item handling overview 54 item link add 63 item navigator left area modes 86 standard layout 89 sub filtering 86 view modes 87 item overview 69 item properties short text 167 item property cascading select 171 172 173 check box 170 date 168 double 170 integer 169 multiple select 171 simple select 170 171 user pic
236. fiters dy Manager 2 Name Organizational ur Group Name Organizational ur Group BLITIZENN eo o 5 Administrator Suporte AMA pA TF Helpdesk T Custom forms Boss Dan cro No we Uel Construction No ly Leeder circle E Custom fields Coder Barbara SW Developm No x User No Marketing A Vertrieb 8 wok ows L User No 4 Select a role to which you want to assign users in your workspace Drag and drop the users from the very right column to the column left of it To remove an assignment drag and drop users from the Assigned list to the Available list You can use filters to limit the users you see by a right mouse click on the label bar gt A A Wack Sten Admito Help Leg ot 9 F Y he e Cd Get Iemeemetacecia Madden Y Mert Admiten ri Contato v track Ae My settings Worlapeces UP Genera ones Drag one or mone users from the list on the right to the left column tn assign lg cor Ta Renin Mole dy Extern them rore Responsible for warege Integration space GUT Support E Available lh franzen amp verwaltung f Menage tere Organizations un Group Mame E Acc Y HENCE m e d TF Helpdesk Sa Custom fomes cm ho Conatructa Z Bert LP Leader circle 118 Custem fitis SW Develoom ho Guest Johr Marlosting amp Vertrieb BP Wortdiows erum Chr Columna ln Tisirbum a Baxign Accounts System He Group by this field Themenapexher N Show in groups tte conce M TP Integration version
237. for Adeninidtralbor Tracks E Meeting ALL Avery ample mask for Administrator Track F Sene Feature ALL Avery sample math for Adrriniciratos Track D Task w Release ALL A mask for tasks with Administrator Track L Task vay Release TD A A mask foe tasks with Administrator Tracks _ E Tak wia release ALL Avery simple mask iw Adminin Track E Tor ay Avery simple man for Aderinitralos Track Assigning workflows You can assign workflows to item types in the selected workspace type How this is done is described in Managing workflows fel coy O ret O Adrada ict eem Doan VF ipg Diciis mz Baim gr Pasan from type y Taste Standard action dj fein Stata Bm 9 Assn Pricuity E Problem Report Standard je designs Sorry fF Action lem Sarat acticr m Gom Pelos 5 Requirement Lys Custeen ferms B ene s D sain Workfioves E Sueded action ceric Track Syst M Sanad minione Aero workflow lor aika Adrriniibrados Track Byak a 7 adad problem report Software Aworkllow for software pr Aderinistratoe Tracks Syst om Mechatronece ER Priste Project P mm Sofvere Devekomet mm Themenspeicher 212 5 15 Managing workflows 5 15 Managing worktlows You can define workflows that specify who can perform state transitions on items and what happens together with such state transitions You can associate scripts with workflow state transitions that perform arbitrary actions and checks To add or edit wo
238. for top down planning of budgets and dates The top down values are compared with the bottom up values and conflicts are marked For example if the budget was 100 Euro and the planned value entered by the responsible was 130 Euro this item would be marked being in a conflict state For more information have a look at Bottom up and top down 265 Administering the server Configuring site as demo site This is a switch to make installation of a demo site easy In a demo site it is not possible to save changes to the guest user account Usually this should be disabled Alert of new software version This displays a message in the state line when there is a newer program version available than the one you are running The message is only shown to system administrators Webservice activation You can activate the web service interface which is being used by external software like Eclipse Mylyn and Hudson Jenkins The address under which you can reach the web service is the URL of your instance amended by services TrackplusService Example https www trackplus net services TrackplusService Automated data backup This turns on regular automated data backups The number and frequency of backups you can configure on the data backup configuration page see Data Backup 7 3 Cluster operation Teamdesk can be operated in a clustered environment i e one Teamdesk instance can run on a number of servers This section gives examples of po
239. ft navigation area im A Track Sytem dominio Help Log oT o Fi Y at Re Li cct Cipt Brweewerapson Pind es v Reports Anta Create fern v track Jy My ostia dE Add F Ju My settings 13 i Wirtapanes Rude gu rra Appears in selections for Access only Eo tem types Hidden Fics Users gnum EB Users amp groups D Meeting A LN Lustomize CY Manage filters E Action Fee Consulted DO Actions o T B E Be Requirement M ndge irr d TOP workin ee ET Elek Manage roles that can be assigned to users Roles define Pi Acchunis rond any Mj titan rcm pasto For urs ee misil dire 2 Select a role by clicking on it and the click on the Delete button in either the toolbar or the context menu Customizing Teamdesk Fa p E dn Cockpit Browse woriapeces 0 Find items Repris Adminkins on Ceste liem track Jy My eninge le et Ee et Copy ge iem type agement 7j Reid restriction L virpas Roly Permission PODES only to kem types Hidden Meis EE Uses groups ned aen Bl Meeting modify aeu m Customine greats Been EM ya Action Them CF Manage timers close if man ax author mmt TM Report templates dowe if resp s w rkenace aden E Task roel any dE Com centers amp COL modify any d Fd d oni create Rem S dert TN a ww Link types Fran or thot lone Foi consue item type assignment Custom foes WO DOS admin dgn Z3 Custom fields io um an create Bern ERE
240. g on button Create report When you click on the XML datasource button you can download an XML file representing sample data forthis type of report template This XML file you can use as test data when you modify the report template locally on your computer ps shit oy Create rep A x er ph I po E Report configuration af A A wbh pensa wth Gatesource Y Projecifhelesss Quma penosa iy pui Projects Reens ME pende by Bl Tima period Gumeni mamih m Costoenter ww Account 250800 General Experses 250801 SW Dnieper 250802 HW Development 250810 Construction Create report XML daltasource Cancel Customizing Teamdesk 5 4 2 Report template repositories Reports are organized in report template repositories Teamdesk provides three types of repositories to keep report templates in 1 A private report template repository for each user 2 A project specific report template repository 3 Asystem wide report template repository Each user may upload personal report templates to his private report template repository Other users will not be able to see these templates Project administrators may upload templates for use in projects they are responsible for Users that have a role in these projects will be able to see these report templates The system administrator can upload templates that can be seen by all users 5 4 3 Downloading a report template Reports are based on data sources and report templates Th
241. g cannot be selected in the Release scheduled selection box However they will show up as normal in the Release noticed box archived closed Releases with a closed type flag will not appear in either the Released scheduled or Release noticed selection box 1 In the top toolbar select Administration gt Customize gt System states Alternatively click on the Customize System state bar in the left navigation area A Tacks Syren Adriano Helo off o y id A m F Ps Cockpit brow worpaonm Find ir BRrprts Adrriniyrgtion ow Crests Germ e track Ly My settings Jy My settings Workspaces BE Rochen eaten Sennen e tates for workspaces phases and accounts Select a node in the tree left ME Users B groups Warkcerur star Users A groups E Acceurd sale Cush mine H F Cna Lj Manege l ibers Actions Report templates UT Maap Filters Managesenrr Ode Leer rode Rasewsrt Leere Cast centers A accounts Wes roles E J Mutomail T Cou carters amp ri Link types ad Aromi Custom forma Lirik types Custom Fields 3 Gumon forms Cumo fieles 1 i r TE o duum E emendum os Seed a node in phe Gree eL 2 Select Release state Click on the Add button to add a new state Select a state in the grid and click on Edit button to modify a state Click on the Delete button to delete a state 207 Customizing Teamdesk D dd b EE workspace status Mame Troelleg n Release status in progress PEC
242. g configured before you can use this With releases you can structure your workspace along the time axis Using Unking o Workspace specific item no pref Worksnace specific fem no pref x 2 Work and cost Work y Q Hours per workdey B 4 o Defauk unit for work Hours U o Co y o Currency nome EUR o Currency symbol o Defaut account 250800 General Expenses v o Release Worksascr has piuses o 4 1 Managing spaces 4 Select the Default settings tab The values you set here are being taken when the create item forms do not contain the respective fields or when items are created via e mail You can set an initial status for each item type 5 1 a j X Tod Syne imineo Hea Log oT L n n o y Y i s L Codpit Brome worlapeces l ediem cc Reporta Adi Cra erm track Jy My settings fel Se Cored a Basic settings Default settings E mail settings IC el emt Default manager Administrator Track System T A Default responsible Adminestrator Track System i y bategon space Default Rem type Task a FT Melden Default priory occasionally ea Lander cede Cela severity minor 7 gt Marketing amp vermis Pref by P tem cem ast O Variat defauits 17 p Terum Initial tate a Tam Default inicial state opened ES uh TP Issegrati n Selec the cheekbex to activate an item type specific initial state for rely created BEMA T 3 U X Laser Printer ik Tash 1 If you want to offer a specifi
243. g the index disk space to keep both on the same machine Force Teamdesk server URL Teamdesk has been designed to operate in a proxy environment that is it works well even when its address from the outside is different from the internal address 264 7 2 Server configuration Usually Teamdesk extracts its base URL from the first access to the system after server startup aly Caution If you access the system using localhost which you may be tempted to do as a system administrator Teamdesk will use localhost as its base address until the next application restart This will cause problems when other people iare accessing the system from some other computer You thus should always access the system using its real address as seen from the outside The automatic base URL detection works fine if there are no proxy servers between the application server and the user clients If there is a proxy server hiding the application server the correct server URL has to be configured The application name must not be included Teamdesk will find that out itself Example for the Teamdesk server URL http gandalf This will work for an installation where the Teamdesk application can be reached under http gandalf track or http gandalf track dev or any other application name you might have chosen In non proxied environments you can leave this field empty which will enable the automatic detection feature for the server URL Configur
244. gator w Reports Administration Create item v t P Agwufeebung Tota number of ems found 31 Filtered 31 actions Gantt Gagram Tate Time ax Carta options i Choose columns Quarters Weeks Months Days Highight citical path Show baseline x Zoomin Zoom out 2013 2014 item No Project Te Od 2013 Nov 2013 Dec 2013 Jan 2014 Fed 2014 Mar 2014 Agr 22 le 3 Projet Ausschr a al ALIS 1 A Au x10 9 5 Mausa ASHOTODI FEAUS Muscheebung Re 2 Depending on the view mode you will be able to configure the view 3 5 4 Grid based view modes Depending on the right area view mode you can configure the columns sorting and grouping in the item navigator The configuration pertains to the last filter you have executed and will be preserved even after you have logged out If you change the My items filter navigator configuration this is the default for all filters where you do not explicitly create a specific configuration Sorting columns To sort items click on the desired column header Click again to sort in reverse order 69 Teamdesk for team members Grouping You can group items in the item overview report up to a grouping level of four 1 To activate grouping click on the Group button at the top right of the item navigator screen A pop up box will appears 2 Select the desired grouping criteria 3 Click on the Save button wer Ly ot a PROEKT STE mismas Total rame
245. ge the parent selection both the child and grandchild selection changes automatically When you change the child selection the grandchild selection changes automatically PCGC Parent 3 wv Chid 3 1 Y Grandch d 3 1 1 User picker general The user picker is an property where you can select an entry from a list of users Which users appear in this list you can define by roles a user has in that project or by the organizational unit the user belongs to Aktribulte configuration bene Lier Picker me Liver picker pereral ne You can assign automail settings to the selected user based on the predefined automail roles You can disable automail for the selected user or treat him like he was the author manager or responsible of the item You can also treat him like he was on the consulted or observed list Soeofic configuration By roles Dy departments Development Support v Customizing Teamdesk User picker on behalf of The user picker on behalf of is treated in the system like the author of an item This permits you to create an item on behalf of somebody else and this other person will see this item and can treat it as if he was the orginal author Which users you can select you can define by roles a user has in the workspace the current item belongs to or by the organizational unit the user belongs to The automail settings are the same as for the author Workspace picker The workspace picker permits to re
246. gency of an item You can drag entries in the list on the right to another position The entries will be offered at the user interface in the same order as shown in the grid here Y Attention When you rename an entry the change may not be reflected at the user interface This happens when you have specific localizations for the selection entries which is the case for all predefined entries In this case the localized values will be shown and not the label you define here 5 12 3 Managing lists for custom properties You can define any number of selection lists which you can use for custom properties of the proper type You can store these lists either in a global scope visible to anybody or in a workspace scope visible only to users that can access that workspace Adding a custom list You can add custom lists which you can then assign to custom properties of the proper property type You must be logged in as system manager or system administrator 1 In the top toolbar select Administration gt Customize gt Lists Alternatively click on the Customize Lists bar in the left navigation area X Toe Sytem Adminigrrac Y Ds L Pied Rem Repris Admisi n ow Cronin Ana gt E Meti gt Gebel on E EP selection lists There are some predefined systers Ests a Rem c IS Workspace specific ists Hl users grou de any number of custom selection las either at the global level vit HT Manage Miers p mouse right mesa Atom Foo Report
247. gi SVN INSTANCES path revision rev amp view mari porwr ext 9 Detar 4 Select one of the supported version control systems in this case Subversion The list may vary Additional systems can be supported via plug ins 5 Selecta version control web viewer if you have any installed Teamdesk directly supports viewVC With a version control web viewer you will be able to go from an item directly to associated change sets or files 6 Enter the correct links for your version control web viewer In particular replace the SERVER variable with your server URL Fill in the connection information here shown for CVS connected via the svn ssh connection method Geral options Connection type Laer Nam Server T Repository pach Server port Default 0 Co o 4 9 Generating release notes 8 There may be additional connection information required In the case of the svn ssh connection method we can choose to use a public private key pair In this case copy the private key in OpenSSH format into the provided area If the key is protected via a pass phrase enter it into the pass phrase field Y Attention You need to copy the entire private key file in OpenSSH format there It does not suffice to copy the key itself as you may be used from the authorized_keys file Configuration Authentication Paswwor Y Pub Presta Key Private key BEGIN DSA PRIVATE KEY Q Proc Type 4 ENCRYPTED DEK Info DES EDES CBC_AC23 1S20
248. graphical output 3 11 Using report templates To get a result set displayed with one of the templates on the server proceed as follows 1 Create a result set using a filter You can use any of the predefined filters e g menu Reports gt My items or any other filter from the list of custom filters menu Reports gt Manage report filters You will see the item overview Click on the Export icon in the toolbar 3 You will see a list of available report templates If you hover over the report name you will see a preview of how the report will look like 4 Click on the Execute icon in the Action column of the report template you like to use A new window will open with your set of items formatted according to the report template If you go directly to the list of templates menu Reports gt Manage report templates and hit the Execute icon the last set of items displayed in the item overview will be taken for the report So ifyou want to try out several report templates you don t have to run the query again and again 3 11 2 Built in diagrams Teamdesk offers the possibility to present the results of reports in form of pie or bar charts and Gantt diagrams The charts are always based on the result set of a item overview To generate this result set select a filter and run the overview report Items that do not pass the filter are not considered in drawing the diagrams Bar Charts There are three types of
249. gt lt property name ldapsCertificatePassword value secret gt lt bean id configuration class org apache directory server configuration MutableServerStartupConfiguration gt and lt property name workingDirectory value example com gt lt SSL properties gt lt property name enableLdaps value true gt lt property name ldapsPort value 10636 gt lt property name ldapsCertificateFile value C jdk1 6 0 bin zanzibar ks gt lt property name ldapsCertificatePassword value secret gt 263 Administering the server Container based authentication If you run several applications on the same web server you might prefer to log in once for all applications on that server rather than authenticating yourself for each application separately The web server or container becomes responsible for authentication container based authentication and you only need to sign on once single sign on When you enable Teamdesk for container based authentication Teamdesk will try to retrieve the user name and authentication token from the server If this attempt is successful and the user is known to Teamdesk the user will be directly granted access to the application If the user is unknown to Teamdesk the regular login page is displayed and Teamdesk authentication has to be used The standard configuration file web xml that comes with Teamdesk contains a commented section that configure
250. hanical parts etc This makes it easy to measure progress later on It is less wise 34 2 3 Structuring items to structure the planned items along actions like write requirements So rather than developing a true work breakdown structure you should develop more like a deliverables breakdown structure A project plan might stretch over many months or even several years As work on the project progresses the plan may have to be refined and revised The planned items basket can be structured using subspaces You can use spaces and subspaces to model Projects Sub projects and components Products and product components Product features Along the time axis you can structure planned items in phases Phases can be for example releases iterations or sprints 2 3 6 Calendar follow up The calendar serves as a reminder for personal date and time specific information like appointments you have made or a follow up on something you have delegated When you place an item into your calendar basket you can attach a date to it Teamdesk will then remind you in time that you need to do something about this item For example you could put a follow up date on an item This date would have nothing to do with a possible due date for the item Different people could have different follow up dates attached to the same item 2 3 7 Delegated Waiting If you are not the right person to do something about an item you can delegate it You need
251. he filter would work fine If you later on work on a new project that project will be missing in your filter and you would have to add the new project to your filter If on the other hand you would keep the project selection list empty even future projects would be considered Using parameters Filters are usually completely determined with all filter parameters However you can have the user enter parameters when using a filter by setting the respective field selection to SPARAMETER When applying a filter the user will then be prompted to enter the selected parameters like a specific release or state This is helpful if you have a complex filter which should be flexible in just a small part The filter could not be messed up but it could still be configured by its user to a certain extend Including linked items You can include items linked to those that match the filter based on the custom link types and a number predefined link types The predefined link types are all unclosed children of filtered items all children of filtered items MS Project predecessors 3 4 6 Defining a filter 1 Select menu Find items gt Manage filters Y ds L m2 fuports Administration Y Create tom w Ai tems Xe dite Jo Deta S Use iem Ovtstand ng Name My items Administrator Tracks Sytem I m the manager Bojars Adrian I m responsible Barbed Low I m the author Daschner Christoph Meetings Ernst Manuela Friedrich Barbe Unscheduted Fri
252. he following figure shows a rather large configuration with a load balancer five application servers two database servers and two file servers 266 7 3 Cluster operation File Gone A Lathes 07700 r 3 A he a 5 a al s DES 1 ie f Lo 0852 Load Balancor All application servers operate on a single database which is served in a redundant fashion via two database servers The attachments and full text search indices are kept on a single file server which also has a backup The backup for the file server is left to the operating system there is no support for this within Teamdesk The database management system needs to take care of the synchronisation between the original database server and the backup database server All communication between different Teamdesk application servers of a cluster is handled via the database There is no need to open any special ports for communication between the application servers or any need for using patched Java virtual machines G Note There is basically no configuration required within Teamdesk to support operation in a clustered environment Ifyou connect several Teamdesk instances to the same database Teamdesk will automatically go into cluster operation mode You do need an appropriate license key though which includes all application servers you connect to that database Many other configurations are possible For example one of the application servers can
253. he report template If you have modified an existing template and you want to replace it by your new version mark the check box overwrite existing Otherwise a new template will be created Then click on the Upload button 5 5 Roles and permissions MT le Size Kind description omi 1 33 KB XML Docus ipon gil 5 87 KB Vorschau li 4 pais gil 107 KB Vorschau ll 2 perita pig 151 KB Worschau N amp track lopojpg 4 21 KE Vorschau i TrackReportstandard jasper 3 3 KE Document i TrackReportStandard jrxml 29 5 KB Document TrackReporrsrardard properties 303 B Deecumernmr TrackHReporszSrandard de properties 3626 Document TrackReporzsranmdard _ en properties 306 B Document Traccheportstardard_fr properties 117 B Docum nt Tracie portStandard i1 properties 31238 Document TrackReportsEandarnd ri praperties 69 E Document TrackReportStandard ru propertes 1 13 KE Document The ZIP file structure is flat The JasperReports template file must be at the top level of the ZIP file there must be no folder The same goes for the other files in particular the description and properties files 5 4 5 Removing report templates Reports are based on data sources and report templates The data source determines the set of items you will get in a report The report template defines the layout and visual appearance of the item data You can delete your own templates by selecting them in the list and clicking on the Delete button in the toolbar As
254. he right side the list of users assigned to that organizational unit will appear The name of the organizational unit will show up in the edit property on the left side directly above the Add button You can now change the name in the edit property Then you click on the Edit button The name of the organizational unit will change in the selection list Deleting organizational units To delete organizational units go to the Administration Users and groups Organizational units menu In order to delete a organizational unit you have to make sure there are no users assigned to that organizational unit any more Select the organizational unit you want to delete on the left side You will see the users assigned to that organizational unit on the right This list should be empty before you delete the organizational unit otherwise you will get an error message To empty the list move users from this organizational unit to another one see below To delete the organizational unit click on the Delete button on the left The organizational unit will be permanently removed from the system Moving users to another organizational unit To move users to another organizational unit go to the Administration Users and groups Organizational units menu On the left side select the organizational unit to which the users are currently assigned The list will appear in the right part of that form In the right part select the user or users you
255. he transition from that start state to another state in your workflow diagram is taken when an item is created This is useful in case you want to assign this item initially to somebody depending on item data like keywords or tags This also works when items are created by e mail submission You can connect states by transitions To draw a transition select the transition symbol in the small toolbar click on the source node and drag the line to the target node You can change the shape of the transition by moving its handles shown as C in the figure above You can associate a transition with four entities An event triggering that transition Activities that are executed when the transition is taken Guards that can prevent the transition from taking place In the following section these entities are described in more detail Triggering event A transition is fired or initiated by a triggering event The following events are predefined in Teamdesk An explicit user action Edit item Change item state Copy item Move item to new item type or space Add child item A timeout based on the last explicit user action A timeout based on the last status change A state change action implies that source and target state are different In all other cases the source and target state may be the same For example you could perform checks on an item when it is edited Or you could automatically change an item property if the responsible was changed O
256. hemernsoecher TP Integration y Wiet Notificabon e mails X3 Loser Printer More options 6 Clickon the Save button in the toolbar Your workspace is now configured to create and manage items There are many more parameters you can set like accounting version control releases forms fields etc From here on the space administrators can completely control this workspace there is no need any more to involve a system administrator or system manager 1 2 Deleting a workspace You can delete an entire workspace including all subspaces and items This is the only way to permanently remove information from the database You must have system administrator or system manager privileges Warning You should consider setting the space state to archived rather then deleting a space This will make the workspace disappear on practically all lists and selection boxes but will keep everything in the database It is also reversible Deleting a workspace is irreversible everything is removed from the database 1 In the top toolbar select Administration gt Workspaces Alternatively click on the Workspaces bar in the left navigation area y gt ARES L Brown workspaces Find tems v ach Administration v Creste Bem v gt y amon gt uss finanden amp Verwaltung T Manage fiters E Manage server gt y Fueeungskress Report templates 45 Wegretonweum Custom forms 2 Use either the context menu in the left navigation
257. hen you switch database systems Mark the check box appropriately Check if you also want to restore attachments if any are included in the backup file The directory where you want to restore the attachments to lt is not possible and advisable to restore to the same directory as your current attachments are in you should define a new directory here Thereafter you can start the restore process Once the process is done you need to switch over to the restored database and need to configure the path to the new attachment directory To have your Teamdesk installation point to the new restored database you need to change the JDBC URL user name and password in file NEB INF Torque properties Then you need to restart your server To adapt your attachment directory go to Administration gt Manager server gt Server configuration gt tab Other 7 10 Switching database systems It is possible to switch the Teamdesk database from one database system to another one For example this may happen when you started out using the Teamdesk Windows installer that comes with the Firebird RDBMS and later on want to move to an RDBMS officially supported by your company To move from one database system to another one follow these steps 1 Create a backup of your current Teamdesk database see Data backup Create the new empty target database Follow the procedure for restoring data from a backup file see Restoring data from backup Make sure
258. here are some predefined views with filters you can use It is likely that you will create five to ten personal views that you will be using all the time If you are a project manager you can provide views to your team members so that all of you have the same view 3 4 2 Using predefined filters Teamdesk offers you a number of predefined filters to quickly obtain a specific set of items All items all items that you have permission to see regardless of their state This can be a lot and this filter will be mostly useful when you start working with the system Outstanding all items that you have permission to see and that have not been closed My items all unclosed items that you are either the author of the manager or responsible This covers all projects you have access rights in Responsible items all unclosed items you are currently responsible for This is basically your personal to do list Managers items all unclosed items you are currently the manager of You may want to look after these items once in a while to monitor work progress Author items all unclosed items you have originally authored Meetings all meetings that have open items and that you are currently involved in You are involved if you are either the creator of this meeting responsible manager or you are on the watchers list Unscheduled all items that you have permission to see and that do not have an end date Closed recently all items
259. hments 68 comments 68 enabled tabs 68 inactive projects 68 item permissions 68 watchers 68 permissions work cost 68 phase add 128 delete 129 Status 130 status type flag 130 pie chart 117 planned items 34 34 planned value change 66 estimated remaining 64 67 priority 193 private item 54 project management 16 property deprecated 165 derive 176 item 33 long text 54 overwrite 176 required 165 property access 15 7 property type 167 proxy 52 public item 54 PV planned value 65 Q query link to 81 147 R RACI 28 RACI matrix 28 RACI scheme 27 read only fields 157 reference 36 registration 44 release add 128 delete 129 299 state flag 130 207 status 130 reminder e mail 49 overdue items 49 reminder e mails configure 49 configuring 49 replacement person 52 report template 116 150 150 152 152 152 153 reporting filter 69 TOL filter 69 TOLPlus filter 69 tree filter 69 reporting period accounting 117 reports accounting 117 FAQ 116 repository folder 72 repository folder 72 required property 165 reset overwritten property 177 responsible 28 responsible issues 69 restrict item type 156 result link to 81 147 revert property overwrite 177 rich text editor 54 role add 153 assign 127 edit 153 restrict item types 156 restrict property access 157 roles 27 S screen assign 182 copy 187 create 182 delete 188 modify 185 Scrum board 87 select cascaded 189 c
260. how a milestone slips Looking at the database you can draw reports of milestone slippage in your project telling you quite clearly where you stand Risk Management Planning a project and then executing the plan is based on estimates Unless you have a magic crystal ball you are making assumptions that could or could not be true One definition for an estimate calls it a prediction that is equally likely to be above or below the actual result Estimate uncertainty occurs because an estimate is a probabilistic assessment of a future condition The many events that could lead to your estimate being too optimistic call risks There could be a risk that you won t be able to meet the schedule or the budget or the expected quality level You may not be able to get the right people at the required time A supplier you are counting on falls short to deliver on his contract You may depend on weather conditions and they turn out to not being in your favor It s up to your imagination what could happen Managing a project to a good extent means managing risks It is very helpful to always have a list with the ten most prevalent risks in your project You should have a strategy available on how to react if any of these risks materializes The Teamdesk system helps you to manage a list of risks There may be more than just ten risks Enter all you know and assign them to the different priority and severity levels This permits to draw reports with those r
261. i a Varkie chiscdid ban unrbahie LOAF atirbute for enabled daabled person Entunced daloy add a ew nk with morae Germ pecker b prove hand of instan fiers beprei ber dl date fields when eng fore Alize adder mone than one brisi item Add HS Projed export and moon oraject oontex meni 14 Edit an item by double clicking the item number Change the state to closed and save 15 Click on the filter symbol Outstanding in the left navigation area The item you just closed has disappeared from the list on the right 16 Click on the subfiltering symbol at the bottom left Select two or three items by marking the checkboxes on the left in the grid area Drag them to a new state in the left navigation area The items will changes to a new state 21 Key concepts Topics Access control Communication Structuring items Workflows Queries filters views and reports Configuration basics 23 Key concepts 2 1 Access control In Teamdesk you can control who can access which items and even what information within an item The access control system in Teamdesk organizes items in spaces Permissions are tied to roles and define what a user in this role may do with items within a space Beyond these space specific roles there are item specific roles structured according to the RACI method User groups make it easy to manage large numbers of spaces and roles Spaces Via spaces you structure groups of items a
262. ication for how close you are to project completion and can give you information on the workload to be handled Tile configuration Before you can use this tile you need to configure it Follow the general procedure to configure a tile outlined above to get to the state over time configuration page E AAA A AAA a Configuration x Ti amp e Aotus er Times label New items in interval This diagram shows the number of riewty n t Ibe p r reporting interval day wask month CRT ME opan Kimi 40 x Number of issues In interval This diagram shoes the number of Bema Reporting period From te B Daya before that have been in the selected status ar the end of each reporting interval day wane month For example if the granulanty was tecti at weekly and the status selected as dosed the diagram would show for each end of a week how many Ibers have been in status closed at this Datasourea Propect Release V iuar Days before 21 m Interval activity This diagram shows the number of items that have Granulaity daily changed into the selected status within each reporting interval For iculation Hola zE example if the granularity hers bien ses to monthiy and the status bo A moda A Simplament the diagraen would chow for aach month how many tane Siuk opened have changed to status implemented analyzed Accumulabed activity This Gagram shows the accumulated number of iiai ivems that have changed into the select
263. idered Grouped by Status This tile is the same as the one for grouping by priority except that the state values are shown You can limit the states shown by applying an appropriate state filter in the budget overview configuration Teamdesk for team members Calendar You can place a calendar onto your cockpit which will show you your items in case they have start or due dates Their is no need to configure the calendar tile Configuration Before you can use this tile you need to configure it Follow the general procedure to configure a tile outlined above to get to the calendar configuration page as described above Coben Oh Label Propet Reca Y Query Ale offenen Wonp nge bs Vies View Js You can change the description of the tile to give it a more precise meaning This is particular helpful if you use more than one instance of this tile in your project for example one grouped by state and one by responsible You can select which projects and or releases you want to consider in this tile or use any filter you have defined previously Selecting a project will include all releases of that project Last you need to select the grouping criterion You can group by Save your configuration by clicking on the Save button You will be returned to the tile configuration Click on the oack button in the toolbar area to finalize the configuration Weekly View The weekly view comprises a header row and the fields f
264. iently design your report templates locally on your client computer using the JasperSoft Studio design software and test your reports with real data When everything works you can upload your new template to the server 1 Click on the Action button and select from the menu XML 2 Download the XML file to your local computer You can use this file to design report templates with JasperSoft Studio Related Links System Fields on page 84 Exporting to an Excel file You can export the items shown in the item navigator to an Excel spread sheet file 1 Click on the Action button and select from the menu Excel 2 Download the Excel file to your local computer You can directly open this file in Excel or OpenOffice The Excel file contains all current properties of the items shown in the item navigator The Excel file does not contain any trail information due to the limitations of the format If you have selected items in the item navigator only those items will be exported 3 5 5 Agile board The agile board presents your items as cards organized in rows and columns This view is helpful when you want to detect points in your process where things are stuck Kanban or when you want to visualize items to be done and visually assign items to new responsibles states or any other category like in a Scrum based process General behavior You can select which item property should be uses as column identifier You can exclude valu
265. ific role assignment savePersonEdit java lang String personJSON Save a user to the database In case you use a self signed certificate or a certificate from a Certificate Authority not known by your system you have to install the certificate identifying your server in your local computers Java Teamdesk keystore You need to proceed as follows 1 Obtain the public certificate from your Teamdesk server You can use your browser and go to the login page using the https protocol In most browsers you can download the certificate by right clicking on the little trust symbol in the URL line looking for the certificcate details and then exporting the certificate to your local file system 2 Import the certificate into your local Java keystore using the keytool utility that comes with any Java installation keytool keystore your home dir gt keystore lt your domain com gt ks import file theServersCertificate pem alias Keyl You will be asked for a password to protect the keystore if this is the first entry When you use the TC command line client you can activate the key as follows import com trackplus System setProperty javax net ssl trustStore your home dir keystore your domain com ks System setProperty javax net ssl trustStorePassword 251 Managing the system yourReystorePasswd TO logudni suserst spasseword httpsi Jyoutserver tld track 5 IC help In case you can
266. ify planned items Planned items for example can be part of a project a product structure or a Scrum product backlog For non actionable items you have three baskets where you can place them Trash you just don t consider this item anymore at all Incubator Here you place items that do not require any action at this time or in the near future but might have to be considered later These items serve as crystallization points for future work Example for items in this basket are ideas feature requests improvements etc Reference This basket contains material you might need someday for example requirements standards etc For actionable items you have three baskets where you can place them Next actions This is where you place items that you want to work on in the near future There is no real planning or deadline for next actions If there are deadlines or dates that must be considered the items should be placed into the Calendar basket Next actions can be for example calls support requests features to work on etc Calendar This is where you place all actions that have a strict relation to this date or time e g a deadline or a meeting time or similar The calendar contains three types of items appointments day specific actions 32 2 3 Structuring items day specific information what you want to know at a specific day Delegated waiting This basket contains actions you have delegated to somebody else Placing a
267. igation area Codptt Boro vano pao Find Ena gt Reports Jo WWerkapac s i Autpmail anignements al Aude triggers Y Adoma conil 2 Click on Automail condition in the next navigation column o al A Trade System Adminigrator Hep Log off o EO s Lo d Cockpit Brown works find Era c Reports Adminiyirgtion gt Crie Ena gt tra Ju My settings EU Add folder E Add aora condition PEA Dee Jo Wip y Automall aignments a i Worksnane Nara Type HE Where A groups EE CET Support Default Fiter Automa condition WE Faunsen A Vieraat AM 2 EE IT rieipaesk T Manage filters EE Leader cecie so Riport terrain EZ Marten viertreh Vs User roles EZ Thermenspeicher WZ TP imegrabon 1 Doll ceni A iri T KE X3 Laser Printer 2 Public A T beaut Fir 3 Select the folder where you want to create or modify a condition in For example click on Workspaces IT Helpdesk to create or modify a condition specifically for that workspace To add a condition click on the Add button in the toolbar To edit a condition select it in the right grid area and then use either the context menu or the toolbar button labeled Edit Restriction You can only modify conditions that you own i e you have created Only the system manager or system administrator can edit and delete filters he does not own 4 Entera name for the condition and click on the Add button Define your filter Customizing Teamdesk The sele
268. ill be able to go from an item directly to associated change sets or files 6 Enter the correct links for your version control web viewer In particular replace the SERVER variable with your server URL Fill in the connection information here shown for SVN connected via the svn ssh connection method Connection type Ol nap https dE antah Uer mame jetaden Ser name arapi OT Reperitory path fvarjeem traci Server port E Default Contos 8 There may be additional connection information required In the case of the svn ssh connection method we can choose to use a public private key pair In this case copy the private key in OpenSSH format into the provided area If the key is protected via a pass phrase enter it into the pass phrase field A Attention You need to copy the entire private key file in OpenSSH format there It does not suffice to copy the key itself as you may be used from the authorized_keys file Teamdesk for space administrators BPaitfwentication Anoryenoua O Ped UR Pub Privada Kies Priaibe uy BEGIN GGA PRIVATE KEY Proc Tyne 4 ENCRYPTED DEK nfa DES EDE3 CRC ACITISQOREF2 1 54989 KB JEDER A SHS TN on essc uA EP Ey WDR S y eR Aib iEn C weer PCA CML id mw 2D u ME PSIMFheCILOT pH na il MM A e oR Sd penrhS A Vp ikp OSCQDRGOBR _ teal dy abi MISIERIFADR T eH Michela Iy TERURE IO BMY TB IT GWC SVATLEGQDVAGSHYTU AHR cal primuni why CMO ala JARA Tt QuhiVThjuhnM E H
269. ill not see an Edit action symbol or Create Item menu entry if you do not have proper permissions 1 From the item detail page bottom part click on tab Attachments or follow the procedure to create a new item and also click on tab Attachments in the bottom part of the screen 2 Click on the Add button Alternatively you can drag and drop the file to the toolbar area right of the toolbar buttons In this case you can skip the following steps 3 Anew screen appears Enter the path name to your attachment 4 Addatitle or brief description for the attachment 5 Click on Add to add this file as an attachment to this item After this you will be returned to the main screen The attachment has now been added to the item If full text search is enabled and the attachment contains text in a format recognized by Teamdesk that text is included in the index People that are on the watch list of this item will be sent an e mail of this change if notifications are configured accordingly 3 3 8 Adding a screen shot You can directly paste screen shots into Teamdesk and save them as attachments without using your local disc This section describes how to add screen shots as attachments to items You must have retrieved the item to which you want to add screen shots to This can be done by entering the item number in the search field or by selecting the item from the item overview or by creating a new item You must have been gran
270. illed with the date of the same day next week Q dista h 5ra a seeded attribute configurations gt emva ais acil evi I Bulld Ciomas 17 Description E Enddate ane Gaul al cat Typ at Last ioi ed Date pm Manager im Priority as Project D Fahne tectum int ArnEe ap anfiqurntian Mame EndDlabe Appear in fier E Deprecated Description Defauk date Cree Gate plus X emg 4 Clickon the Save button in the toolbar area On all forms you will see the new label unless you have overwritten it at a lower level or you have localized it explicitly You have renamed a system property It will appear on all inout forms with the new label and tool tip 5 10 Item properties Y Attention When you change the tool tip or label you may not see the change reflected at the user interface This happens when you have explicitly localized the label with the locale editor The localization overwrites the changes you make here Deleting custom properties This section describes how to permanently delete a custom property You must be logged in as system manager or system administrator 1 In the top toolbar select Administration gt Customize gt ltem properties Alternatively click on the Customize Item properties bar in the left navigation area py Ben type specific config door d ES Workspace bype soecific seribute cord Ads d EZ Workspace specific aitribube conf z az LH a
271. in bert seed submisiinnd 1665 7 2 09 2 22 PM adib fs 513 Add attachment ican te repart avervien 472 67209 1 21 PM adib Fix 544 Bulk edit rrumber of issues gives False value i z amp BO 7 55 EH adib Enid ALE 1024 Erie 2 20 Re fried Improwed in source documentation Fertains to issues 162 422 and 500 3 9 Browsing projects Two Dimensional Project Statistics This tile permits you to create a matrix of numbers of items based on two arbitrary item properties For example you can show which user has how many items in which state assigned to him as responsible You can limit the items to consider using any predefined filter Tile configuration Before you can configure this tile you need to define a filter to define the items to consider for this statistics Then you need to configure the tile Follow the general procedure to configure a tile outlined above to get to the two dimensional project statistics configuration page Configuration x Tiruaratson tor Two denena u amp tatiti Tije beoDernensionalStatistes giel Alle Berpel erdach Diesen Monat Fal Neue diese Woche Heus in dieten Manat Manager Parent Ho Picar y Feaject Relesce noticed Respansibl Sawer Sibatui sed Sube RHE Target release Ime su Select a filter that defines the item set to consider for the statistics Define the properties used for the horizontal and vertical fields If you have custom list fields defined in your system they will appea
272. in o People and the LDAP login property of the form uid If searching in LDAP can be done with anonymous bind keep the LDAP bind DN field and LDAP bind password field empty Otherwise provide the distinguished name DN used for searching and the password for the DN LDAP authentication is disabled by default When LDAP authentication is enabled for your Teamdesk installation every user can choose to use it or not by setting the appropriate switch in his personal profile If you set the option Force central password users will not be able to choose a specific Teamdesk password but must rather use their central Windows Unix password 260 7 2 Server configuration aon LDAP n Karla Constructa que people c ri el ae lui A CD Nata Conthret Ea nue propia eem Erase k pluri de com E Dh ire Karla Constructa eus people ie rack plus de cns Attibulbesc hreshursg Wed 2 elec filas inet Ong Person uitrikrurell E p ohjectclas s e rganizati nalPerszoo stroktyrell a ahjeecrrirss persa strakrirelil TIA Roos DSE E Mice cbfecrclass top abstrakt li de example de com n Karla Constructa T EE kpluri de com 271 5 Convict b A nusgreugs description Head of construction T A ou speople 15 gn Karla kir 7 mail karl cor becik plus com b enalarbara Coder ee j tne Chi Senam uie r patiwend SHA gebanshbes Paikea tne Dan Boia neHenry Synem nejoe Ceckron ma gt d T T Li E k E nekKarla Conti
273. ing Some company intranet SMTP servers may have been configured to be used without authentication In case you authenticate with a user password combination on your SMTP server you enter the user name and your password here Click the Clear button to clear the password Not entering a password will take the old one Caution Some SMTP servers do not like it if the From address does not match the SMTP user name In this case you are forced to check box Use Teamdesk From address Mail encoding Teamdesk can send e mails in a variety of encodings Here you set the encoding such that it matches your users preferred encoding In the meantime many clients support unicode UTF encoding This encoding works with any language The setting here is typically the same as in your e mail clients setting For Western languages ISO 8859 1 usually works fine a More options Send from mode fend emails from user aorpunis g V Send d mais from sien account Mall encoding UTFE SMTP Port 25 El Test configurauon by sending tesz e mail 256 7 2 Server configuration SMTP server port Usually it is wise to leave the standard port set 25 since most SMTP server use this port If your SMTP server is located outside your companies intranet the firewall has to be open to permit traffic on the port configured here In case you are using an SSL or TLS encrypted connection the default port is 465 Send mail from system or user account
274. ing custom forms This section describes how to delete a custom form You must be logged in as system manager or system administrator Restriction You can only delete forms that are not being used anymore If a form is still being used you will not see a delete icon 1 In the top toolbar selectAdministration Customize Forms t Go oc aana mask assignmencs 7 Workspaces TERN HB Uses amp groups F Rem type spec form assignmer ai O O m ACA Customize Y Manage filters T ua Watapece PEA Actions b Report templates w Report templates User roles Cost centers amp accounts M Automas Se Link types EA Them attributes 7 Lts Uy System date WE Workspace types PO vato BH Locate editor 2 Anew screen appears Click on the Delete icon in the Action column on the left for the form you want to delete 188 5 12 Custom selection lists Action Ea 7 d The form has been deleted from the system 5 12 Custom selection lists Some item properties require a selection of predefined values For example you may have a list of customers or you want to support a number of operating systems Teamdeskpermits you to define your own selection lists which can then be used for custom or system properties 5 12 1 Custom lists overview You can define selection lists in Teamdesk which you then can use in item selection properties You can assign custom lists to item properties either globally workspace type
275. ing self registration It is possible to permit users to register themselves This can decrease the burden on the system administrator Registration is always limited to certain e mail domain patterns as configured under Allowed e mail pattern in the incoming e mail configuration section Even if users register themselves the system administrator is the only one that can assign employee numbers and departments to accounts Project administrators have to grant users access to their projects otherwise users will not be able to access any project data Automatic guest login When turned on access to any system URL automatically logs the guest user into the system This is convenient if you want to make queries publicly accessible without requiring users to have an account Workspace specific item number For each item Teamdesk generates a unique and global identification number like 4789 or 6789 If you turn on the project specific item numbering Teamdesk will generate instead item numbers composed of a project specific prefix and a project specific integer like TRA 1 TRA 2 and so on Summary items behavior This activates automated computation of start date end date and planned value for summary items from their child items values If not set parent or summary items can have dates and planned values independent of their children which in most cases is probably not what you want Activate top down support This enables support
276. inistrator system administrator or system manager 1 In the top toolbar select Administration Workspaces Alternatively click on the Workspaces bar in the left navigation area Cockpit Boase workspaces Find tems v Reports Administration w Create Bem v M shh Ay Add Workspace lA Add subspa x Copy A Vine rn paien Jam ty hssajo Roles TU E Retease Customize CBT Support Fam A 7 finaren amp Verwaltung P Actions n Manage server gt 4 fu vere A Report templates Jh btoysjonsoum Custom forms 2 Select a workspace and click on the Copy button in the toolbar Li Mwa E Add V ut ut i da cd Wertazacos cd Gere Basic settings Delaultaettings E mail s tting MI le deci y Basie praperti ub irie Bukios Prepect Dapy workspace x dj Dectrorses came You ane about to copy a workspace Select the associated entities you want bn induce D leue Tracking mampi E Copy X3 Electronics y g w tempe tro Y bir k a i 20 aere KI Mechanical Parti Y fiya geg Copy workspace soscific custam lists DO pa E L Project apaci aaxignenents entities 3 Select the configuration entities you would like to copy and click on the Copy button You have now created a new workspace based on the configuration settings of an existing workspace The two workspaces are not related to each other in any way Teamdesk for space administrators 4 1 4 Workspace templates You can create a workspace including item
277. ire history is preserved It is possible to activate them again any time Deactivated users are shown in the user list grayed out or with an asterisk behind their name 230 6 2 Managing regular users Deactivated users cannot access the system anymore In case they try they get an error message telling them to contact the system administrator Deactivated users do not count towards the number of user licenses included in the license key Assigning user levels As a system administrator or system manager you can assign user to levels The user level determines which functionality is available to that user You can define as many user levels as you like For each user level you can configure what user interface elements will be visible see Customizing the User Interface There are some fixed predefined levels which are treated differently by the system User level Client user Full user System administrator System manager Simple Intermediate Advanced 231 Description Client users are managed in a different section than regular users They have a simplified menu with reduced functionality for example they cannot create their own filters and see only their own entries in the item history Typically you would mark users with a client user license if they use the system only occasionally for example in a help desk environment Full users can use the full system functionality excluding the administr
278. is You can now select the sheet inside the Excel file from which you want to import items Teamdesk will try to map all columns in your Excel sheet to its own fields You can control this mapping process manually Teamdesk will memorize your last mapping definitions and reuse them in all subsequent imports so that after your first import all following imports typically require just uploading the file In the next step you define how Teamdesk should handle required values that it cannot find in your Excel spread sheet There are two options either the row is rejected or a default value is being inserted by Teamdesk If there are problems with the spread sheet Teamdesk will give you exact hints on the row and data it has problems with You can then correct the spread sheet and upload the file again If everything goes well Teamdesk creates one item for each row in your spread sheet You can only import system and custom fields It is not possible to import consulted informed information costs or budgets You don t have to enter a project in your spread sheet You can select a project during the import process for all items The order of the columns in your spread sheet is of no importance You should just keep it the same in all subsequent imports to minimize your configuration effort Column Mapping The column headers should be mapped to the Teamdesk fields If a column header is not mapped then the values from that column will not be i
279. is feature b In o Y y iL Se Cockpit Drome workspaces find erm v Reports Administration Create tem Jy My settings Sve Workspaces ERA here you can configure y ar Y sasn Roles browser to directly view flies or file sets that E Rein CBT Support ues Finanzen amp Verwaltung T Repository browser p Btegration space Report templates Repository browser IT Helpdesk Custom forms Link for change set Leader dede M Los for fe added Workflows Marketing amp Vertrieb 2 Link for files modified wp Testreum Link for files replaced Themenspeicher Veron control k Lea fcr fies aeeted VTP integration Jo WiTex General options 4 X3 Laser Printer Connection type User name Server name Repository path Server port Attention The version control node will only be available of the space type for this space supports A Tack Symon A minigzrao Help Logoff track a connection to a version contro system like GA or Subversion Furthermore you can configure a repository web vith a specific Rem in this application VINE x 0 hitp SERVER cgi bin viewvc cgi SVN INSTANCE revision s rev view rev hitp SERVER cgi bin viewwc cgi SVN INSTANCE path revision rev iview marky hitp SERVER cgi bin viewwc cgi SVN INSTANCES path revision s rev J view maria http SERVER coi bin viewve cgi SVN INSTANCES patt revision rev amp view mark hizp SERVER cgi bin viewve c
280. is not mapped then the values from that column will not be imported When you use the import facility the first time Teamdesk tries a best match of the column headers to its own fields This match is based on 1 localized field configuration localized field labels 2 notlocalized field configuration original field labels 3 field names You can now go ahead and change the mapping manually in case Teamdesk didn t find the right solution for your spread sheet The import wizard shows the field labels as defined in the Teamdesk global scope not the ones specific for item type project type or project since a sheet may contain items from more than one project and or item type Thus you need to know the global field configuration label for each field even though that label can be different in your own project or for your own item types Once the NEXT button is clicked the mapping is saved on the disk in a user specific directory and will be used as the default mapping for your next import Composite Field Handling Composite fields are contained in a single column The different sections of a composite fields have to separated by a character Multiple Value Field Handling For multiple value fields all values are contained in the same column The different values must be separated by comma Data Validation and Import Each row of data in the spread sheet will be validated on several levels before an item is created from
281. is searched for exactly this number You can use localized value terms coming from selection fields like state or priority Fields in TOL TOL supports fielded data When performing a search you can either specify an property or use the default property The default property encompasses basically all textual fields of Teamdesk You can search any property by typing the property name followed by a colon and then the term you are looking for As an example let s assume you want to find the item entitled The Right Way which contains the text don t go this way you can enter Synopsis The Right Way AND Description go or Synopsis The Right Way AND go Since by default all text fields are searched in the second example items having go in another text property than Description would qualify as well You can enter either the system internal property name Synopsis or the localized property name as you see it in the user interface Title For a complete list of system fields have a look at the section on System Fields aly Caution The property is only valid for the term that it directly precedes so the query Synopsis Do it right will only find Do in the title property It will find it and right in the default property in this case the text property Related Links System Fields on page 84 Term Modifiers TOL supports modifying query terms to provide a wide range of searching options Wildcard Searches
282. isks that are most likely to occur or that have the greatest impact Use the priority to describe the probability of occurrence and the severity to describe the possible impact The most critical risks are those that have the highest probability of occurrence and the largest impact There are only two states for a risk it is either opened or closed Status closed means the probability of this risk occurring in the future is zero Reasons to close a risk could be that there is no future for your project because it has been closed or that the risk already occurred or that you absolutely can rule out that the risk could ever come up again Itern lists In the software business this is also called the bug list Unlike milestones and action items items are usually not planned but they will occur For large projects and particularly in software projects from the beginning to the end there will be many items From our experience for an embedded system with about 100 000 non commented lines of code you may have to handle about 2500 items before you can ship your system Since it is close to impossible to control such an amount of items without any tool support bug tracking systems have been on the market for quite some time The Teamdesk system is well suited to act as an item or bug tracker Compared to other systems it supports well large organizations with many projects due to its technology and access control features Except fo
283. it 1 There is a validation that all required fields are present This means that they are either defined in the spread sheet and have been associated with the required field in Teamdesk or you have selected that default values should be used in case there are no values in the spread sheet 2 Eachcell value is read and verified whether it contains a valid value The specific handling depends on the type of the cell a Label text fields Selection list entries are specified by their label For persons the label pattern is last name first name It will be verified whether an entry with that label exists If it does exist it will be checked if it is valid or not For example for the state it is checked that it can be the initial one or for the manager it is checked that this person actually has manager rights in that project and so on b Boolean check box fields the Excel cells should be either of boolean type or the text value should be Y or N true or false C Nurmeric fields either the Excel cells should be of number type or the number format should correspond to the user s locale or should be in ISO format Other values are taken as text as they appear in the cell d Date fields the Excel cells should be either of date type or the date format should correspond to the user s locale or the date should be in ISO format YYYY MM DD 56 3 3 Working with items 3 Rows are checked for duplicates before being added The most rob
284. iv einfach So schrieb Kant 1783 Plane machen ist menrmaien ene uppige nranierische Gesteshesch amp ftieung dadurch man sch ein Ansehen van sch pfenschem Genie gibt indem man foden was man selbst nicht jaisten tadak was man doch nicht Desser machen Kann und vorschl gr wovon man seer nicht weil wo es Zu fon at Die Schwierigkniten beginnen erst wenn der Plan umgesetzt werden sol Die Vorentwurfsplanung der Hamburger Elbphilharmonie sch tzte die Baukosten im Juli 2005 auf 188 Mio Euro Nach der Ausschreibung und dom Bieterwettbewerb lag das g nstigste Angebot bei 241 Mio Euro Im Apri 2007 wurde mit dem Bau begonnen Etwas ber ein Jahr sp ter stiegen die veranschiagten Baukosten auf ca 500 Mio Euro Figure 8 7 Embedding an existing item Creating and embedding an item You can mark some text in a document section create a new item from it and immediately embed it into your document section 284 8 5 Exporting documents amp Dg B IU A w RE RR Xo Normal sme A m Bum Pianon stellan wir una vor war wir tun k nnben siehe Deeds See 2234 9 Wird eine Aktion nach der ncieren n und pr fen oo uns dits Akbonsstbe dem geaw nschten Profektod nite bringt Das Planen selbst ist relativ einfach So schrieb Kant 1783 Fane cul al TABATA dnd nos croient Cc laca echa ocn dadrch man dcn dm Anahen von SOOT Oe idt adem mi Xr wars mn ais not jest NE was rrvan oon nuce Paese m ch n dina oed eg wercr
285. ivi nte tis E rtm n E IER 291 Oo DOCUIMERE VETSIOMING PP 292 List of Figures UA E os o AA TTE 16 Foue T Teandesk usage OVEN OW at 17 AS A SS 24 EAS sao le 1 0 ET TL TOO Ga lene ala GiIGRO IER uet 25 Ligue oc pape o IS eene iti PP AE cud atium ut ae ne ere nee ene nane C ES EON 26 Figure 2 4 The permission structure of TCAMCESK cssssssccccesssssseesssssssssscsssssssseesssssssssussssssssssessssssssssseseesssssusssssssssassassssssssscseseessssuesussssanee 27 ass II EA 28 Figure 2 6 Automall triggers and aUtOMAll condo vicio iia 29 Figure 2 7 Connecting With an ETS rieles 30 AOS 2 PEE mU 31 Foue UCI minos Gone WOON RE T A 22 Figure 2 10 Main tags and PFOPEITISS ccssssssssssssesssscccescccccccssssssssesesnnssssssssnsosesssssonsssssececccssssssssesensssssssssssessssssssssssseccescessssssssenenssssssssssnsssesseessesse 23 FU i a o UML VPI UO fc m A 37 Foue 2 12 kem navigator SU UU CC 38 Figure 2 13 ltem filtering StPUCTULE cccccscsstssssssscscsssssssssescscsssssssssssssssnssssssssssssscsesssssssssssssssassssssssssssscsesssscsssssuussssisenssssssscscsessscssssssnessssssasannsessesee 39 Pie J eds o ss nn ETT m 39 Fe io INA i 51 E Mc 40 Figure 3 1 The item detail PAGE cccsssssssanssssnssssssssssssesesssssesecessssssssseasssssssssssssssssssooesssssecesesessssssssssssssasessssusssesssssssssseceesessseccssssssssesenssssssssssessesssee 23 Figure 32 MOVING POE front the COME Me Us sa
286. keep this item hidden from anybody else This will mark your new item as private it will really only be visible to yourself You can change this to a public item any time later on if you wish Click the Next button 4 The new item screen appears This screen may have been configured specifically for this project and item type so it may look different than shown here Some properties are mandatory they will always be there Enter a title or short summary of your item in the title field 6 Enter a full description of your item in the description field You may use rich text editing elements here like lists bold underline italic URLs etc 7 Enter any other information that you know of and that is required Since screens can be item type dependent you may see different properties and tabs in different projects and for different item types 8 When you are done entering the data hit the Save icon at the top A new item has been created and stored in the database An item number was assigned to this item Depending on the notification settings concerned parties like the manager and responsible of the item have been informed by e mail that a new item was assigned to them There will be no e mail notification to anybody if you have marked the item as private 3 3 5 Importing items from Excel You can import items from Excel sheets If Teamdesk detects that items already exist in its database these items are modified rath
287. ker 173 174 workspace picker 174 item property type 167 item select 171 item state change 60 modify 60 item type restrict access 156 iteration add 128 delete 129 J Jenkins integration 274 274 K Kanban board 87 keystore 273 L language preferred 51 LDAP activate 46 LDAP connection 273 link permanent 81 147 version control 64 link item 63 link types finish finish FF 92 finish start FS 92 start finish SF 92 start start SS 92 linking items 163 list custom 189 selection 189 lists workspace specific 131 locale preferred 51 localhost 265 long text property 54 298 M manage report template 116 150 150 152 152 152 153 manage item types 195 manager issues my issues 69 mass operation 91 92 meeting agenda 16 protocol 16 mile stone tracking 16 16 modify budget 66 custom form 185 dates 60 form 185 item state 60 item workspace 59 planned value 66 move item 58 move item 59 MS Word from Wiki 285 285 multiple select 189 N navigator left are modes 86 new user 44 next actions 34 34 notification trigger 96 warning level 47 notification level 47 O Observer list 61 OpenDoPE 285 OpenOffice CSV character 46 48 option 189 Outlook iCalendar 99 overdue items reminder 49 overview 16 overwrite 176 p panels 100 parameter filter 73 parent item 61 password change 45 new 52 PDF from Wiki 285 287 permanent link 81 147 permission attac
288. l list 7 Name the new entry or edit the name of an existing entry and optionally give it some style information The styles can be used to control item appearance in the item navigator Then click on the Save button Add custom entry x Mame EMEA Default dackgrpumd color Color Font wagi Font shy x E 4 Mad decoracion You can assign an icon 16 x 16 px GIF or PNG format to each entry You can furthermore assign a CSS style to each entry which will be used to format items in the item navigator For example you could use various shades of red as background color to illustrate the urgency of an item You can drag entries in the list on the right to another position The entries will be offered at the user interface in the same order as shown in the grid here 8 Fora simple list you can just add entries underneath the top list node To create a cascaded list select a second list level node and repeat the procedure from 5 hi dd e het a cota es Name ion icon fir Style i sums EMEA Test tex 8 Priority Americas Test beni OF Graty You have now created or modified a workspace specific list 4 5 Assigning accounts You can plan and monitor work and expenses via accounts that you assign to workspaces Using accounts you can differentiate between different types of work and expenses like development administration customer requests and so on I You must have enabled accounting on the General page of the
289. late a workspace to an item other than the workspace this item is a part of Atributo configuradion Nome Workspace Workspace picker Geman conlsguration 5 10 3 Managing custom properties This section describes how to add overwrite modify and delete custom properties Adding a custom property This section describes how to add a custom property to your installation You must be logged in as system manager or system administrator Note If you want to add an property of type list or cascaded list you must have created that list before you start the procedure described below see Managing lists for custom properties 1 In the top toolbar select Administration gt Customize gt ltem properties Alternatively click on the Customize Item properties bar in the left navigation area o 7 Y mo ae L Cockpk Browse woriapaons find kom Reports Administration w Create item w o My settings CETATE oe y Mysettings ro Wiman 2 Q standard atribuit configuration Workspaces wifiguration E a Syitem attribubes HA Users groups F Name mE A Custom attribubes 2 Customize HF om a s Cuttomae 171 Anzahl A T Xo Actions t Report templates T Heap liters m MCa i E Manage server Wy Usar roles Report templates fuerat dp the rolas is Onlara Cost centers amp souris T Paricants exis d 1 pn Hem type specific s EE Workspace type soecfic atribulte cona o Umen EZ Workspace specific attribube conf LE
290. laves running on nix machines over SSH messages they are seeing in the current page Windows Slaves Plugin Y Allows you to connect to Windows 10 machines and start slave agents on them On the Manage Jenkins page select Configure System SSHD Port OF ned Random Disable e Tracke Tracke instances URL e wer M k Record Scm changes M e Update Track Issues Y User name admin Password m Add There is a section labeled Teamdesk Here you can enter the URL for your Teamdesk server and a user name and password which is being used to add comments to Teamdesk items affected by a Jenkins build You should leave the item prefix with t since this is the value being used by the Teamdesk Subversion integration In Jenkins you can set up a number of Teamdesk connectors for example to different Teamdesk servers or with different user names Step 4 Configure the Jenkins Job In the last step you will have to instruct Jenkins which Teamdesk connection to use for a specific job Click on the link for that job from the Jenkins main page 2 6 7 14 Configuring Teamdesk with Jenkins Sy New Hem Hallo welcome lo tha Treckplus CI sarvar j People t Actual Work Ae Sube gt Build History 5 W Name Last Success Last Fallure Last Duration O Project Fietationship 9 mom 3 days 17 he i91 N A a0 min 3 n m y me 2 yr 5 mo 411 N A 3mn 3se E Manage Jenkins Res 2
291. less scuto etu ud e NM HMM RH E RATE 245 sE ooo or aN OM LMS Rm 245 002 EXPORIMA space pe CONOS aaa aeaeask 246 income 247 69 Usmo tne a A A 247 e as WIE SELVBI nes EITHER e ROUCO To A 253 7 1 Concepts and tasks for system administrators eese tette tette tette tette 254 72 SB CORR O aee eheu eta ea MINE Fe res decd A T 254 G2 SEM MO Mato a cs MEE 254 72 2 OUIBOIng E MAlLCOAMECHO Arrancan aaa 239 F273 VAC OPI e mail COMM SC COM esas UT m 257 72A F l text search COMMOUT ATION aeien a a annA 259 OPEN RI o De U Uo a A AN A E A 260 7 25 NV E e WS TS aa 264 ET EE 0 59 CAM E A m TT 266 FEO MVNO WON p Ge T ism 268 7a IOS SOV and managing server SUO airada dr etre von 268 7 Broadcasung e mails to Teana es K USE riada e A A RO 270 7 Configuring diagnostic MESAS in dd 270 ota 270 ios elo r Mis gabe Uc MENT C 271 IO OWE T Crea Se SISSI arar 2 2 AAN NE CA TE 275 7 12 Using SSL and TLS encryption on e mail and LDAP CONNECTIONS ccsccssccccccccssssssseessnssssssssssssessssosssssssscceeccessseee 2 3 TASAS eee 978 2 99 NOR en 2 3 Z HEConourme Tedrmdesk WEN JETS ratas tate 2 4 7 15 ontlgurngAbache O ai 278 A A 281 ALO y POP 282 iio HR 283 6 2 Creating document SECTIONS rincon RARA 284 A a a CR O OO E A A E A A A AAA A 284 SHO EE a E E NEC 285 EAEE E E mm 285 BS Creating LAMAS AE templates A 287 2 5 Makro Ene Ve Sato WEeDSIEeu cette m am cett unam d
292. list gt 1008 lt entityAttribute gt lt TrackEntity gt lt trackEntity entityld 1024 type TOptionBean gt lt entityAttribute name label gt Entry BN slg lt entityAttribute gt lt entityAttribute name list gt 1008 lt entityAttribute gt lt trackEntity gt lt subEntityRelation gt lt entityExchange gt lt ns2 trackplusExchange gt Import rules A list is considered to already exist in the database when all of the following properties match The name of the list The repository type The list type The project if any 204 5 12 Custom selection lists The parent list identifier if any An option is to be considered to already exist when all of the following properties match The label The list it belongs to The parent option in case of cascaded lists If you change the lists name a new list will be created when you import it When you change the label of an option and keep the list name the same a new option will be added to the list If you mark the option Clear children any child of the list that is not in the XML file is removed from the original list during the import process IF you mark the option Overwrite existing properties not used for identification will be overwritten during the import process Thus you can modify descriptions symbols and CSS but you cannot change the name or label of a list or option Importing custom lists You can import custom lists from an XML file that you might have g
293. lpicada alte 59 Figure 3 3 Linking source code to items in version control SYSTEMMNS ccscsssssssssssssssesesesssssesccessssssssesssssesessssssssssenssessssssssesceesesseessssssee 64 gelo ioc OU M 72 ge cU eo Me one nC on O o A 86 ii A dau A econ Ee E E 102 Figure 3 7 Project summary COMPIGUIATION ccsssssssesssssssesssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssassssssssssssssecssssassssssssssnsssssssssssssssessscsssasnssssnanasssssssssssee 103 UP OO Sr ee eo ere ree 104 PICU O Status Over tme ule COMO LUE OOM eii ara ct bet ii ida ada 104 Figure 3 10 Various state over TIME MAA celica 105 E USAN oe o 7 Iin n NOI AR NET EET A A 105 Fioure 5 12 Budget OVETVIEW TIE COMMUTATION iis essent coepisset tecnici tecti denis Coin tico 106 ICUS Tc BUI O VE DIGNI edad tet totali eet eos 107 gg Neri PN sd e iS PERO E 116 FUCHS 9S5 Ac SOUND UI cies 118 EQU SOCIA TES es lee Cle E 216 ROUS o oo o a E e ER 216 Hogue 5 Importing localized texts irom a TesourcE eS a pae 217 POE VC CESS ING US VV TM ES no EEES 282 e O AA TE ATE E CM IC S itt 282 A M cc qe OR MI RE OUR 283 Figure 8 4 Switching between inline and full edit MOE cccccsssueeesssssssssssscssssssssscssesssssssussssssssssssssssssssssssesssssssssssessssensessssssssssee 283 ROU eati MG Meg m I Nero A O 283 IQUE 86 Crea ICO arcade ciel tos e cl 284 HOUSES CIC ERE A a AAA AAA 284 ICC ono eri ana encara 285 AUS SEAN A A
294. lt value gt lt entry gt job data map job You enable all automatic synchronization by setting key enabled to true You may have to modify the mapping of LDAP properties to Teamdeskproperties The Teamdesk properties are the keys and must not be modified The LDAP properties are the values and you may have to change them to the values you use in your directory Table 7 1 LDAP synchronizer parameterss Property in quartz jobs xml enabled enabledUserSync enabledGroupSync baseDnGroup Description True if users and groups shall be regularly synchronized with your LDAP directory lf False properties enabledUserSync and enabledGroupSync have no effect True if users shall be regularly synchronized with your LDAP directory True if groups and the users assigned to them shall be regularly synchronized with your LDAP directory TheLDAP base DN under which your groups are defined Search is based on the member property of the groups 262 7 2 Server configuration Property in quartz jobs xml Description deactivateUnknown True if users not found during the synchronization process shall be deactivated The admin and guest users are exempted IdapFilter The LDAP filter expression for user synchronization Can be any valid LDAP filter term like amp objectClass inetOrgPerson ou Trackplus IdapFilterGroups The LDAP filter expression for group synchronization Can be any valid LDAP filter
295. lues or you are moving items to a different workspace Related Links Item properties on page 33 To support effective teamwork items need to have a number of tags and other properties Tags and other properties help you categorizing and structuring your set of items Managing workflows on page 213 You can define workflows that specify who can perform state transitions on items and what happens together with such state transitions You can associate scripts with workflow state transitions that perform arbitrary actions and checks 3 3 2 Item description and comment fields Teamdesk provides large text fields for descriptions and comments These description fields can be formatted using regular HTML tags The fields always open with a rich text editor which gives you instant feedback on how your descriptive text will look Not all HTML tags will be transferred into the report engine only the basic ones like bold italic underline lists font size and color Thus if you require nice looking PDF reports you may have to limit the rich text formatting to these features Titi Linking ima ene B I U A El BE da E i o Faal Se 7 zm ml ie Source Currently we have a number of ways to link ibeems 1 Chronological relations 1 Brat same time R L end same time EE start with end EA 3 3 3 Creating an item overview Creating an item is a two step process In the first step you have to select the project this item pertains
296. ly useful However this depends on the language of the text being indexed Here you can select the analyzer that suits best your requirements The standard analyzer is not as efficient as a language specific analyzer but it should work in all cases If you have texts and attachments in different languages you may be best of with the standard analyzer or the analyzer of the language most texts are set in 7 2 5 LDAP and SSO configuration If you want to use always the same password on your Teamdesk account as on your other computers you can connect Teamdesk to a directory server LDAP server Active Directory If you have several applications all running on the same server you can provide a single login to that server and have Teamdesk use the authentication of that login process LDAP configuration Teamdesk can be configured to use a directory server based on LDAP to authenticate users during login This simplifies the handling of login names and passwords for Teamdesk users Licenses utgang e mail Incoming emal Puli bisi etan LOAP A SSO Other Container based auth a LDAP acre Jy e LDAP server URL ga LDAP login attributa rame e LDAP hind DN o LDAP bind paren Forte central pamend i3 Login name for best Paeswend for best af Test LDAP configuration To allow users to use LDAP authentication you have to activate the LDAP settings in the site configuration page The LDAP server URL is of the form ldap ldapserver ou Ma
297. ma Inc Jawa VM rame Jawa Hot5pot TM Server VM On the top right you find information on the memory configuration and consumption of your Teamdesk installation and the Java version being used The bottom right area permits to temporarily disable access to the Teamdesk system for all users but the system administrator If the system is disabled you can provide an explanatory message on the login screen The application access lock is automatically removed when restarting the Teamdesk application on the server or when rebooting the server Otherwise the system administrator can remove the access lock System internation Opening systeme Linux 2 6 18 O205585091 2 0 86 User name bomcat Current user dredan var itytaments System e Deutsch Deutschland Sar me moras Europe Berlin Operational statu Operational satis d Bonn Maintenance Usar information 269 Administering the server 7 6 Broadcasting e mails to Teamdesk users The system administrator can send broadcast e mails to all or some Teamdesk system users To send a broadcast e mail go to In the top toolbar select Administration gt Manage server gt Broadcast e mail On the screen that appears you can select users from the list of available users by selecting departments and selecting or deselecting single users Add an e mail subject and text Then send the e mail by clicking on the Send e mail button in the toolbar area 7 7 Configuring diagnostic messag
298. may read or view all items in this project not just your own If this flag is not set you will only be able to read an item if you are the original author Customizing Teamdesk Permission Description the current manager the current responsible on the consulted or informed list of this item modify any You may modify all items in this project not just your own If this flag is not set you will only be able to modify an item if you are the current manager the current responsible on the consulted list of this item This will automatically enforce that you can read this item create item You may create items in this project close any You may close any item that you are authorized to modify This flag does not imply any modification authorization it just is superimposed upon possible modification permissions close if resp You may only close an item if you are the current responsible of this item This flag does not imply any modification authorization it is just superimposed upon possible modification permissions close if manager or author You may only close an item if you are the current manager or the original author of this item This flag does not imply any modification authorization it is just Superimposed upon possible modification permissions workspace admin You may act as a workspace administrator or manager You can assign users to your project and set all project parameters You may archive and delete item
299. me t3 Figure 8 16 Tags Document Versioning A document is just a regular work item that is treated in a special way It consists of a hierarchy of document sections A document version consists of a link to a document in a specific revision and bundles a hierarchy of links to document sections in a specific revision Document version Document Document DOA Workitem DOA Version 1 Rev 2 Link Document Section S1 m pe Workitem R1 Link Rev 1 Workitem R2 Document Section S2 I Rev 4 Link a Document Section S3 Workitem R3 Link M a Rev 3 Figure 8 17 Document versions Branching and Merging A document version can be branched off the main development trunk Such a branched version can be modified without loosing its connection to the original document and document sections A change in the trunk can be merged into a branched version Changes in a branched version can be merged back into the trunk Branch B1 Branch B1 Release 1 0 Release 2 0 branch Release 1 0 Release 2 1 branching Head Time Figure 8 18 Branching and merging 293 Index A access control 24 153 access permission 24 access right assign 12 access right propagation 25 account assign to workspace 133 State 208 accountable 28 accounting reporting period 117 reports 117 accounting report filter 117 action item tracking 16 actions 180 ac
300. mi lt 25 days 812 moi2days sii 1mintese 0 amp My Views m 9 ee 2mo 20 days F117 N A 6 m n 18 sec MET ad ee Trackplugtx 17 he eae HA 2minse se E No build in the queue Qo 2 mo 28 days 1108 NA 7 min 51 seo Bulld Executor Stat ee m J 1Bhr 444 N A 40 sec e icon 3ML Build with Parameters Fam HTML Por S Delete Project Discard Old Builds d Days to keep builds k if rca deta ud abocada drd riy kiil up l IPs nambi diyi E Max d ol builds lo keep y amp 8 pal empty on ug do Uv mar of Duk POCO an sapi Fake instance http we trackplus comitrack deal x Use It The connection between Jenkins builds and Teamdesk items is created via Teamdesk item numbers found in Subversion commit comments preceded with a hash mark like 3009 When in the Jenkins build you click on the item number the browser will take you to that Teamdesk item The link in the Teamdesk item comment will take you to the related Jenkins build 277 Administering the server 71 View Issue 3009 Mozilla Firefox E EE Daa esrbelten Anzeht Chronk Lezecechen Etras he om gt day OE huile tradi comptrack temo prntitem actor they 2009 tex cipboard upad PP View Issue 2008 Bearbeiter Workers End date opened Title ssue test web service pescriptian i issue test ereb service History Comenent 5 Biana 0 Worle Costs Wobrhers Links 0
301. mizing Teamdesk ags xtronkx T7 fete finis Field configuralbon ge Assan hem type a Custom fields d Assign Status I3 Participants S Assign Priority 4 7 Tak l de tn Severity P 173 System fields m ds Custom fein 2 03 Custom feda B sig Woren UA es mm Genera Project gt Problem Ragor General configuration Pam Redan BK Action Item gt EE Mechatronics gt Piroman bem Private Project gt fil Milestone gt EN Soltware Deveiement mm Tremerspeicher Defining and assigning custom forms You can define and assign custom forms specifically for the selected workspace type How this is done is described in Managing custom Forms ido L O im 26s Moe or F orsus ib impart f ose Agg Electron Jm ge Assan them type a Mer Task vy Release ALL Gy Assign Sats Cd Edit Tacs wj Melero ALL 5 Aiii Prieiby uj More Default Form MOVE A Assign Severity aj New chile Task mf Release ALL i Custom fields a Change ta Dela Form CHANGE STAT a Custom forms gt d Meeting IP iign Worki P E Prete Reperi em Generic Project b AR Aion Item EE Mechanics 4 Requirement ES Mechatronics JL PEE Private Project D Software Beep gt BE Themenipscher E rk Form MEW CH The default input masi Aderinistratos Tracki _ E Default Form NEW The default input mai Adrninistrying Track E Feature wo Release ALL A rosado for feature ees Administrator Tracks 7 Fealune wo reses A Avery dimple mark
302. mnetta Force central password When you mark this box a regular user cannot choose any more between using the central password and the local password with Teamdesk Only a system manager or administrator can enable local passwords for a user Synchronizing Teamdesk with an LDAP directory You can synchronize your Teamdesk list of users with your LDAP directory Entries found in the LDAP directory but not in Teamdesk are created in Teamdesk Entries found in Teamdesk but not in your LDAP directory can be automatically deactivated in Teamdesk set parameter deact ivateUnknown true You can configure Teamdesk to perform the synchronization automatically on a regular basis or initiate the synchronization manually from the user administration interface By default automatic synchronization is disabled To enable it you need to modify some entries in file webapps track WEB INF quartz jobs xml The relevant sections looks like this lt xml vers1ion 1 0 encoding UTP 9 lt JOD gt lt name gt LdapSynchronizerJob lt name gt lt group gt DefaultJobGroup lt group gt lt description gt Synchronizes a Teamdesk user database with an LDAP directory lt description gt lt l description not more than 120 characters gt Job class com aurel track dbase jobs LdapSynchronizerJob job class lt Job data map gt entry lt l Enable synchronization with LDAP gt lt key gt enabled lt key gt lt value gt false
303. monthly time sheets Teamdesk makes it easy to select the current or last month as reporting period Beyond that is possible to select any period by providing a start and an end date Teamdesk for team members Setting Personal Or Managers View You can define if you want to consider only expenditures caused by yourself or other users expenditures Access to other users expenditures may be restricted depending on the roles you have in a project Setting Filter Criteria A number of filter criteria is available you can set before creating your report Theres from ProjeciAeiease Fiber All itermis Time period T i Dis before Personal Y Manger Boss Dan Consiructa Karla 0 Create report XML datascurce Cael Figure 3 15 Accounting filter criteria In your filter you can consider Projects cross project reporting is possible Departments Users that entered expenditures in case you have the permission for this Cost centers Accounts For example you could run a report on expenditures that were made by users belonging to a certain department Or you could limit a report to a certain account for example in case you have assigned a single account to each of your customers Beyond this you can use any other filter you like Person Project Account This report lists expenditures grouped by person sub grouped by project and within a project grouped by accounts Expenditures are accumulated over
304. move an element you first select it by clicking on it To change an element position you drag it to the new position For tabs you can change the tab label by selecting the tab and then entering the desired label in the floating box field named label Tiles are always placed on panels You can define the number of grid positions for each panel by selecting it and then entering the number of rows and columns in the floating box fields named rows and columns You can place tiles onto panel grid positions by dragging them from the floating box to the desired grid position You can move tiles by dragging them to their new position When you are done hit the Back symbol in the toolbar You will be returned to the regular view of the cockpit page You will see your newly designed layout 3 8 2 Configuring tiles Some tiles may require configuration for example project parameters date parameters or state parameters You are on the cockpit page You can get there any time by clicking on the Cockpit menu entry 1s On the cockpit page click on the Edit link on the top right right below the product icon Teamdesk for team members 2 The screen changes and a floating box appears on the right side containing a list with all available tiles 3 With your right mouse key click into the tile you like to configure If a tile can be configured there will be a Configure option in the context menu that app
305. mported When you use the import facility the first time Teamdesk tries a best match of the column headers to its own fields This match is based on 1 localized field configuration localized field labels 2 notlocalized field configuration original field labels 3 field names You can now go ahead and change the mapping manually in case Teamdesk didn t find the right solution for your spread sheet The import wizard shows the field labels as defined in the Teamdesk global scope not the ones specific for item type project type or project since a sheet may contain items from more than one project and or item type Thus you need to know the global field configuration label for each field even though that label can be different in your own project or for your own item types Once the NEXT button is clicked the mapping is saved on the disk in a user specific directory and will be used as the default mapping for your next import 240 6 7 Importing data Composite Field Handling Composite fields are contained in a single column The different sections of a composite fields have to separated by a character Multiple Value Field Handling For multiple value fields all values are contained in the same column The different values must be separated by comma Data Validation and Import Each row of data in the spread sheet will be validated on several levels before an item is created from it 1 There is a valid
306. much on schedule Grouped by Priority As mentioned above you can group the budget overview according to various criteria The figure below shows a grouping by priority Budget summary Humber af Sum planned Sum booked Estimated remaining Completion Consumption of MAT valur hh work hj work hj 932 plam 55 immediate ni 560 0 455 0 535 0 ST he 07 Ed Issues Pen kirsg La 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 My manag r 4 i z 3 guest 1 300 0 0 0 30 0 500 All Qverdue ue 1 300 0 270 0 30 0 70 0 Due this week lssues om working ao n n an n n on E Be h My ranag r issueg I 130 0 72 0 6 0 00 All issues due this web My Manager 1 130 0 fe 6 0 ELS s mi esas o 0 0 0 0 0 0 All ur due mart mo o maak 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Issues rn earki 5 5 Er a 0 0 0 0 0 0 0i Mr manager ieee 5 130 0 113 0 25 0 51 4 All reisen viuis 4 130 0 113 0 25 0 21 9 Number af Sum planned sum booked Estimated remaining Completion Consumption of issues value h work h work hi 95 plan 5 ET TIT 1 n a 30 0 n a 10 055 Tapuni T r workireg o Figure 3 13 Budget overview tile The grouping value is shown in the header of the second column from the right You can limit the priorities shown by applying an appropriate priority filter in the budget overview configuration For example this permits you to just monitor the high priority tasks and leave those with low priority uncons
307. n getObjectID String fname NAV String valueOf workItemBean getObjectID def file new File C temp fnamet txt DE file exists file delete file lt lt workItemBean file lt lt workItemBean file lt lt workItemBean getObjectID CRLF getSynopsis CRLF getAttribute fieldID CRLF return inputBinding The next script changes the item status import import import import import import public def com com com com com com aurel aurel aurel aurel aurel aurel track track track track track track beans TWorkItemBean util event IEventHandler errors ErrorData beans TStateBean beans TPersonBean resources LocalizeUtil class SetState implements IEventHandler public Map handleEvent Map inputBinding TWorkItemBean workItemBean inputBinding get issue lPersonbear user String firstName String lastName String name LnputBinding get user user getFirstName user getbhad stName user getName Integer Stave LD LocalizeUtil getDropDownPrimaryKeyFromLocalizedText registriert new TStateBean getKeyPrefix new Locale DE 22 Customizing Teamdesk workltemBean setStateID stateID j Table 5 9 Input binding keys for workflow scripts Key name Key symbol Description user com aurel track admin customize the current user as TPersonBean scripting BINDING PARAMS BINDING USER userlD
308. n of theres Found 19 Filtered 19 Op actions BE cue T chose ces BE p exeun CERTS Prejedz Syne Responsible Sus Last Modified RD Mejit ela i b E Prejit Puia a facet A a ro Progelt and ach Deer rere erty Padreurestr itor Track gesi nat Waa 5 13 PM BE rebase FI a Projekt einfach Meus Stedhdosenirutaler Administrator Tracks gedi nat Jiji 1 42 PM lA Plan bom l FI aue Fropelt srta Labra tr delirar dob o Advwustrabo fr amp cke penifner Wal 1 14 eM MB Next actions A mmu Projekt einfach Webenebende Tangheten Administrator Trade geanne AJA f cuente Status Fre 8 Trash la ae Projekt enact Chera aber der TA OE Yap 3 430 J Peor NL Moving items in the hierarchy You can move items to another parent by dragging the item number to a new parent number and dropping it there Modifying column width 1 To modify the width of a column move the cursor to the right double bar of that column header Fikered 33 Qu Actions e Emos Sh Inmenenoverun gect ner 2 Select and move the bar to increase or reduce the width of the column Moving columns To move a column to another place select that column header and drag it to the left separation bar of another column header n n ni 90 3 5 Item navigator Editing a set of items You can execute actions on a whole set of items like changing item state release responsible watchers start and due dates as well as custom properties
309. n rri sed Fach vwd wen res ar Anciana ded Die Schwierigkeiten beginnen erst wenn der Plan umgesetzt werden soll Dia Vorentwurfsplanung der LTD Eibphilharmonie sch tzte die Baukosten im Juli 2005 auf 186 Mio Euro Nach der Ausschreibung und Eiotoranitbaworb Ing dos GOA ATHE bal 201 M Euro bo ADI 2000 MARE T Gem Gat DAD Ewe Db ln e acta Ellas dos EOI Ido Elo Figure 8 8 Creating and embedding an item 8 5 Exporting documents You can create an MS Word document from a Wiki document using an MS Word template You can create PDF documents from Wiki documents based on LaTeX and Freemarker templates To export a document proceed as follows 1 In the Wiki navigator right click on the document you want to export and select Export 44 hed Save G Ve m Scrum issue Tracking 4 UJ Tast Management 1 Das eS ST YE Her 3 Add Documert section m P orca a e amp Pla Pana ma Figure 8 9 Selecting the document 2 Inthe box that appears select an existing template from the available list or browse and upload a new template file MS Word templates have the suffix docx while LaTeX Freemarker templates have the suffix tlx Chine doc template x Doc tem Tesispecifcation docs v Up Brower Fuport Liginad Bownlaad Enlrin Cancel Figure 8 10 Choosing a template 3 Click on Export to create the MS Word or PDF document 8 6 Creating Word templates To create anew Word template you merge an existing Word docum
310. n which you want to be informed e g each Monday and Wednesday Remind me on You will get reminder e mails only on these weekdays 49 Teamdesk for team members 6 Optionally mark in which role you want to be informed If for example you check the Remind me as manager box you will be informed on all items you are the current manager of 7 Click on the Save button in the tool bar to save your configuration You will get reminder e mail for tasks that you have authored you are the current manager or current responsible of depending on what you have marked in the associated check boxes Let us assume some item is due on Tuesday April 24 and that you have set your profile to get reminders on Mondays only If you set the lead to 10 days you will receive a reminder e mail on Monday April 16 So in the worst case you will receive a reminder just three days before the item is due The example shown below demonstrates what happens if an item is due on Friday and reminders were set for Mondays and Thursdays With lead set to 3 days the reminder will come on Thursday sue dus al 3 days lead Ld 7 F F Remind at 3 2 9 Turning off e mail notifications If you feel annoyed by the e mails the Teamdesk is considered to be one of the most useful The e mails you receive from the Teamdesk system are marked in a special way so that you can easily have them sorted automatically by your e mail client into specific folders The e
311. naging link types Customizing the User Interface Item properties Customizing forms Custom selection lists System object states Managing workspace types Managing workflows Managing locales and terminology Managing scripts Managing e mail templates 143 Customizing Teamdesk 5 1 Customization overview Teamdesk can be customized and adapted to your processes to a large extend This includes roles item types workflows item fields action forms and much more As shipped the Teamdesk configuration may suite already many requirements in particular for the development of software based system This section describes and discusses the various options when configuring Teamdesk to adapt to your processes One of the most important parts of running projects with a group of people is to define who is supposed to do what how things should be done and how things should be named This can be either communicated ad hoc as a particular situation requires or it can be defined as a company or project policy We recommend to write up the most important aspects for example as part of a project handbook or configuration management manual In many cases it also suffices to implement policies in the Teamdesk system however the semantics of names may not always be self explanatory and should be described where project team members can find it It would be nice if there was the one and only right process Unfortunately there is not We
312. nd control access to items You can use one space per project or product and you can organize spaces hierarchically Spaces can furthermore be structured on the time axis via phases To support teamwork you need to control access to items Using access control has two advantages You can only access items you have permission for You aren t bothered by information that doesn t concern you In Teamdesk you use spaces to control access to items Fig 2 1 Spaces themselves can contain spaces you can organize them hierarchically An item always belongs to exactly one space What you can do with items in a space and its subspaces is defined by the roles you have in a space Roles in a subspace do not imply any roles in a superior space Roles in a superior space are handed down to subordinated Spaces unless there is a specific role assignment for the subordinated space In this case the role inheritance mechanism is canceled and the new role applies to the subordinated space and all spaces below You can assume more than one role in the same space and you can assume different roles in different spaces Sub subspace Private space Figure 2 1 Spaces You can have your own private space that cannot be shared with others All items in the private space are invisible to anybody else regardless of their roles Private soaces do not have subspaces Spaces where you do not have any access permissions for are invisible to you Via
313. nd custom properties at this level all workspaces and item types will automatically inherit this configuration unless they overwrite it locally The item type specific configuration permits to define system and custom properties differently for each item type If things are configured here in all workspaces for these item types this configuration will be visible Customizing Teamdesk G Add athrite jeg e a QU tan aire configuro Here you can cos Dysbern stiri a Arributes cam J Cuit Hirik 4 Im Th ra ena lea a ere Lype ec coy a You con reires E Ta a You can copy i uL le Pi LE Areirement B8 weorkacace hot ipone attribute config WS Workspace ipede attrbubs conf The next figure shows configuration at a workspace type level Here you can define for each workspace type and item type system and custom properties G Adiatr de pea it Sardar aire confiar pr era bape pancia corta a BS Workspace type specie attribube config Attributes ce Cid ona les on You can ref You can cop Mi Workisace specific stirbute confia All workspaces of this workspace type will automatically inherit this configuration The figure below shows a configuration at a workspace level Here you can define for each workspace and item type system and custom properties Add atril fel a U uan aie confia ona py Bom type speci conf i E W orkkoace type spechc attribute config Mitributes ca Here you can c 4 EZ Welzrzeace
314. nditions You can assign such a combination to each workspace or all workspaces that do not have their own assignment 1 Goto Administration My settings Automail assignments 2 Click on Add in the tool bar 98 3 7 Generating iCalendar URLs ere PE Le Hy wlng r3 Ap Mr emng ad Automa assonmerit M Mame Type Other werieiparrs Sayin Tigger autocad bidin Tracho 3 Emoty Ti fin Generate caen un EE py liad Track dox Dinie Traer Tramin Full Trigger 3 Select a workspace or Other spaces for all spaces not specifically mentioned here an automail trigger and an automail condition If you need to define your own automail trigger you can find information on how to do this at Configuring automail triggers f you need to define your own automail filters you can find more information on how to do this at Configuring automail conditions Add Automall axssgnenent x Project Tracks Support w Autorad tiger Mesum verbose d Autorad condition Orly closed ters 4 Save the configuration by clicking Save in the toolbar 3 Generating iCalendar URLs Teamdesk permits you to connect your desktop calendar application to the Teamdesk system This will permit you to see all start and due dates of your items in the Teamdesk system in your calendar application like Thunderbird Outlook or Lotus Notes You are logged in to Teamdesk and you have read access to at least one project 1
315. ng a project from the project selection list and selecting closed from the state selection list and deselecting everything else the result set would contain all closed items for this project Selecting additional properties and values would add these criteria to the filter Pilatus Tosue type Opened Problem Report processing Requirement mplermenited elcome ores integrated jPARAMETER Chie users In logical terms this part of the filter is comprised of the logical AND of the logical ORs of the selections for each field Referring to the figure above this would be Status opened OR Status closed AND Issue Type Problem report OR Issue type Requirement This principle covers most use cases Teamdesk provides the most important properties for this form of filter criteria definition You can add additional properties including all your custom properties in the bottom area of the filter definition mask This permits you to define even complex logical expressions 3 Teamdesk for team members Selecting all or nothing When you use the selection lists to specify a filter you select the desired property values Sometimes you want to select all possible values In this case it is advisable to not select any value This makes the filter more efficient and robust against future changes in the selection list Let us assume you wanted to create a filter that searches for open items in all your projects If you selected all projects t
316. nly be visible to yourself You can change this to a public item any time later on if you wish Click the Next button 4 The new item screen appears This screen may have been configured specifically for this project and item type Some fields are mandatory they will always be there Enter a title or short summary of your item in the title field 6 Enter a full description of your item in the description field You may use rich text formatting elements here if you wish like bolded or colored text lists etc 7 Enter any other information that you know of and that is required Since screens can be item type dependent you may see different fields and tabs in different projects and for different item types 8 When you are done entering the data hit the Save icon at the top You have created a new item which is a sibling to original child item 3 3 16 Copying items It is possible to create a new item or a larger number of new items from an existing one by means of the Copy action The title of the new item will be the same but with the text Copy in front The copy operation can copy including all history trail information deep copy or without the history trail information The copy operation can optionally also include all children of the original item and can include attachments 62 3 3 Working with items You must have retrieved the item which you want to copy This you can do by entering the item numb
317. ns regarding this document please send them by e mail to support trackplus com Contents Etude EEA PI OUR E II E A 11 E A O ees A 13 IE A A 15 1 1 What ESI i 16 KA MO id aa 17 ala es o PPP m 17 LAGOON Sets apo NI ACE Sin AAA ANEA EN EARRA EE EA 19 1 5 Taking Teamdesk for a test drive eerte ttt ttt ttt tttttttttttcccescctosescscco 19 E MEN CONDONES eR m 23 PE PP REN 24 FER REE POH MM 24 AO mtm 25 PEN ejos s i uec e NR 25 A TUUM 26 PP E E E 2 MAS EN 2d PEEL ANM C I Made dad 27 PNE PP UNT T m TI 28 PRE Eea CON A A E TE AEE EE tek ecto Zo a MS A IN iS 29 EA PP e eE UC E N 30 2 ells RE EO OTT 3 FEN Venledic E S 3 2 2 5 TuS MEO ANA DIO Sn 3 PAN INS P UTR 33 Zo o TEE dE Ses oie 34 2 NS du ed o NER RRECHE 34 2 5 ASS iaa 34 O Calendar Mio iN m 35 E A EE E UU A NE A A ATE es 35 PA E E E E E A A A 35 E A A 35 o ENT m 36 PXNEMIS OMNI MENTRE RENT et A E E 36 DAY WOMAN cerati 36 24 1 Workflows based on UML state GiaGrarms ssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssseccececeeeeee 36 24 2 Worktlows based on iterii COMO a a7 25 Queres TOT S VIC WS and ICONS patillas 37 2 5 1 The item DVDS near testent tn tastean tetest rattan tantr
318. o your local computer You can import this file into another Teamdesk instance 93 Teamdesk for team members Printing You can create a printable output from the items shown in the item navigator The output resembles the layout you have in the navigator 1 Click on the Action button and select from the menu Print 2 Anew browser windows opens containing the printable item set as shown in the item navigator Print this output using your browsers print function Exporting to a CSV file You can export the items shown in the item navigator to a CSV formatted file for import into applications that can read this format e g spread sheets Note You can set the separator character which is being used in the CSV file in your personal profile area since it may depend on your version of MS Office and the locale on your client computer 1 Click on the Action button and select from the menu CSV 2 Download the CSV file to your local computer You can directly open this file in Excel or OpenOffice The CSV file contains all current properties of the items shown in the item navigator The CSV file does not contain any trail information due to the limitations of the format Exporting to an XML file You can export all information for the items shown in the item navigator to a custom XML file The XML format is helpful when you design your own report templates Teamdesk uses the same format internally so you can conven
319. occurs if you are trying to access the mailbox from two different sessions like from your private e mail client and through the Teamdesk system It is therefore recommended to establish an extra e mail account for the Teamdesk system unless this field is kept empty In case item e mail submissions are enabled this mailbox is regularly scanned for new e mails The e mails are read and items are created from each e mail The e mail subject is mapped to the item title the e mail body is mapped to the item description and any attachments are added to the item as item attachments Encrypted connections You can use an encrypted connection between your Teamdesk server and your POP3 or IMAP e mail server You can select between SSL TLS and TLS if available For encrypted connections to work you first have to import a certificate from your e mail server into your Teamdesk server local keystore How this is done is described under Using SSL and TLS encryption on e mail and LDAP connections E mail submissions Teamdesk can be configured to accept item submissions and additions to existing items via e mail This can be quite useful if customers shall not get access to the Teamdesk database itself but they should channel their requests via e mails to a specific account You can enable or disable e mail submissions to the Teamdesk system selecting the radio buttons provided on the configuration screen You can also decide if you want to accep
320. ody creates an item We don t mark the author because we don t want to get e mails for items we have just created ourselves The other rows pertain to when somebody modifies an item In the example if you were the manager of an item and somebody would switch this item to another manager an automail would be triggered Likewise in the example if you were the responsible for an item and somebody would switch this item to another responsible an automail would be triggered The observer column is somewhat special It permits you to subscribe to any changes to any item that you have read permission for while the other columns always assume that you have a RACI role for an item Usually this only makes sense together with an automail condition that limits the flood of automails Them hype Shan 5 Give your trigger a name and then save it Important These settings apply to yourself acting in these roles not to anybody else They would only pertain to somebody else if that user should decide to use this trigger as well 5 7 Customizing automail A noisy trigger configuration has many check boxes marked A silent trigger configuration has only a few check boxes marked 5 7 2 Automail conditions You can further filter automails generated from triggers by assigning automail conditions With these filters you can control down to each item property what kind of messages you will get from your Teamdesk system when items are cre
321. of the form lt item no to the commit comment in your version control system like Related to item nos 13 17 and 19 The following figure shows how this would be done from within the Eclipse tool with a Subversion repository Commit to svn ssh svn trackplus com var svn re p 4 Enter a comment for the commit operation pass ud Fixes issues no 308 389 and 391 Choose a previously entered comment Confiqure Comment Templates Changes Keep locks v com trackplus corefdbase MySOL 59 migrate350to370 sql Figure 3 3 Linking source code to items in version control systems 3 3 20 Planned values and actual cost Each item can have a budget or planned value of time and money As work progresses actual work performed or cost incurred is tracked against the budget In this section we describe the main concepts related to planned value and actual cost tracking Throughout this manual we use the terms planned value and budget synonymously but prefer planned value since this is the terminology used by the earned value method Work and Money As work is performed processing this item each user that has worked on it can enter the time spent in a time sheet Work and money are always booked against accounts Which accounts are available for the project an item belongs to was defined by the system or project administrator 64 3 3 Working with items Budgeting work and
322. ol tip or the is required property You must be logged in as system manager or system administrator 1 In the top toolbar select Administration gt Customize gt Item properties Alternatively click on the Customize Item properties bar in the left navigation area py Hem type specific config ab Apad ES Workspace bype soecific attribute confu e Unk ones 4 EZ Workspace specific attribube config E LE M a a LES gE erat WS 33 Laser Printer 2 Anew screen appears consisting of a tree structure on the left and a context sensitive edit area on the right The tree structure depends on whether your are logged in as system administrator or project administrator Click on the leaf node and select the custom property you want to overwrite In the example shown here we will overwrite property Access level specific for item type Task Before the value is overwritten it is inherited from the global configuration This is shown by the light grey color of the labels Adi ardue Dee 3 2D sanaaa sentra configurations Attribute configuration System attributes Custom attributes 3 Inthe right area we click on the Derive button in the toolbar You shouldn t change the property name since this could break report templates that use it Property name changes are always global Add tribu SO bese DD andad maribu configurations Amribuse configuracion Spem atribunes ere dolce A Custom attributes
323. omer requests mile stones action items tasks and so on You can add delete and modify the list of available item types For each workspace type or workspace you can select which item types will be actually available at the user interface You must be logged in as system manager or system administrator For a small organization running small projects or for use as a simple bug tracking system it would suffice to configure just one item type It is up to you to decide if you for example would benefit from distinguishing between a problem report and a bug If you think you don t you don t have to bother setting up different item types On the other hand you may want to use Teamdesk to improve your process In this case it may make a difference whether you have a lot of problem reports or if you have a lot of bugs A problem report could come from bad documentation insufficient user training or a badly designed user interface A bug is if your developers did not implement the specification correctly So you may have to improve different areas of your process depending on whether there is a one to one relation between bugs and problem reports or there many more problem reports than bugs Teamdesk comes with a set of default item types as shown in the table below You can safely delete those you do not need or rename them to something more appropriate to your requirements This you can do even later on If you then delete item types items of
324. omet BE Themerigeicher Assigning child workspace types You can assign which workspace types are available for a subspace or child workspace for the selected parent workspace type For example you can define that for a workspace of tpye Helpdesk you can only create child workspaces of the same type Drag the workspace types you want to make available from the right column to the left column If you don t drag any there all will be available Here you cen imt the workspace types eveilebie for subspaces of e workspace of workspace oe aces ey a aa a BE Helpdesk Support po Restret tem types Aasigned Available Qj Renner mates Helpdesk Support BE Qectronscs Project hera prioribes ME Genere Space Ah Restrict severities EE Mechanik Projekt IT Restrict child types WS Simpie Project ty Restrict roles BE Software Project gi Item attributes BE Standard Project on Forms EE System Projext DO Assign Workflows BE ey Semole Project NI Mechanik Poit BT Prise Project Bf Simpie Project 9T Share Projet BA Randard Project f System Progeat y Very mole Project Defining and assigning custom properties You can define custom properties specifically for each workspace type You could overwrite property properties at this level for example because you need to call items issues in some projects and bugs in another project The procedure of defining and assigning custom properties is described in Managing custom properties Custo
325. onization is disabled To enable it you need to modify some entries in file webapps track WEB INF quartz jobs xml The relevant sections looks like this lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTP 8 10D lt name gt LdapSynchronizerJob lt name gt lt group gt DefaultJobGroup lt group gt lt description gt Synchronizes a Teamdesk user database with an LDAP directory lt description gt lt description not more than 120 characters gt Job class com aurel track dbase jobs LdapSynchronizerJob job class job data map entry Enable synchronization with LDAP gt lt key gt enabled lt key gt lt value gt false lt value gt lt entry gt Sentry Enable user synchronization with LDAP gt lt key gt enabledUserSync lt key gt lt value gt true lt value gt lt entry gt lt entry gt 232 with LDAP 6 2 Managing regular users Enable group and group users synchronization lt key gt enabledGroupSync lt key gt lt value gt true lt value gt lt entry gt lt entry gt l BaseDN for group synchronization gt lt key gt baseDnGroup lt key gt lt value gt dc itk engineering dc de lt value gt lt entry gt lt entry gt Deactivate users unknown in LDAP gt lt key gt deactivateUnknown lt key gt lt value gt true lt value gt lt entry gt lt entry gt LDAP filter expression for users gt lt key gt ldapFilter lt key gt lt valu
326. opened analyzed implemented etc The task is not done further action is required 1 closed Closed states such as closed or suspended The task is done no further action necessary or itis postponed 2 inactive ready for final testing or closing states 1 In the top toolbar select Administration gt Customize gt Lists Alternatively click on the Customize Lists bar in the left navigation area A Tike Sytem Adminigtrac we j Y os L2 Cockpit Broere vecriipacons Mod iem e Reports Acdrrininizgtion ow Coote fore e Ju My settings Jy My settings J Wrkapaces SP oes less xd epist e oelection hals There ane some predefined oyster bats Een ier ol MD Uer WS Workwnace specific ity Hl Users A groups de any number of custom selection Bats either at the global level vis se amp ly e mouse context dici right morse 2 Dustpeniza 1 Manage filters T Actors j Report templates T Hange Filters Manage server y User roles Report templates oue Cost centers accounts ES Automall Coal cones A accounts 4 g Automad Custom Forms ws Lind bee E Cusbm foem V T configure Item and custom Is e g porfi sewrtty FTO Workspace p 2 Inthe second navigation column click on Global lists and then on Item state You can now add states delete states or modify them 5 12 Custom selection lists P x A Trade System Adm niggator Hep Log off w M i s Lo macit Co
327. or space admilstlalOf Sp 121 EN AeA SOC o TTC 122 4 1 Creating a NEW WOKS paT O iaa 122 A a WO PAC NT 124 del ONC a WI CS SEL arcaicas 125 4 1 4 Workspace teOMpPlates n ccsessssssssssssesssssssssssssesssssscsssssssssssesssssssssssssssssossssssssssssssssssoosssssssssscnsssssssssossssesssscessssssosseesssssessseeesssseosste 126 215 Hie workspace Use 126 AN Vta are ls Me E NEN ERES T Ee 127 di Manada releases pases rias 128 Aal AGANG Mi cc EE Pa a o RO OO RO O 128 A aA Deleng a Ta Saad 129 o E E E seta 130 44 Managing workspace Spec MS sora 131 ASAS SNIE NM rro 133 AG Default automall aso MES ct 134 4 7 OMMIGUIING WORKS DEC ES DSCIIC COP nadaa 135 A E AOE E E 136 Aol SUBES verion CORO MT 136 Na EG SOF CONO ara a 138 A o MEN EE 140 4 FSSC Val IG Telese DOO rana RS 141 A o RR meo 143 is e UE EA 144 GOR UI OA Ori 144 O A ia 146 IS Ecc acca aco sentence 146 E dla e o AO CP A ES EAE A NE a 146 sE A oo la e S RIRs 147 A is o UU UU UU T 148 54 Managing report template sia 150 O A e A 150 542 Report template repos tOn ES aunando 152 5 4 3 Downloading a report TEMPLATE cccccsscsssnsssssssssesesesessesccccesccecsessssssseseessssssssssssossesssssessssscceccesssssssesssnsasssssssssssesssonsessssee 152 5 4 4 Uploading a report template scssscccssscccccccccssssssssscanessssssssssssssssosessssssceccessssssssssssssssesssssssssssssossssssceeecss
328. or the different days of the week The header row displays the current calendar week There are two arrow buttons on the left and on the right with which you can move a week backwards or forward The current day is marked by a red frame CALENDAR a 4 22 13 4 28 13 Week 17 Today Monthly View e i2 Han 33 Tus 24 Wed 15 Thu 26 Fri 27 Est 28 Sur Hk Sarees cri Mc ne ir The header contains two more buttons With the today button you move to the week that contains the current date and will select that date A selected date is marked with a yellowish background The Monthly view button takes you to the monthly view of the month where the currently selected date is in In case you have not selected any day the current month will be displayed Monthly View The header of the monthly view comprises of two rows The first row contains the name of the month two arrow buttons with which you can move one month forward or backward and two years the previous year and the coming year Clicking on the respective year will move you one year forward or backward The second row contains the day of the week Each calendar field contains the day and month in an abbreviated form 3 8 Working with the cockpit CALENDAR A PF X a 2043 April 2013 Today Weekly Wow 2014 wo Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Sat Sun Apr 04 Apr 02 Apr 03 Apes Dd Ape 05 Apr OG Apr OF Apr 08 Apr OF Agr 10 Apr il Apr dl Apr 13 Apr 14 Apr 15 Apr 16 Apri Agr 1H Apr
329. or the export is copied from TRACKPLUS_HOME ExportTemplates latexTemplates xxxxto the working area including all auxiliary files like style definition files logos etc 5 The Teamdesk pre processor prrepares the template for processing with the Freemarker processor The Freemarker processor processes the LaTeX template replacing all Freemarker code with data from the context 7 The xelatex processor is called and compiles the Freemarker output to the final PDF SS A LaTeX Freemarker template is simply a ZIP archive of a directory containing all required LaTeX files having the same basename as the LaTeX file and the suffix tIx For example a Lalex Freemarker template named Report tlx would unzip into a directory Report containing a LaTeX file called Report tex 28 The Teamdesk Wiki Freemarker markup in LaTeX document files The LaTeX document must contain Freemarker markup To be able to test the appearance of a template outside of the server environment the Freemarker markup is escaped for the standard LaTeX processor The following example shows how this is done The markup TP lt if tothe LaTeX processor appears as a comment and is ignored The Teamdesk Freemarker pre processor removes all occurrences of SSTP before the Freemarker processor executes Thus the Freemarker processor just sees lt if op Template for a general report document Copyright 2015 Steinbeis GmbH amp Co
330. or which this item is scheduled for delivery RACI responsible a ka criticality When work on this item shall begin In case of top down support this is the bottom up start date as confirmed by the contractor When this item was created by e mail or by another system user on behalf of a submitter not known as a user of this system The title of this item When work on this item shall begin according to the customer or management top down value The deadline as given by the customer or management This is the top down constraint Marks a task as a milestone Milestones are treated and displayed differently in the Gantt view Used f r TOL search Attachment file name attachment content and attachment description Used for TOL search Description of link Used for TOL search All text properties in the expense record Used for TOL search All text properties for budgets and planned value records Teamdesk for team members 3 5 Item navigator 2 2 When you apply a filter the resulting set of items is shown in the item navigator The item navigator consists of two areas On the left there is a tree with filters and on the right there is the list of items matching the selected filter When you double click on the item number or the title you can view the details of that item You can use a context menu right mouse click to directly change an item The right side can be customized to show the columns so
331. oreaited F Actions gt Pm rl i fe Requirement Mande earner de TOP d Manage roles that can be assigned to users Roles define E a A maki ame qxXIKXI m 2 Click on Add in the toolbar or double click on a role to edit it Fill out the form that appears For explanations on each check box see the context description above Copy pi tom type magma Mal restrictions M Delete Perea Agpears in seiections for Annes ondy lo ers Epa Wit ole x Rie Manager General parmiralcra Appears in election for RAZI rolon oad ae y manger mocdy asy J ntaporuibie 4 cr e iem informed J Cee am 4J Cone T che If nls oF author V close H reap workspaer admin Save Cancel Attention When you rename an entry the change may not be reflected at the user interface This happens when you have specific localizations for the selection entries which is the case for all predefined entries In this case the localized values will be shown and not the label you define here 3 When you are done click on the Save button in the toolbar area You have created a new role with associated permissions You or any space administrator can now assign users in this role to workspaces 5 5 2 Deleting roles As system administrator you can delete roles You must be logged in as system manager or system administrator 1 Inthe top toolbar select Administration gt Customize gt User roles Alternatively click on the Customize User roles bar in the le
332. ory enabled in Teamdesk and those that don t You can select explicit history for all fields but that is not the default In case a fields history recording is enabled in Teamdesk the conflict resolution handling is as follows It will be verified whether the first old value form the Teamdesk history after last edit date is the same as the actual value from Excel If it is the same then the change was made only in Teamdesk and not in Excel Consequently the 241 Managing the system Teamdesk value will be silently preserved and the user will not be asked for conflict resolution Otherwise the user will be involved in the conflict handling process In case a field has no explicit history recording field changes are only recorded in the common history For such fields there is no reliable way to find out whether such a field was modified only in Teamdesk or also in Excel Therefore when at least one common history entry exists after the last edit date in Excel then each changed field without explicit history is subject to conflict handling If there is no history data since last edit then the change in the Excel file will overwrite the Teamdesk value without conflict resolution 6 7 2 Importing space type configurations You can import complete configurations including custom properties and screens from other Teamdesk instances This permits you to develop a Teamdesk configuration on one machine and transfer it to a production machine
333. osts U History Comments 0 Attachments 0 2 Workdog Costs Jl watchers 0 Links 0 Q Add E Delete tan k Date Changed by Subject Work h Cost Account Description Total actual work 0 00 Hours Total actual cost 0 00 Work Cont Set by Budget E Planned value PV 28 00 Hours Constructa Carta Estimated remaining effort Completan Actus expense Esthemated remaning effort 2 Goto the lower part of the panel On the right side there are two little edit icons Click on the icon in the row labeled Planned value PV 3 A pop up window opens Add or modify the planned value enter some description if you like and click the nave button once you are done The item now has a new budget Actual time and cost spent is compared to this planned value Budget changes are recorded in the item history Changing planned values You can assign a planned value or budget to each item in the Teamdesk system for projects where accounting has been enabled The planned value may be changed anytime all changes are kept in the history trail of this item You must have retrieved the item to which you want to add a planned value This can be done by entering the item number in the search field or by selecting the item from the item overview report You must have been granted edit permissions for this item You will not see an Edit action icon if you do not have proper permissions Accounting must have been enabled for this project b
334. ot from another Teamdesk instance or created manually You must be logged in as system manager or system administrator 1 In the top toolbar select Administration gt Customize gt Lists Alternatively click on the Customize Lists bar in the left navigation area 1 i A Tracks System Administrat o A La Cockpit Brown veoricipaces Mad pem Report Administ e Create hem gt Ly My settings Jy My setting Warkupaces jo Werlapaces Q Gace ies e selection lets There are some predefined oyster bits Lin iter ctl arm WS Workspace specific lists HL Users A ros jd any number of custom selection lice either at the global level vic pi jT P mouse context chica right mous CUATE Manage filters UT Hanage Filters E Manageserrer Wy User roles co Report templates Eo Cost centers accounts Uy Uber roles a J Automall gt God cain A rs o Link types w Amal Custam forms Tp Lini types U umirum Fields peu i J FTO Wiewlupasar y 2 Select either Global lists or Workspace specific lists depending on whether you want to import the new list into the global workspace or make it workspace specific equ gt niue Sus E most Pricey de Severity a Sedis gu Bern type Customer List E Bera typa BZ Workssace specu ls LA Custemer List B CET Support k 3 Select the list definition XML file Overwrite existing means that if the list already exists in the database it will be overwritt
335. ou can add sub phases sprints iterations etc by selecting the parent release and then clicking on the Add child release or Add sprint button in the toolbar 5 Fill out the form that appears TI Produc bue kieg Mami ate isso Roles Add release a ET Pie hame 4 Relnacge gat in progres x Due date 07 27 2013 Default natio a Default scheduled 7 7 Description in releaue with agile support Sara Cancel a The release status determines visibility of this release in places where you can select a release Refer to The release status for more detailed information on release statuses b The release due date has just an informative character c Youcan select the release as the default release for Release noticed and Release scheduled The defaults are taken when you do not explicitly select a release when creating an item or the release does not appear on the input form 6 Click on the Save button 7 Optionally sort the release by dragging and dropping it in the list on the right You have created a new release in the selected workspace The new release will be available in selection boxes for items and filters 4 3 2 Deleting a release You can delete releases and sub phases If there are items assigned to a release to be deleted you will be asked for a replacement release which will then be assigned to these items instead You must be logged in as space administrator system manager or s
336. ou want from the right column to the left column If you don t drag any there all will be available spa Letvoncs pe Assign Item type 49 Aen Ratus 9 Assign Priority y Poco Severity ae Custom fields A Ostem forms IP niga Worfiows EI Medura BP Mechatoncs BP Private Project BT Software Dewelopment Assigning available states Here you can configure which hem types will be available in workspaces cf this workspace type Drag an item with your mouse to the desired column You can leave the left column empry if you want to make all item types available Assigned Available y Tas Toe B Mee ng 3 Probie Report Action Item E Requeerent You can assign which of all defined states will be available for spaces of the selected workspace type This you define for each item type For example an item of type mile stone might require only the states open and passed while a problem report might require many more states Drag those states that you want from the right column to the left column If you don t drag any there all will be available agg Ehxtenkx gr Ap Em type y faci Status 9 Anse Priority jm Assn Severity ia Cuno fevers pE eager E Gone Project ES Mechanics NW Aero E Prhabe Project pz Therm en p eetur Assigning available priorities um Doened eem Anxigrad Available Jy signed ial opened processing l analyzed h implarm stad E mge E gi ee Zustand _ mese q enel Em meneri A
337. oup deactivateUnknown IdapFilter IdapFilterGroups firstName lastName email phone groupName Description True if groups and the users assigned to them shall be regularly synchronized with your LDAP directory The LDAP base DN under which your groups are defined Search is based on the member property of the groups True if users not found during the synchronization process shall be deactivated The admin and guest users are exempted The LDAP filter expression for user synchronization Can be any valid LDAP filter term like amp objectClass inetOrgPerson ou Trackplus The LDAP filter expression for group synchronization Can be any valid LDAP filter term like amp objectClass2group ou Groups The LDAP property name for users first name The LDAP property name for users last name The LDAP property name for users email The LDAP property name for users phone number The LDAP property name for the group name After you have modified this file save it and restart the Tomcat server Bulk setting user properties You can set some user properties for all users using a special link Here is an example http localhost 8080 track setUserProperty action field homePage value cockpit The fields with their possible values are listed below field homePage layoutEnabled alwaysSaveAttachment hoursPerWorkday autoloadTime maxAssignedltems prefEmailType session Timeout 6 3 Managing clients v
338. out when the transition is taken For example when the vacation application has been approved by the team leader the next step trigger event would move the item to a new state department leader and at the same time would change the responsible person to the department leaders secretary 2 4 2 Workflows based on item collections More complex workflows can be modelled as a sequence of items or actions Each workflow step is an item and the items have to be completed according to their sequence This approach fits well when processes are made up of an always similar sequence of workflow steps like processing a request for proposal working along check lists or even an entire flow for processing a customer order 2 5 Queries filters views and reports To retrieve a set of items you use queries and reports Both of them use filters To retrieve a set of items you use queries and reports Both of them are based on filters Queries are executed to show a set of items in the item navigator A query is associated with a filter and an optional view Query filters are limited to filter on actual item property values Filters represent criteria to define the items you will see in the item navigator a cockpit tile or a report Filters work on actual item property values Views define how the items of a query are presented in the item navigator You can have a Gantt view an agile board a flat list etc For each view you can define what proper
339. ow at a lower level by assigning another workflow there You can revert to the inherited assignment by resetting that node To add a workflow click on Add in the small toolbar Enter a name an optional tag in case you have a lot of workflows and you want to be able to group and categorize them and an optional description Then save the workflow Add workflow x Mame Standard penblem report Teg Sofware a Description A workflow for software problem reports ita ctt rm rds To define the workflow select in the grid and click on Configure in the small toolbar A graphical editor window is opened Customizing Teamdesk o Y al A L A Track Syren Admiro Help Logo ri i oo Cockpit Bee workspace Fexie mov Heperts Aimnntatan e Create lem v track Ga R Hire M bere bone Praperties B hd bdii Change Shii F d 2 Activities 1 T pesi i E E 222 E k Type Yit assigned x Change manager dienare Tracks yates hi A e C Guards 1 pip CUN b 1 Type Value E D E Role Maruger processing ii A y Ti sira s Personn Peter i k asyo by Va Ec pi implemented clowed c Fi p neue Zustand gp nepred A a ey Y maspended O eedt im END A m n Currin venen de rio 4 0 2 Titon 40 290 Enterprss E 2012 enbas Tape Initially you will drag a number of states from area A to area B There is a special start state that is outside of your regular set of states T
340. ponssble Barbe Low Meetings Ernst Manuela Friedrich Barbe Unscheduted Freee Keg Closed recenthy Friedrich Matthess Added recently Guest Jon Updated recently Henderson Fred My fiera Lang Hartmut Margincen Mihei T Last used Mira David Ing TWTTN Pich Gabriele nage filters create new ones or ute an minting one to pet a specific view with a Est of items tamas 2 Select the filter you want to create a permanent link for from the list of filters available Customizing Teamdesk Y wal A LA eM 9 Fed items w Reports Administration Y Create tem Y My items older E Add Views filter T Fit E Emate b Link fig Delete Managers items Name Type D bles it All open tems View fiker Orgrnator tems Meetings My views Instant view Manage view fitters Click on the link icon in the toolbar area 4 Select that you want to create a Maven link In case you have a parametrized filter select that you want to add parameters to the query Anything else doesn t make sense for a Maven link 6 Choose that the user should not stay logged in after running the query Anything else doesn t make sense for a Maven link Create permaneat hak W jien naeesator brnk Mibi dangti pugi hnk Keep user logged in dangenmaus blip flecelhost BOBO rk ended urr action quens ir UA ahaq Q7 4MV1WOCH s 3Ao6630aw2 DADKOSFTnpehire BENCH nm yaty ME ndDbEns Py SCPMUPZ mE viapMVL TRE T c HF 3D Cancel Copythe link shown
341. port 715 Mrerebursg Fra Tremirs Durs John A 11 den ago Tracker Support na laxis duelo Abfrage Shine Dalia Gut John unus 11 diyi days Track Support fad Wstirer Pehler Trackzsus Cuba John us 12 dijs ago Track Support ra Trisckp ces Aroj Fragen Fehler GER Jobs tus 10 days ago Trck Ta 558 Pereci Desceechunmg Admerestratce Traci Str Dortet deseted 30 days age Teka Ja 558 Barros Ingra re himah Tack Sano Coenen demod Wes 40 074 Crepe D 2213 Sibis Trackglus The Teamdesk cockpit is made up of tabs panels and views Views can be placed on panels and panels are placed on tabs There is no limit on the number of tabs and panels you can configure The cockpit layout can be configured by each user interactively and individually using Teamdesk drag and drop technology The set of views delivered with Teamdesk can be augmented by custom views using the Teamdesk cockpit API 3 8 1 Changing cockpit layout The cockpit is completely user customizable You can choose which devices you want to include and where to include them 7 Note All changes made to the cockpit are immediately saved to the database There is no need to specifically save anything On the cockpit page click on the Edit link on the top right right below the product icon The screen changes and a floating box appears on the right side containing a list with all available tiles Using the icons on the top left you can add or remove tabs and panels To re
342. property of a single item To search for items that must contain project and may contain TQL use the query Tproject TOL 80 3 4 Finding items NOT The NOT operator excludes items that contain the term after NOT This is equivalent to a difference using sets The symbol can be used in place of the word NOT To search for items that contain project management but not TOL new use the query project management NOT TOL new Caution The NOT operator cannot be used with just one term For example the following search will return no results NOT project management Operator n n The or prohibit operator excludes items that contain the term after the symbol To search for items that contain project management but not issue tracking use the query project management issue tracking Related Links System properties on page 84 3 4 12 Creating a permanent link This section explains how you create permanent links to item overviews This permits you to publish HTML links that result in the execution of a filter under your account Sometimes you may want to give other people access to the result of a specific query even if these people do not have an account with your Teamdesk installation Such access is also helpful when you are using the Maven build system to automate incorporation of Teamdesk items into Maven generated project reports Teamdesk permits you to create permanent links that
343. r at this time you do not have the capacity to include such features in the next product releases since it would require a major redesign Thus you put this idea into the incubator basket You review this basket regularly and some time in the future you might be able to actually implement the idea in a project 25 Key concepts 2 3 10 Reference The reference basket serves as a place where you collect information that is or might be of some value to you or others It is important that you organize items here in proper categories to make it easy for you to retrieve them Examples for items in the reference basket are frequently asked questions standards presentations contracts and project specific documentation Related Links Tasks Items and Projects on page 31 Items are the central objects of Teamdesk Items can be of various types like mile stones bug reports action items Items have a lifecycle and items are contained in spaces 2 3 11 Flow control You can define a limit on the number of items that can be assigned to you without an end date and per week This prevents you from being overwhelmed by too many items piling up in your in basket If somebody wants to place an item into your in basket e g by delegating something to you and that would exceed your personal limit the other person would be informed of the situation and the item would be returned 2 4 Workflows A workflow consists of a predefined sequence of
344. r had created them except that the submitters e mail is being used for notifications and not the guest users e mail 5 8 Managing link types Teamdesk permits you to link items by different link types like is duplicate of or is test case for requirement This section explains how you can create and manage your own item link types You must be logged in as system manager or system administrator Teamdesk links permit you to associate an item with any number of other items There are directed and bidirectional links For bidirectional links there will be a reverse link with the target item Teamdesk distinguishes between an outward link and an inward link An outward link points from the current item to the remote item An inward link points from the remote items to the current item For each link type and link direction you define a number of labels a label for the outward direction a label for the inward direction a label for the outward link filter expression a label for the inward link filter expression 1 In the top toolbar select Administration gt Customize gt Link types Alternatively click on the Customize Automail bar in the left navigation area Customizing Teamdesk x i a Pi Y 11 mn Cockpit Browne woriapaces Find hera gt Reporta Administration w Create erm Jh My tetto Be Add Jy Mysettings Werkspaces Dubai link description EQ n Type of lini MB Users A groups AMEN masses S best care for C
345. r time expenses is one working hour Working days are mapped to working hours by the values found in either the project type definition the project definition or a single users definition for how many hours one working has The third step in setting up accounting for a project is to assign the accounts defined previously to the projects It is possible to assign a single account to more than one project It is also possible to disconnect accounts from projects 5 7 Customizing automail Teamdesk can inform users of item activity The conditions under which such information occurs can be largely customized via automail triggers and automail conditions There are two classes of automail information due to item activity information due to items being due or overdue reminder e mails In your user profile you can configure the conditions and frequency for reminder e mails In your user profile you can also decide to switch off e mail notifications entirely This section discusses the principles and functionality for automail due to item activities like creating items adding comments and so on A complete automail configuration consists of three steps 1 Defining automail triggers 2 Defining automail conditions 3 Assigning automail trigger and conditions to projects For more information on the concepts behind the automail system go to Triggers and conditions 5 7 1 Automail triggers Via automail triggers you can define what even
346. r access control the Teamdesk system imposes very few restrictions on its users This leads to fast adoption and intense usage even without organizational policy enforcement 5 12 Custom selection lists The life of an item starts with state opened Anybody with appropriate permission in a specific project can create a new item There is a default person assigned as manager of an item who is responsible to evaluate and possibly assign it to somebody for further investigation or resolution If there is a time gap between the decision to further pursue this item and the time it can be assigned to somebody for resolution it is possible to mark an item as analyzed If the analysis shows that resolution of an item should be deferred to some later time the item can be set to suspended From this state it can always be reopened or directly be assigned to some person for further processing To permit management some insight when an item is actually being worked upon by the person responsible for it state processing is available This state marks the period during which resolution of an item is pursued While most other states describe the end of a period this state describes the process The end of this period is marked by state implemented which means that resolution has been completed but no integration and tests have been carried out The integrators and testers can use state integrated assessing and closed
347. r here as well You can also define the sort order either based on the texts or on the sort order defined for these properties Appearance The following figure gives you an impression of how the tile appears in the cockpit nensional statistic My last week hsues becus Type Statue Requirement Proben Lepan Tack Peeling Son Ham Tote mplemenbed 11 apered z 1 E 1 n 13 3 9 Browsing projects You can have all important information for a specific project pulled together in a project specific cockpit You can select which project you want to see using a project and release navigator The cockpit is configured by the project administrator so that each project member has the same view Other than that the cockpit has a navigation area on the left and that it cannot be configured by regular users the functionality is the same as that of the user specific cockpit All links and information shown is automatically restricted to the chosen project and phase Teamdesk for team members 3 10 Preparing and generating FAQs You can export any number of items from Teamdesk to an external file structure or zip file suitable in form of a webhelp system This includes indices and search functionality You can then publish this structure on any web server so other people can search this structure for answers to questions they may have To prepare for FAQ generation you need to assign such items to an item type FAQ You can then define a filter
348. r items you haven t analyzed yet The basket determines the position of an item in your personal workflow model The state determines the items work state in the overall workflow model Typical values are open closed analyzed suspended A title or brief summary is mandatory A description with more detail is optional Teamdesk always keeps a complete history of all changes The following tags and other properties are optional Furthermore you can add any number of custom properties to items A log with comments of users The MAP Monitoring and Planning set of properties permits to monitor work progress in an objective and structured way using the Earned Value Method Furthermore properties are provided to order items in terms of value priority and risk MAP properties are optional 33 Key concepts The subsystem component permits you to structure your space without using subspaces Then each item belongs to a subsystem or component The class permits you to further categorize items e g documentation software hardware The release of the space this item was caused by For example you may have found a problem in software SWB release 4 3 This will be resolved with release 4 4 The release of the space which is to resolve this item A build identifies the build number of an item For example you may have found a problem in software SWB release 4 3 build 1247 Priority helps you to organize item
349. r of your daily action management activities It contains all items that you yourself want to take care of as soon as possible Anything taking less than two minutes you do right away without placing it into this basket Only you yourself can place items in this basket and nobody else Items that need to be done by a specific date or time you place into the calendar basket Items that you have delegated you put into the delegated waiting basket Once an item has been either transferred to another responsible or has been closed it is removed from the next actions list 2 3 5 Planned items An item might require more than a single action to be taken care of and might involve a number of people to work on Such items are moved to the planned items basket and detailed further there Items show up in your planned items basket if you are responsible or manager of such items according to the RACI scheme Also shown are all items that are in other peoples planned items baskets if you are a soace manager and these items belong to spaces you manage Planned items are typically organized in traditional project work breakdown structures product structures or product backlogs release backlogs or iteration backlogs It is beyond the scope of this manual to describe how to develop such structures In general it is wise to structure the planned items according to intermediate and final deliverables like documents features software hardware mec
350. r workspace type or even workspace specific by dragging it from the right area to the desired position in the second column Each template comes in two variants HTML and plain text Each template can be provided in a number of locales You can import and export complete template sets or just single templates o L Y 2 1 B Cockpit Droeme worktpaces Find temi Faports Administrabon v Create tem v gat Gea Cy M Dee exe Bee O oe falsa Engish Trads Gudget changed J fase Deutsch Tracics Budget gabrdert ue English Tree Budget changed hue Deubseh Tracks Budget gelindert false Exin lust rin Tew 223 Customizing Teamdesk Language Engish e Subject Track Budget changed Body lt DOCTYPE hemi PUBLIC W3CJ DTD HTML 4 01 Transitional EN e nmi lt e gt lt meta Mip equiv coment type comente text htmo cersetsutf 8 tle Treck E Mail Notificetion lt tithe gt ye td th p div font femiy Verdana Arial Helvetica sens serif font size 11px et color 4 105090 text decoration none font weight bold a active color BF2128 a hover color 8852125 Templates are written in the Freemarker macro language http freemarker sourceforge net The following listing shows a part of the standard item changed e mail HTML template as it comes with Teamdesk lt macro renderShortFields fieldChangeRows gt lt list fieldChangeRows as fieldChange gt lt tr gt
351. r you could automatically change assign the responsible person for a child item In principle there are no limits on what you can do when an item is modified You associate a triggering action with a transition by first selecting the transition C and then selecting the action F 5 16 Managing locales and terminology Guards Once a transition is fired an optional guard condition has to be met for the transition to really take place If the guard condition is false the transition is rejected You associate a guard with a transition by first selecting the transition C and then adding the desired guard conditions D A number of guard conditions are available A role the person initiating this transition via an action must have in the space the item belongs to A specific person A workflow guard script An automail condition see Automail conditions If you specify a number of guards if any of the guards is true the transition will be taken Transition activities When a transition is taken associated activities are executed You associate transition activities with a transition by first selecting the transition C and then adding the desired activities E A number of transition activities are available Changing any item property like responsible manager or status Sending an e mail based on an e mail template Executing a workflow activity script With a workflow activity script you can basically do anything conceivable cr
352. rack da 196 Faser Sereen config drag and drop aot Aedrmirinirates Track Sete Common amp martes ogo Track 4 5 248 Harding of report templates indian Admina Track Sytem Common 251 j b imensubes ago Treck 3 26b Hes mondtur it null empor Adria Track Dat Comme E an m 7 minutes age Traces A 255 Search does not wor for veoriesace pref Adimireitritos Tracks Syste Common ri a T minutes ago Tracks 4 0 i Deleting release with hera can t select repiac Adm nisirator Tracks System Common 5 15 7 mir hes agn Track dox 25 Aim EL dune OA cas Amonestrahne Tracia Sypris Common pe 16 j aa 7 mires agn Track dx 206 BudgetPepersefanu o Multi genta umi po Aamin Tracie bea fnmean B peng ibl reas 7 minube ago Track 4x s IF Publica Soniniunater Tachi Sytem Common maa AU 7 mirer aga Track dn 106 Fase erren config drag and drop rats Adkminixiraler Tracks Syston Tnmen ul trteee t s rn f rra dno Tracks dx 137 Filter dont shoved m rk Amma Mira dhe Common Mira Apr Gee day age Track Eoppert rad Wa Probleme on Fibereisnedgtures Gun John ats 2011 B days age Track4 Support rA Carmot Update seme documents Cet Job stus days ago Track Support 728 Probleme in attersereaiung Guest John Sus 10 days age Teka Suppeet 723 Fehler om Casino ce Guest John eus 10 dea na Track Support T2 Fehier hei Autimai Trier Curs John Tes 10 dans ago Track Support 724 frocks decir Afer aktive Zinbhreir Bekcirssdrzker Tack Sire e 10 dea ago Tracks Sup
353. rad J 3 8 Working with the cockpit Teamdesk provides special overview pages called the cockpit or dashboard Based on the metaphor of cockpit in a car or plane this digital version of a cockpit provides you with the input necessary to drive your business The cockpit contains views such as red green yellow lights alerts drill downs summaries graphics such as bar charts pie charts bullet graphs spark lines and gauges You can custom configure the set of views you want to have in your cockpit There are two kinds of cockpits A general cockpit accessible via the Cockpit menu entry This is handy to give you an overview across all projects that you are involved in our the load situation of your team across a number of projects Project and release specific cockpits accessible via the Browse projects menu entry This is helpful to get a quick overview over a specific project or even release within a project such as open items requirements release notes etc 3 8 Working with the cockpit m X Treck Syrian Ainin Hes Leg ofr pa Y A sw a L track Coot Bama Pjes A v Chewt item v track e Configure akpi e Cockzit fene hiraat Main Budget bensicht Kalender Quick Search Werionkowtrolle More view MY ITEMS Tm responde 1 LU m the criginater 41 Tes the manager Take lx 1 1 a Track 1e 4 1 ae T lx 5 3 ios Tuck da a Tracks 4s m A E Y ACTIVITY STREAM 5 5 8 STATUS OVER TIME a T mires ao T
354. rated If itis being used in a project or release cockpit there is no need for any configuration The tile displays a list with item numbers and titles for all resolved and unresolved items grouped by item type Pain Pens Tau 3 Irgit ut 2 2 resolved 421 146 nmeinleed 273 unreielved Hi Problem Report E 14945 Pog problem re The rout breaker hires when Ehe ae candor sbarbs nr 2295 This risum serves do show A completo length hile bes w h sorna steetih lotor Requirement Change Qi 1580 Presse Bauen Qj 1581 Time View eran KR is asdasd In addition there are summary links for all resolved and unresolved items as well as a simple graphical indication for project or release progress Configuration When you use thistile in the general cockpit you must define for which project or release you want to enable the tile When you use the tile in a project or release cockpit you do not have to configure anything Configuration x Title releazaNaob s label Projects Manuetast a TM an M nuxt st y r ei Margate s vd Try Eibar Try Phut 2 iia Meeting Se a In any case you can configure the reports you want to make available in the reports area of the tile Activity Stream This tile gives you for each project you have read permission in a list of the last X events where you can configure X This permits you to monitor project activities in real time 3 8 Working with the cockpit Tile
355. ration Usually a system administrator has configured this when the system was adapted to your organization A workspace has a status which determines its visibility to regular users and what can be done within that workspace For more information have a look at The workspace status s X x vir d o E Y i t E Track Sytem Adminerator Help Log off iv i Cockpit Berea verip Find hem e Reports Administration 3 Create Bers track Ju My settings fd Sre A Cancel y Weipa Batic settings Default settings E mail settings ULIEMENEEN 00 F LT J CET Support Z Ham k varanna DescripEicin p B Sog J TT Hepek J Marketing amp Vertrieb Ja Team Tresmersoeschir Workspace type CBT E TP Integration 5 Workspace state in papes x f Jp AITH With links you can relate work items to other items even across workspaces and hierarchies For example you could mark duplicates or relate items to test cases or you could create relations like this item must not start 30 days after the linked item has been finished When your system has been configured to use space specific item numbers you need to enter a unique prefix like TRP The workspace specific item numbers will be prefixed with this string When you enable work and cost management you will be able to monitor work progress using the earned value method and keep track of planned efforts and actual hours spent for each item You have to have accountin
356. rd to limit the number of columns shown Important You may not be able to remove columns if there is at least one item with a corresponding property value Click on the little remove icon at the right side of the column header 95 Teamdesk for team members Drag amp drop functionality With the agile board you can perform a number of operations using a drag amp drop technique 1 To change the order of columns click on the header and drag the column to its new position 2 Tochange the item column property value click on the item and drag it to the coglumn with the corresponding value For example if the column property is the item state change the state of an item by dragging it to the column representing the new state 3 6 Configuring automail Teamdesk has a highly configurable e mail notification system E mail notifications can be globally and individually configured to ensure proper information flow Teamdesk can automatically send e mails to users Such e mails are triggered by system events Two types of events sending e mails are built in others can be added The two types are due date notifications item change notifications Due date notifications can be sent to users based on each users profile settings Teamdesk can send you an e mail some time before an item you have an interest in is due The second type of notification occurs whenever an item is created or changed To limit the amount of e mail traffic you
357. re are reports with and without history grouping localization and even charts There are two ways to access reports via the Actions button in the item navigator or via the Reports toolbar button In the first case if the report template permits you will not be asked for which items you want to create a report for 5 4 Managing report templates In the second case you will always be asked for filter criteria to be used for the report In the following we assume the second approach 1 Select Reports from the main toolbar Y LU Total nema Create reports in POF Excel Word er othar formats th TG Akemi Talal mambe ashics or tables using all data stored inthe system them Na Reports are bases on bemplates Ghat vera can adapt to yuur renis blue A J 2 Openone ofthe folders on the left On the right you should get a list with report templates in that folder When you hover over the report template name on the right you will see a preview of the report TS Bespeecbasnupsnentn en Betallod swith hrbery S Crete rant Filed history 3 Select the desired report template and click on the Create report button in the toolbar v ADA LJ t Find tem v Reports now Create tem vw Ag Add folder Add report X E CUL Downiced WM Deiete gh impot i Export Name RAR RR ERES 4 Depending on the report template selected you now have to specify a filter You create the report by clickin
358. re bidirectional links as well as unidirectional links When linking has been enabled for your project a link tab will appear when you create or edit an item You can add a new link by clicking on the Add icon on the left side This will bring up a pop up screen where you can select the link type and the target item You can create any number of links for an item The links will be shown in the target item with their reverse description when the links are bidirectional For example if you have selected as link type duplicate of in the target item the link would show as duplicated by You can go to the target item by clicking on the item number or title of that link in the link tab When creating queries you can choose to include all linked items or items linked by a specific link type This permits you to create overviews like requirements and all their related test cases or issues and all their duplicates Related Links Item linking Linking items on page 92 You can link items directly from the item navigator 3 3 18 Linking items to other items inline There are various ways to link items to other items by means of a parent child relationship by inline links or by explicit links This sections describes how to link items by inline links which are part of a description You must have chosen an item and you are in edit mode for this item You can get there by either creating a new item or by editing an existing one
359. re the mapping of item types to Maven action types and the query URL lt build gt lt pl gins gt lt plugin gt lt groupId gt org apache maven plugins lt groupId gt lt artifactId gt maven compiler plugin lt artifactId gt lt cont1guralion gt lt source gt 1 5 lt source gt lt target gt 1 5 lt target gt lt configuration gt lt plugin gt lt plugin gt gronpld com trackplus mvniplugins gronupldo lt artifactId gt trackplusChanges lt artifactId gt lt version gt 1 0 SNAPSHOT lt version gt lt contiguration gt lt query gt http gandalf 8080 track xml report query nKswWw4DX15WsX 3D lt query gt lt b default action type gt lt defaultType gt fix lt defaultType gt mapping between Teamdesk item type gt and Maven action type lt issueTypesMap gt lt Task gt fix lt Task gt lt ProblemReport gt fix lt ProblemReport gt lt Requirements gt add lt Requirements gt lt issueTypesMap gt lt configuration gt lt executions gt lt execution gt lt phase gt compile lt phase gt lt goals gt lt goal gt changes generate lt goal gt lt goals gt lt execution gt lt executions gt lt plugin gt lt plugins gt lt build gt 1 Select menu Find items gt Manage filters Y 1 Li find Reports M NICA Y Create tom Ali tems Me Daciae iy Deacovate E User iem Outstandeng Name My items Asmonvateatey Tracks Sytem I m the manager Bojani Adrian I m res
360. reate the new form using the interactive form designer 2 Assign this form to the desired action either globally or at a more specific level You can modify forms any time Tabs Each form consists of at least one tab Tabs contain panels and panels contain properties The figure here shows a form with three tabs The first tab can be designed any way you like The other two tabs have been automatically 5 11 Customizing forms added to this form because the respective feature watch lists and accounting have been enabled for this project These tabs are predefined by the system they cannot be modified interactively Created drag a field Fere Author Anine noticed Stant i Manager wo Tanget reine Hrish Responsible On behalf al Status Tithe i Description H i Parent Mo There is only a practical limit on the number of custom tabs you can add to your form You can specify the tab label to whatever you like Panels Tabs contain panels All properties are placed on panels A panel is made up of rows and columns A panel organizes the space for properties in a grid o 7 Y L Cockpit Brows WOrKSDICES find tems c Reports Administration Create Emm e g Mewtah g Mewpanel fl Delete dere c ERE A Therm Ho Project Tem typ Created Pangl l fiid hene Pront Author Romse noton Sun FLNLIJET w Tarot mine Hires Responsible On behalf of Situs Tithe Description BH j A E d Fr Panel 2 eaen
361. regress in functionality or software quality while you are fixing defects or implementing new features Using a special Jenkins plug in you can integrate Jenkins with Teamdesk For Jenkins builds you will be able to see in Jenkins which Teamdesk items were addressed with a particular build In Teamdesk you will see for each item which Jenkins build addressed that particular item and which files were affected You get links in Jenkins and in Teamdesk which will take you to the respective other application There are many ways to set up Jenkins To integrate Jenkins with Teamdesk tightly conisder the following hints Use the same user names and passwords on Teamdesk and Jenkins To make this easy configure both systems to use an LDAP server see LDAP and SSO configuration Install the Teamdesk portals plug in at TRACKPLUS_HOME and add the URL of your Jenkins server to the trackplus plugins xml file there This will permit you to switch directly between Teamdesk and Jenkins from the Teamdesk main menu Step 1 Configure Teamdesk On your Teamdesk server enable the web service interface To do this log in as system administrator admin and go to Administration gt Manage server gt Server configuration tab Other ua Y l A E X Tracks Gyetem Administrater Help Log off Cockpit Brianin pregerta Thom ngalor se Mocis fubroniation se Coba Mn w track Jj My stings 3 sve ud Projecte Licenaa Quta mail Incoming
362. rid here 6 Forasimple list you can just add entries underneath the top list node To create a cascaded list select a second list level node and repeat the procedure from 5 a dd i 2 9 Gobal tas hare ko konk Style Delea ama EMEA 8 Priority Jt Severity po Bem type A Customer List a j EMEA Bosch Gamers 42 j Americas GE Hora Test bei America Tit beret 200 5 12 Custom selection lists You have now edited a custom list of the selected type You can assign this list to custom properties for the same type This assignment can be global item type specific workspace type and item type specific or workspace and item type specific Deleting a custom list You can delete custom lists so that they cannot be used anymore Items that used these lists will keep their history data You must be logged in as system manager or system administrator D 1 In the top toolbar select Administration gt Customize gt Lists Alternatively click on the Customize Lists bar in the left navigation area Notice Deleting a custom list will preserve the history the list is only marked as deleted and will not be available anymore for new custom properties i A Toe 1 Adminigtrac 0 F Y E Li sie Cockpit Browse Mod Rem gt Reports Adminai w Create ers ce My settings Jy My settings Y aces is CO MEENE pseection lets There are some predefined system ists Bike Rem sI KE Workspace specific ists Users group
363. rkflows go to Administration gt Customize gt Workflows Cockpit Drowse workspaces Find items y Reports PIES v Create tem y Lu My settings ido G M Mysetinps gt bosse Copy Configure h iroot E Export Workspaces d Workspaces e you can assign workflows by dragging them from grid to M Users amp groups 5n Item type spec workflow assq M Users A groups gt el A by m Oe e workspos Customize 4 Y Manage view filters he right panel you can c A Adios b L mapert templates ee or reset it to its de TY Manage view fites 5 Problem Report Standard A E Manage server gt ty User roles Report templates 5 Action Them Standard Action v T Cost centers amp T Tog dy User roles J J Cost centers amp accounts y tak y one Custom forms a y Unktypes J Custom fields LH Custom forma ae Lists Custom fields Ma Y System tees Usts Workspace types G Stem sabes LN ve Workflows EZ Workspace types E Locale editor Workflows E Scripts E mail templates GR Locale editor r Scripts s r E mai templates In the second column from the left you see the standard Teamdeskhierarchical configuration scheme You assign workflows to item types workspace types and spaces by dragging them from the grid on the right to the appropriate node on the left Workflows are inherited from global assignments to the most detailed assignment for a specific item type in a specific space You can overwrite a workfl
364. rkspace types go to Administration Customize Workspace types Add a workspace type by clicking on Add in the small toolbar Edit a workspace type by selecting it in the second navigation column from the left The workspace type flag mostly affects terminology like sprint instead of phase etc Jy My settings gt Ass Workspace type fe save M Delete gt Workspaces a 0000 Workspace type settings M Uses A groups 5 qw Asa Rem type Name Electronics Customize v maed Workspace type flag Standard x TO Manage view fiters po Phases in workspaces Y o d Report templates li Ost toes Verson control in workspaces l e y User roles 5 Custom forms Work A cost in workspaces Y o q Cos centers A accounts DO Assign Workflows Hours per workday 8 9 ad Mtomal gt ee Cetera Defeutt unit for work A Unk types Currency name 19 Ez Ostem forms Wm Omexysmo 0 Uses om Pg Sytem statuses KL MO aitor ME Locale editor Serots E mail templates Actions gt IE Manage server 209 Customizing Teamdesk You can enter a default for the hours of work per working day This value is taken if no other value is set in the workspaces themselves Once you are done with editing save the changes using the Save button in the small toolbar area Assigning available item types You can assign which of all defined item types will be available for spaces of the selected workspace type Drag those that y
365. rmation The styles can be used to control item appearance in the item navigator Then click on the Save button Q we ad Gen as Nama TELE de Priority x P Severity Add custom entry Bem Eype E fame EMEA Customs Lit Cela EZ Workspace speofic lists Decaun Siyi Background color Color Font eight hu Fant style sa Mad decoration w You can assign an icon 16 x 16 px GIF or PNG format to each entry You can furthermore assign a CSS style to each entry which will be used to format items in the item navigator For example you could use various shades of red as background color to illustrate the urgency of an item You can drag entries in the list on the right to another position The entries will be offered at the user interface in the same order as shown in the grid here 6 Forasimple list you can just add entries underneath the top list node To create a cascaded list select a second list level node and repeat the procedure from 5 5 12 Custom selection lists arma kun lun Ple Syn Gort a sans EMEA Test bet Americas Tit bet You have now configured a custom list of the selected type You can assign this list to custom properties for the same type This assignment can be global item type specific workspace type and item type specific or workspace and item type specific Editing a custom list You can edit existing custom lists for example to modify or add entries You must be logged in as system manager or system a
366. rms to actions DY dragons MAR Users amp groups ff hem type spo form assignet MEI Users A grouget M PA mer m A Customize gt Y Manage filters Customae Workcpucr spec form asigeemi o c t gt n s Actions Report templates Manage server dy User roles Te User roles aon a e a f Cont centers A accounts Action ix d J Action lu Unk types gt e Default F Lists A Wem attributes Default F i inte Defaun F y System cates Defaui f es gt EX Werkspace types detour r A po Festurey Locale editor Feature s Scripts B Locale ector Meeting E mail templates Ser s Feanaw fart 2 In the tree area select the node to which you want to assign a new form You can select the action at a global level item type specific workspace type specific or workspace specific In the example here we change the assignment only for item type Action item for creating editing and moving items Jem afer rober ALL Action Ter CRM ALL re Actus Dusrs wef Robeauas ALL ON wo neitase ALL Cal New ch d hrtion Irem wio rebase A Bug v Raabe ALL Care stet t Form CHAM Bug wo release ALL Here you can assign forms to actions by di a Far each action a fonm can be acciones Click cn an action node on the left ana Il Hecing fou can refresh a node from the tree o CE Pepit emiericht a a Action Them Name a 3 Drag the form that you want to use to the respective node in the tree and drop it th
367. roblem though 2 If there is only a limited amount of customers a list is created for each customer Only people associated with this customer and developers are granted access to this list Customers may now have extended rights to this list and all people associated with this customer may see all tasks in this list 3 A separate project is created for each customer Internal developers can access all projects while customers can only access their specific project This permits to use the finer classification of different lists even with many different customers Each solution has its distinct advantages and it depends on the number of customers and how one likes to interface the system with the customer which solution is preferable Anonymous access To permit anonymous access to the system create an account anonymous or use the predefined guest account with no password or a public password and grant this user all access rights desired Public passwords may for example published on the login page 5 2 Configuration scenarios Personal To Do list It is possible to configure Teamdesk such that you have your personal to do list that is not visible to others There are three ways how to achieve this One solution is to define a new project e g named Personal and assign each user the Extern role This permits you to create modify and close items that only you can see The second approach is to define a new item type
368. rting and grouping you prefer F 2 ii A A A trado System iia raa Log enr P s e Cocoa Breves Props Fired tern ve heports Adrian gt Create ibem we track 4 PRONETS E Meter Tote number of hems found 43 Fiered 45 E Actors O cheese Colom Pi Projekt E fa Ne Propokt Sopa bir Erari Lal Mech esi c 7 Projekt enia B TO Projeti Projeli BOR je Preset PAL a Pajk A Ela Proben cher Papes peel re nappe 1 ASI 10 57 PH a 5 QUERIES wa Projekt E Cae rora oa iol id elit Pubmed dr Tro arrair 5 71 PH L FEL Pruett A hep 3 arabe Business bos Tracks 10 12 12 7 22 P a an Pajek A Shep d pec dee ficdir r nio ator Track OflBf11 7 38 PH Ea Responsible y aly Projekt A Problemei hi sg teen pele Sukrr risto dise Tadke PEDAL 8 83 PH 7p Grigmator kems FEL Projekt B S5 gestire Sukraradrados Tracks OF O 11 7 36 PH Ej Mise Pejehi Fi Firs irm orig TE Arkna Teck Tj78 1 20 23 D3 Private a5 Projek A Moabor auf hr inari gallina Airani ar Tracks GaL 4 dd PH G Project a Projeka Propels PHLESULI ec a Es Popi PILES Talk Mei get Front fuir ly or Track 92 19 11 500 FA a oe AHIT aga Pr pekz PILES Tank PMSHT T geo Fra Fubar ator Teach PLN B00 PH yA s Projets PLES Tank MB E LZ get rot fura stor Tracks 9 19 11 5 00 PH Al as Projeti PLS Dak PSB 111 geina Ameer aa Tr ach 919 11 Balko PH a Ne ws Propel PILES imk PO LZ geet front Dorn Hide 019411 800 Pr FA Cuerdo a ms Projeti PHLZJ Tmk MEE in bea ur Aireen ator Trad MINIS AM
369. run a query under your account returning the result as either an XML file or in the regular Teamdesk item overview You can choose parametrized queries and you can choose if you want to the user to remain logged in after running the query This can be useful if you use the guest user as the one providing the access and to give users the ability to sort and group the data in the item overview 1 Select menu Find items Manage filters Y moms Ld y Reports MAA Y Create tom v Xe D vctivete 3 Deactivate Be iem Ovtstand g Name My items Mmiristratey Tracks System I m the manager Bojgars Adrian I m responsible Barbed Lena I m the author Daschner Chnsteph Meetings Ernst Manuela Friedrich Barbe Unscheduted Frieden Meg Closed recenthy Friedrich Matthias Added recently Guest Jon Updated recently Henderson Fred My f A Lang Hartmut Margincen Mhe T Last used Mira David Ing TNTTN Pich Gabriele Snage Mers conato new ones or ute an minting one to pet a specific view with a Est of items tomas 2 Select the filter you want to create a permanent link for from the list of filters available Teamdesk for team members Fed tems v Reports Administration v Create item v My items older E Add Views filter T Fan E Famcido E Link fig Delete Managers items Name Tyee R bles it All open items View fiter Origater tems My views Instant view Manage view filters Click on the link icon in the toolbar area 4
370. s de any number ef curtem selection rte either ac the global level vies ly ane p mouse conte click right mousse Actions Foo Report templates Manage derer gt V Liver roles E Cost centers accounts J Auiumail Link types Custom Forma Cueto feda Po Won pa T 2 In the second navigation column click on Global lists if you want to delete a list that was accessible to all workspaces or select a workspace from which you want to remove list Then click on the Delete button in the toolbar or use the context menu Your custom list has been removed from the system for selection for new custom properties All items that had a reference to this custom list will still have all information available Importing and exporting custom lists You can export custom lists into XML files and you can import custom lists from XML files There are some rules that govern the import process when importing lists that already exist XML format The following listing shows an XML export for a cascaded option list with two main options EMEA and Americas lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 gt lt ns2 trackplusExchange xmlns ns2 http www trackplus com exporter version 4 0 0 gt lt entityExchange entityld 1002 type TListBean gt lt entityAttribute name name gt lt CDATA Customer entityAttribute gt hist ies 201 Customizing Teamdesk lt entityAttribute name repositoryType gt lt CDATA 2 gt lt
371. s a Tomcat web container realm for container based authentication Related Links Tomcat Realm Howto Tomcat Single Sign On Shibboleth Single Sign On Central Authentication Project Managing scripts 7 2 6 Various configuration items On this tab you can configure directories URLs web services backups handling of item numbers auto login for guests and more Directories and URLs Teamdesk stores a number of items on disk rather than in its database You should set the following directory entries to an absolute path and you must make sure that they can be written to by the user that runs the application server e g tomcat7 on an Ubuntu Debian system with Tomcat 7 Name Description TRACKPLUS_ HOME At this location Teamdesk stores among other things attachments and report templates Make sure there is sufficient disk space available and that this is an absolute path Backup directory Teamdesk can create regularly backups of its database and all other data Such backups are stored in this directory Full text search index Teamdesk keeps the indices for full text search on the file system in specially formatted files and directories The indices can grow quite large Here you should provide sufficient disk space to keep the indices on Also keep in mind that with each search and each save of an item this index is touched We therefore recommend to have a high bandwidth connection between the Teamdesk server and the machine managin
372. s filters and templates The report generation process is shown in Fig 2 14 Datasource Data JasperReports Report Engine a IE N eee SE e T J Database JasperReports Template Figure 2 14 Report generation process The datasource consists of Java code that directly accesses the Teamdesk database plus optional user interface code for defining filters The datasource uses a Teamdesk extension API it is possible to add more datasources without having to change the Teamdesk system itself The output of the datasource is the data for the report in an XML format The data from the datasource is processed by the JasperReports engine based on a template to generate the desired report The template has to match the data from the datasource There are some standard data sources available with the system as it ships The standard data source for running queries is one of them There are others e g for Earned Value diagrams accounting history filters and so on 39 Key concepts 2 6 Configuration basics When you deal with a lot of projects or spaces and different kinds of projects like electronic development software development mechanical engineering or controlling configuration can become complicated To handle large diverse configuration scenarios Track offers space types and configuration inheritance Using these two features you can create diverse and flexible configuration scenarios with little effort 2 6 1 Work
373. s like the reference basket or the next action basket You can look into other peoples baskets Visibility of items is not determined by the basket an item is in but by the space it belongs to 2 1 4 Groups You can organize users in groups Groups help you managing large number of users Users can belong to many groups In most respects groups are treated just like users e g they can be assigned roles they can have an e mail address and they can be assigned to items Group Developers a Group Team RSX Users that belong to a group inherit the roles this group is assigned to Groups can be configured such that access permissions are automatically transferred between members of that group The transfer only takes places for permissions associated with RACI roles If for example a group member is responsible for an item all other members of the same group would have the permissions just as if they themselves were the responsible for that item Item 4633 Item 4638 Originator Tom Manager John Responsible Mary Originator Tom Manager John Responsible Mary With group inheritance Without group inheritance John Tom John Mary and Chris are in the same group It is good practice defining groups and then assigning groups to roles rather than single persons This reduces the maintenance work when people come and go since you have to make the modifications in one place onl
374. s or get them back out of the archive or undelete them You may change other users comments and modify their expense entries You cannot create a project this has to be done by users with system administrator privileges e g the system administrator admin user Table 5 2 RACI selection Selection list Description manager This is not exactly a permission flag It indicates that your name appears in the selection list of managers when modifying or creating items responsible This is not exactly a permission flag It indicates that your name appears in the selection list of responsibles when modifying or creating items consulted This is not exactly a permission flag It indicates that your name appears in the selection list of consulted when modifying or creating items informed This is not exactly a permission flag It indicates that your name appears in the selection list of informed when modifying or creating items 1 Inthe top toolbar select Administration gt Customize gt User roles Alternatively click on the Customize User roles bar in the left navigation area 5 5 Roles and permissions O D TY i AS Cl A Tracke Sysoem Adminigtrator Help Log oT A l iS A Y A Sitios track Jy My settings rT dp My settings Werkipaces Pine p Workspaces Appears in selections for Access only be item types Hidden heads HB Users B groups IB users groups 3 Meeting Cantomize y ros dte S Action hem L
375. s according to some priority scheme like now soon sometimes Severity defines the impact on your business if the item is or is not taken care of like high medium or blocker major minor A start date defines when work on this item should begin An end date defines when this item should be resolved 11 OW In general you should keep the number of properties small since they have to be entered and maintained You can define any other tags you may need 2 3 3 The in basket The in basket serves as a collection of anything that you may be concerned with Typical sources for input are e mails from colleagues or customers phone calls meetings your own ideas documents and actions delegated by others to you You review your in basket regularly for example every morning As long as you have not moved an item from the in basket to either one of the non actionable baskets actionable basket or planned items basket the item stays in your in basket It should be your goal to regularly get your in basket into an empty state Items show in your in basket if you are newly responsible for an item according to the RACI scheme see section 4 4 on page for more information This is the case when an item was just created with you as a responsible or when you have been made responsible for an item that somebody else was responsible for previously 2 3 4 Next actions The next action basket is the cente
376. s and keep it as a template You can then copy this template to a new workspace including all items and attachments but without any change trail The procedure is the same as when you copy a workspace You must be logged in as workspace administrator system administrator or system manager 1 In the top toolbar select Administration gt Workspaces Alternatively click on the Workspaces bar in the left navigation area us der You are about ko copy a workspace Select the associated entities you want to indude Copy X3 Bedros l pE I Ea El El m altel B b e Ed 3 py as sit NECE Copy iban NU Copy with c ira 7 Lony with at Tni F e Cp r x EE 2 ls Y Capi ie gpare specie zustams Its Broject aperdic auxignmaniis jest 3 Select the configuration entities you would like to copy Make sure you include items and attachments Then click on the Copy button You have now created a new workspace based on the configuration settings of an existing workspace The two workspaces are not related to each other in any way 4 1 5 The workspace status As time goes by there will be a growing number of workspaces in the Teamdesk database You can permanently delete workspaces but it is usually better to modify workspace visibility via the workspace status Workspaces have a status which determines its visibility When delivered Teamdesk offers three workspace statuses as shown in the table below Stat
377. s associated with any items a replacement group or user has to be named when removing that group 6 5 Managing organizational units Companies are oftentimes organized in matrix form Typically there are project specific structures and there are business related structures like development departments sales departments and so on Teamdesk permits the system administrators and system managers to create a hierarchical organizational structure and assign users to organizational units 236 6 6 Managing cockpit templates Adding organizational units You can add any number of organizational units You can use the organizational unit property also as a combination of company and organizational unit in case you want to manage users of other companies as well To add organizational units go to the Administration gt Users and groups gt Organizational units menu On the screen that appears you see on the left side the organizational units already available in the system To add a organizational unit type its name into the property directly above the Add button on the left side Then click on the Add button The new organizational unit will appear in the list of organizational units Changing organizational unit name To change organizational unit names go to the Administration gt Users and groups gt Organizational units menu Select the name of that organizational unit by clicking on it in the selection box on the left side On t
378. s associated with changing the estimated remaining budgets and there is no record in the history regarding this change Adding actual work and cost You can assign a budget or planned value to each item in the Teamdesk system for projects where accounting has been enabled Thereafter you can book work time or cost on that item Actual work and cost are summed up and compared to the planned value Your project administrator must have enabled accounting for this project and must have assigned accounts to this project You must have permission to add work and cost to an item that is you have been assigned a role in the project by the project administrator which carries this kind of permission flag 1 Select an item either by typing the item number into the search field or by selecting an item from the item overview 2 Inthe tab area at the bottom of the page select tab Work Costs 6 Teamdesk for team members gt U History Comments 0 O attachments 0 7 Workdog Costs DL watchers 0 Links 0 Q Add ff Delete y tan h Date Changed by Subject Work h Cost Account Description Total actual work 0 00 Hous Total actual cost 0 00 Work Cont Set by Budget Planned value PV 28 00 Hours Constructa Karta Estimated remaining effort Completion Actual expense Estimated remaining effort 3 Click on the Add button A pop up form will appear where you can select an account enter the work to book towards that account an
379. s e mail can automatically create an item in your Teamdesk system You can respond to the customer directly from within the Teamdesk system When the customer responds to this e mail his response is automatically added as a comment to the original item Synchronizing such communication threads is achieved by unique markers in the e mail subject lines As long as the customer does not remove these markers an item will be connected with the customers e mails 2 3 Structuring items non on wou wou At the center of the system are items Items can be tasks mile stones bugs requirements tests or whatever you like Items have properties Items can be organized in spaces and within a space in phases or releases or iterations or sprints Items can be organized hierarchically and they can be organized according to the Getting Things Done method 2 3 1 Tasks items and projects Items are the central objects of Teamdesk Items can be of various types like mile stones bug reports action items Items have a lifecycle and items are contained in spaces Anything you need to take care of in Teamdesk is called an item You can categorize items with item types like task ticket action item requirement improvement or test case Item Figure 2 8 Item types You organize items publicly in spaces and personally in baskets The public structure will be the same for anybody having access
380. sed items Create new items Comment on their own open items Close their own items Different access point Client users access the system via a different access point URL 6 4 Managing groups Teamdesk can be configured such that users can create an account themselves However some supervisory activity is required to grant users permission to view or enter any data to spaces to assign them to organizational units and to activate or deactivate their accounts Access to spaces can be granted to users by the system administrator or system manager for all spaces A space administrator can grant access to the spaces he manages This section deals with managing groups that is creating modifying deactivating and deleting groups and assigning users to them Adding groups The system administrator can add users to the Teamdesk system This is particularly useful if self registration is not enabled To add a user go to the Administration gt Users and groups gt Groups menu entry Then click on the Add group button in the toolbar Enter a group name and save 235 Managing the system Name Oevelopers Users from this group inherit RACI roles reciprocally for Originator Marager Responsible Tip By marking the check boxes you give members of that group a special property Each user in that group can handle items of other members of that group as if they themselves were the author responsible or manager Thus they could a
381. ses that have already been booked and the estimated remaining values If the values booked itself or in conjunction with the estimated remaining planned values exceed the total planned value the bars are shown in red It depends on your role with associated permission whether you can see all expenses or only your own Adding planned values budget If accounting is enabled for a project it is possible to associate a planned value of work and cost or a work and cost budget with an item This permits to monitor items whether they are within the budget or out of it It also permits to monitor item progress by comparing actual work and cost to the planned value This section describes how to add a planned value to an item You must have retrieved the item to which you want to add a planned value This can be done by entering the item number in the search field or by selecting the item from the item overview report You must have been granted edit permissions for this item You will not see an Edit action icon if you do not have proper permissions 65 Teamdesk for team members Accounting must have been enabled for this project by the project or system administrator Otherwise you will not be able to access the Work Costs tab You must have been granted the permission to add and modify budgets for items Otherwise you will see the planned value fields deactivated 1 In the tab area at the bottom of the page select tab Work C
382. setResponsibleID personBean getObjectID The next script changes the manager to the first person that belongs to a group of persons in a specific role roleNew Change the manager to the first person that belongs to a group in role roleNew upon a status import import LMpOLE Import import import import com com com com com com com com aurel aurel aurel aurel aurel aurel aurel aurel change track track track track track track track track beans TWorkItemBean util event IEventHandler errors brrorData j dao DAOFactory dao PersonDAO beans TPersonBean j dao RoleDAO beans TRoleBean TINOOft public class ChangeManager implements IEventHandler def public Map handleEvent Map inputBinding TWorkItemBean worklItemBean PersonDAO personDAO DAOFactory getFactory getPersonDAO inp tBinding get issue RoleDAO roleDAO DAOFactory getFactory getRoleDAO TRoleBean roleBean roleDAO loadByName roleNew if roleBean null List lt TPersonBean gt personsWithExchangeRole personDAO loadByProjectAndRoles workIitemBean getProjectID Customizing Teamdesk roleBean getObjectID if personsWithExchangeRole null amp amp personsWithExchangeRole size gt 0 lIPersonBean personBean TPersonBean personsWithExchangeRole get 0 worklItemBean setOwnerID personBean getObjectID The next script copies an item
383. ship in a specific group In Teamdesk you can control whether a group enforces access right propagation or not 2 1 2 Phases Spaces can be structured along the time axis via phases A phase is some time interval where at the end you can show or deliver a previously defined number of planned items Phases can be organized hierarchically For example if you were working according to the Scrum model you could split up the development of a product into a number of sprints and combine several sprints to form a release The release would be a phase and it would enclose a number of sprints which themselves would be phases Release 2 1 Phase 2 1A Phase 2 1B Phase 2 1 C Phases can have properties associated with them They can have a state like in planning released archived they can have a start and an end date and they can have a time and monetary budget 2 1 3 Spaces and baskets Spaces are for team wide organization of access to items while baskets are for personal organization of items Baskets span all spaces you have access to Baskets are explained in more detail in Structuring items Baskets span all soaces you have access to 25 Key concepts Space B Subspace A1 Sub subspi Input basket Private space Figure 2 3 Spaces and baskets For example the in basket contains all stuff from your private space and any other space you have a role in The same holds true for all other basket
384. shows the number of newly created items per reporting interval day week month Accumulated activity This diagram shows the accumulated number of items that have changed into the selected state within each reporting interval For example if the granularity has been set to monthly and the state to implemented the diagram would show for each month how many items have changed to state implemented during that month and all months before that Interval activity This diagram shows the number of items that have changed into the selected state within each reporting interval For example if the granularity has been set to monthly and the state to implemented the diagram would show for each month how many items have changed to state implemented Number of items in interval This diagram shows the number of items that have been in the selected state at the end of each reporting interval day week month For example if the granularity was selected as weekly and the state selected as closed the diagram would show for each end of a week how many items have been in state closed at this time In the last step you can set a filter which states you want to consider In case of the New items in interva M you cannot choose a state since the state doesn t matter Only the creation date is considered The following figures show some example views STATUS OVER TIME 4 Mew items l E a F npTrumT
385. signed to custom properties of the same type You can assign different lists to the same custom property in different workspaces For example you may have a list of customers defined as a custom property In one workspace you may assign a different customer list to this property than in another one Customizing Teamdesk Workspace specific lists All custom lists can be made available globally or workspace specific Previous versions of Teamdesk had two fixed workspace specific lists project subsystems or components project classes These two lists have been moved to custom properties and workspace specific lists 5 12 2 Managing lists for system properties There are four item properties built into the system that offer you a selection of property values from which you can select one or more These are item type item status priority and severity Managing item states You can add delete and modify the list of available item states For each item type workspace type or workspace you can select which item states will be actually available at the user interface You must be logged in as system manager or system administrator Item states define the position of an item in the workflow Item state names can be assigned as you like The application logic associated with item states is tied to their type flag There are four types of flags as described in the following table Type flag Description O active Open states such as
386. sis Copy workItemBeanCopy getSynopsis save the copied item in db Integer copiedItemID ItemBL copyWorkItem copyContext errorList false look up the linktype ID in Link types config ID column Integer linkTypeID 1001 li Unidirectional outward and bidirectional links 2 Unidirectional inward MsProject Integer linkDirection 1 Lists lt ErrorbData gt Mike rrOrs ItemLinkConfigBL saveltemLink copiedFromItemID copiedItemID linkTypelD linkDirection null null personBean locale null workItemContext if linkErrors null 220 5 17 Managing scripts errorList addAll linkErrors inputBindring put errorList return inputBinding j errorhist s The following script demonstrates how to access custom fields import import import import import pu ubla 6 public Map handleEvent TWorkTtemBean worklItemBean com com com com com aurel aurel aurel aurel aurel track track track track track beans TWorkItemBean util event IEventHandler errors ErrorData admin customize treeConfig field FieldDesignBL beans TFieldBean class ConnectNavision private String CRLF System getProperty line separator Map Strrng Object rnpurBrndreng 4 inputBinding get issue F4 PLZ is a custom field List lt TFieldBean gt fieldBeans FieldDesignBL loadByName PLZ TFieldBean fieldBean fieldBeans getFirst Integer fieldID fieldBea
387. smtzshi gefundener Vergkege 20 Gefitert 20 i E mean men EE er a Electronics Development Eg Tick Maremma Propekisranagement 4 5 gebral Bekina Track 1EEM 3005 13 7 E Hetedesi Support O que Take Maragerme Horrucha und berblick gosir Aminto Track 18 04 2015 13 7 gt UY Serum tout Tracking pes Trik Manageme Den berblick behalten grafo Acirmirinbrados Track 15 04 2015 13 7 LA Tash Manaqement A Qu Tiik Managers Aefzaber Vonglnge und Projekte guia Menus Track 15 04 2015 13 8 Figure 8 1 Accessing the Wiki gt Y Bectronies Development F BS Getrag he Raum Titel Tutta Rearbenter dd gt UJ Serum issue Tracing n ag Task Management Proyektmanagement 4 0 ge ffnet A minatraor Tracke 15 04 201 Wo wien o Task Management Herrschaft und Uberbick geste Administrator Track 15 04 201 4 Projcktmanegemet 40 P Qu Task Management Den berblick behalten ge ffnet Administrator Trcke 15 04 201 e Y Merschaft und berblick 171 ge Task Management Aufgaben Vorg nge und Projekte ge ffnet Administrator Tracke 15 04 201 Y Den berblick behake 1 20 Task Management Beobachten und Steuem godfinet Administrator Tracke 15 04 201 4 Adfgpben Vorg nge u ae Task Management Und was habe ich davon gastar Administrator Trock 15 04 201 4 Beobachtes und Stew 94 Task Management Woran scheitert es gebffnet Administroter Tracke 15 04 201 4 Und was habe kh da P go Tash Management Oe S
388. space types You can centralize the configuration of spaces via workspace types Workspaces inherit their configuration like workflows forms and properties from their workspace type You can thus change the configuration of all workspaces of one workspace type in a single place which would not be possible if you had merely copied a workspace You can still overwrite most configuration settings at the workspace level giving you a maximum in flexibility The following configuration items can be set at the workspace type level Type of space for example Scrum helpdesk Does this space have phases For many applications phases are not required The item types available for items in this space Workflows associated with items in this space Custom properties for items in this space Custom forms for items in this space The states available for items in this space The priorities available for items in this space The severities available for items in this space 2 6 2 Configuration inheritance Configurations can be set at various levels globally item type specific workspace type specific and workspace specific To keep a maximum of flexibility while minimizing the amount of work required for simple use cases Teamdesk employs a hierarchical inheritance system for configuration Particularly for larger installations this significantly enhances consistency and minimizes the time required for creating and maintaining configurations
389. specific or workspace specific Lists for built in system properties Teamdesk has a number of built in system properties that draw their value from a list of options These properties have some logic associated with them for example in the notification and workflow engines The following system properties have simple selection lists associated with them item state priority severity item type The logic is associated with flags or a numeric value that you assign to your list entries The entry name is of no importance to the application logic These lists are always globally system wide available You can limit the set of visible selection values from your list to a subset for each item type and workspace type For example you could have item states open and closed for item type mile stone and more states for item type problem report For more information have a look at section Managing workspace types Lists for custom properties You can define any number of custom lists Custom lists do not have any specific application logic associated with them You can make custom lists available globally or just to a specific workspace Teamdesk offers three types of custom lists simple select multiple select cascaded select The last type the cascaded select can be rather complex Teamdesk comes with implementations for a parent child list a parent and two children list and a parent child grandchild list Custom lists are as
390. ssecesesssssseseenssssssis 157 545 Removing tepon TEMPS tdi dec nn dond 153 gt ROIS aa i ce RE E E EO 153 55 1 POG IOAN editing MOOS MNT T NL 153 O ct 155 So Reset RE S UI O eco eres 156 SSA Resmin acces to ten WCNC ada ene leat 157 5 6 Managing cost centers and ACCOUNMMS cssssssssssecssscsccccccsssssssscensssessnnsssssssssssnooessssseceecessssssessssssssssnnsssssssssassoesssssscceseeseccesssssseseeeennssssses 158 SO ANA 159 SE wena Se NN Nm 159 SWORD ron Eee ele ERN S 161 5 7 3 ASSIGNING automail CONFIQUIATIONS sssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssenenssessnsseessssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssen 162 5 7 4 Automail for unregistered SUM 163 goa use eM dde cH Omm 163 A a OE 164 O TOW Drope mE A E O o PS 00 fuastr ope P 103 3400 Tem properties OE VA 165 SAPE Moe AU TIT A 167 DS MN clare INC COMO si RET TEN 174 S1 CUSCOTYWZIPIG TOLDEIS iio 180 51141 Custom tos actions ana WIS P Em m 180 ANA ac o aora so MR T m 182 A etes ed dimi E E poteet ee ne tes ee T 189 5124 CUSTOMS NV is 189 5 122 Managing lists TOF System POD iran 190 5123 Managing lists tor custom POPE dc 197 o O o PPP O EENE A EE TE 206 5 13 1 Managing workspace STATES sssssssssssesesssscecccccssssssseensssssssassssssssssssoesssssceccecssssssessssssssssnnsssssssssnssessssceceeeesseecessessssseeeennssssse 206 5 13 2 Managing release State cccsssssssssssssssssesssssscceccesssssssessssssssessssssssssnssseessssseceessss
391. sseesssssssesssessssssssssssssssssseceeseeceessssssssseenenesssssse 207 AR a E AE E e I MO RR T 208 o E EEO A E Eton te opt E E E A 208 5 15 Managing WOrkflOWS ssssssessssssssessssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssneeeeseeesseessessessesseeeesseseeseeesssscecceccccceccecceeeeeeees 213 S10 Managing locales ana termino log ascii 215 A o E o A A A E P E E S E EA A ere 217 co sn E E S ent oR SNORT PU RTO RCT ROTO 222 B PRISES ATi het cost On DRIED TURION IU MIND Mp Md MIN DUM 229 o1 SYSTEM Manager TASKS OVES W aiutano oo dedidit adire precipua ari itte rend aiti 230 APP ets RET m 230 e Sal Mim ala Mel E p E m 234 Han e Nm E 239 aa eM Rm 235 ASSIQNINA OSS CMI TIS OY 5 NI Um 235 Limited client user DEFMISSIONS u cccssssssssssesssssssssssssssssssssessssssssssssssssssssesssssssssssssssssssessssssssssssssssssssessssscssssssssssssssssssssssessssssssssessssesen 235 Bissau Nee IR Nm 239 DANON GN I I e M 235 Ga Wanas VC organizatio al US atada asco 236 60 Managing COCKOIE template arica aia Oia 237 66 1 AGding a COCKpiL templada and 2 O02 C ORDEI a COC kot WE TIT modos 238 6 3 ASSIGMING a COCK OIL TEM ID IGS assentire t tier E A E HP ORDRE Ie 239 FGF FTO VIAN hl eas A o Tm 239 6441 Importing tens TOn Elia 239 572 Itnporangi Space Si DS COMU rta 242 6 7 3 Importing data from other Teamdesk instalation cinc 242 SNC Bicis Eo exo o RT 245 68 ExDoOrDumg sdata rom Fear
392. ssible configurations and explains how Teamdesk behaves in a clustered environment Cluster configurations For web applications there are two forms of clusters high availability HA clusters and load balancing clusters With a high availability clusters you can improve the availability of the Teamdesk service for example to ensure 24 7 operation A HA cluster operates by having redundant nodes which are then used to provide service when system components fail The most common size for an HA cluster is two nodes which is the minimum requirement to provide redundancy By using redundancy HA cluster implementations eliminate single points of failure The figure below shows a simple HA cluster with two application servers and a database server The database server is not redundant but it would be possible to use one of the application servers as a redundant database server The router which switches between application server 1 and application server 2 is not shown here Database Server E Applicaton Server r E C DBS 2 E a P EM A Asi EM ac gt The purpose of a load balancing clusters is to distribute a workload evenly over multiple back end nodes Typically the cluster will be configured with multiple redundant load balancing front ends Since each element in a load balancing cluster has to offer full service it can be thought of as an active active HA cluster where all available servers process requests T
393. ssignments 2 2 1 Triggers and conditions You can receive e mail notifications from the Teamdesk system when items you have an interest in are created changed or due You can control under what circumstances you receive such information by means of automail triggers and automail conditions Sending an e mail upon creation or modification of an item is a two stage process as shown in the figure below Automail trigger Automail condition Only checked fields will trigger an Only e mails for items matching e mail in case they are changed these criteria will pass through status priority new priority high 7 u responsible AND manager new responsible Doe ve I4 description Puce OR old end date responsible Doe _ space Susan item type severity Figure 2 6 Automail triggers and automail conditions 29 Key concepts First based on a configurable trigger an e mail notification is triggered Next the item causing the trigger event is examined by the automail condition Only if the item meets the condition an e mail is actually sent In the example above only when the state or the responsible person or the end date changes an e mail is triggered But only if the new priority of the item that is the priority after the item has been changed is high and Susan Doe is either the new or the old responsible an e mail is actually being sent With automail triggers you can define for each action type create edit ch
394. st Manuela Unscheduted Fnecre Keg Closed recently Friedrich Matthias Updated recently Henderson Fred My filters gt Lang Hartmut T Last used PR Mira David Pich Gabriele im unas Un create new ones or ute an exiting one to pet a specific view with a ist of items 2 Select the filter you want to create a permanent link for from the list of filters available Y aL L Fed tems v Reports Administration Y Create item Y My items older Add View filler Y Edi Y Emate B Link Delete Managers items Name Type ELLEN All open items Vew fizer Originator tems Meetings My views Instant view Manage view filters Click on the link icon in the toolbar area 4 Select that you want to create a Maven link In case you have a parametrized filter select that you want to add parameters to the query Anything else doesn t make sense for a Maven link 83 Teamdesk for team members 6 Choose that the user should not stay logged in after running the query Anything else doesn t make sense for a Maven link Create permaneat link EE bern naipata bnk D Mareen changes plug in link Keep user logged in dangerou hiip flecelhost OBO rk encodedQurery_action Siar pr La ESA Sond Doe Tnpennzd DE ASH teen WORE nd Ow OPM IP me phe CCA Pd ke 30 Cancel Copythe link shown to where you want to use it 3 4 14 System properties The table below describes all system
395. state 268 7 5 Observing and managing server state Server status Log messages General information Version 4 0 1 169 Server IP address es 85 214 247 88 Max number of active users S00 500 0 Statistics Number of workspaces main subspaces 16 7 9 Number of tems 2 Number of full users active deactivated 19 19 0 Number of easy users active Geactiveted O 0 0 Number of users currently logged in 0 1 0 N menvatrahor Track System Cluster nodes 88 214 247 88 Database MYSQL 5 1 67 0ubuntuo 10 04 1 IDC driver MySQUAB JDBC Driver mysai connector iaa 5 1 22 Revision bzrrevision id Database ping 10 ms The top left section of the state page displays the actual Teamdesk release number the IP addresses of the server as seen from the Teamdesk application and the maximum number of active users as defined by the license Below you find a list with the users currently logged in and a list of nodes in case of a cluster configuration At the bottom of the left part there is information on the database connected and the delay between the Teamdesk server and the database server Jaen VM memory ees VH max memory 204 Mbyte Java VM total memory 2044 Mbyte AA Java VH used memory 144 Miyie lava VM free memory 1900 Mbyte dera indormatlon lava wien 16 0 30 linia wendor Sun Microsystems Inc Java Home fur iby pem gdk1 5 0 407 pre leva VM version 20 5 b03 Jaya YH vendor Sun Microspiie
396. t Figure 8 5 Creating a Wiki document 283 The Teamdesk Wiki 8 3 Creating document sections To create a new document go into the Wiki navigator and right mouse click on a document or document section node Then click on Add document section e in ict 5 ul Flexctrersicx Dpr ul Serum Dona Tracking Projektma a n Tank Management umma ADI ACL secon i boot fs 1 3 Bea 1 4 Una ES Dele 1 3 War 1 6 Der Figure 8 6 Creating a document section When you are in full edit mode you can create a new document section by assigning a heading format like Heading 1 Heading 2 etc to the section title 8 4 Embedding items You can embed any work item into a document section This is particularly useful if you work with requirements or test specifications and want to keep the requirements separate from the document with informative text It furthermore permits you to reuse items in various documents Embedding existing items To embed an existing item into a document section edit the text of the section Click on the button as shown below to open up the item picker and to embed an existing item ds Quer vy Pus HANA rye HN he nun Aet p e gro B I U A w Ez s Normal Size HN So n Born Planen stellen wir uns vor war wir tun k nnten siehe Doe92 Seite 234 nen eine Aktion nach der anderen an und pr fen ob uns diese Aktionskette dem gew nschten Projektziel n ngt Das Planen selbst ist relat
397. t entityAttribute gt lt entityAttribute name deleted gt lt CDATA N gt lt entityAttribute gt lt referredDependency dependencyld 1004 dependencyEntityType TOptionBean attributeName parentOption gt lt trackEntity gt lt subEntityRelation gt JtrackEntityo lt subEntityRelation gt lt entityExchange gt lt ns2 trackplusExchange gt The following table describes the various entity properties of the XML file Table 5 6 List XML file format Property Description entityld Just a number you can put any number here it is not being used by the import process type TListBean for the list and TOptionBean for an entry in that list repositoryType 0 private 1 space 2 public repository objectlD A number For a list TListBean itis not being used by the import process For an option TOptionBean it is taken as an identifier in case you want to modify any other properties of that option by an import listType 1 for a simple one level list of options name he name of the list The name is visible in the administration user interface 203 Customizing Teamdesk Property Description owner The primary key of the owner of that list from table TPERSON 1 is the admin user deleted Y or N marks this entry as obsolete and you cannot select this option anymore It will still show in items where it had been used CSSSTyle An optional CSS style applied to a row in the item n
398. t Configuration a Authen catoi Anonymous Y Password Public Private Key MU Users A groups Customize ef Test i Actors 4 Enable version control by setting the check box Select one of the supported version control systems in this case Git The list may vary Additional system can be supported via plug ins 5 Select a version control web viewer if you have any installed Teamdeskdirectly supports Git Viewer With a version control web viewer you will be able to go from item directly to associated change sets or files 6 Enter the correct links for your version control web viewer In particular replace the SERVER variable with your server URL Enter the path to the repository as seen from the Teamdeskserver You cannot directly use a remote repository 8 Fill in the authentication information here shown for Git authenticated via a public private key pair In this case copy the private key in OpenSSH format into the provided area If the key is protected via a pass phrase enter it into the pass phrase field Y Attention You need to copy the entire private key file in OpenSSH format there It does not suffice to copy the key itself as you may be used from the authorized_keys file Buthentication rons ansari Y Public Private Key k Privete key BEGIN DSA PRIVATE KEY E Proc Type 4 ENCRYPTED DEK Info DES EDE3 CBC ACE 1540 VERSO EB A E A ha eS ML Sibir Time 7D ju MITSMFheOL OT gohan T RECR SE rica RUE SOON CM
399. t My profile gt My settings A L Amira Svr Cree Bem xe JA Hparitimga Prnjects Automall azsigraments jog M Users groups C Generate iCalendar UBL L fei Customize are tent a Actions b E 0383 ous Hro al Jarabe NENNEN PF 2 Select the tab labeled Access data ta tat Acces ala a Bauriiuler i r Mher selling L gin and nail kr nara apeirian El i a frre E mail address hermannibbosch com a llame and larisa po Last Mamo Hesse Fest Manna Hamari Preferred Largas Engh LE 7 pone Centra European Suie Time Europe prin Ej 3 Enter your new password into the Password field Accords dala Reminder e mails Other ela Login and mal Lis ruri Penna I L l LDAP F acl E r hernannibbosch com 17 4 Enter your new password into the Confirm password field 5 Click on the Save button in the tool bar to save your configuration Your password has been changed The next time you log in you have to use your new password 45 Teamdesk for team members 3 2 3 Activating central password storage LDAP Instead of storing user names and passwords in the Teamdesk database it is possible to use available data from an LDAP compatible directory server You can thus use your Windows or Unix password to access Teamdesk Your Teamdesk administrator must have configured Teamdesk to connect to an LDAP server If this is not the case you will not be able to mark the LDAP ch
400. t e mail submissions from users that are not registered with the system or you want to limit acceptance to users that are known in Teamdesk Teamdesk regularly scans the POP3 input box of the Teamdesk e mail account provided in the upper part of the configuration screen for new messages and either creates new items in the default project you have to configure here or adds submissions as comments to existing items if the subject line starts with a number and that number corresponds to an existing item Keep messages on server Check this if you want to keep messages on your mail server even though your Teamdesk server has read them This can be useful if you access the same mailbox also with an interactive client like Thunderbird or Outlook Accept unknown sender Check this box if you want to permit unknown senders to submit items to the Teamdesk system via e mail The e mail senders address is still checked for compliance with the allowed domain patterns but it is not required any more that the senders e mail address is registered with some user within the Teamdesk system Be careful when you expose Teamdesk to the internet leaving the wildcard domain pattern at the same time which is the default This could result in soamming your Teamdesk installation 258 7 2 Server configuration E mail default project When e mail item submission has been enabled there has to be a project the incoming items can be assigned to This could be some
401. t get a connection you need to run the LoginSample example and add the following line at the beginning of the main method System setProperty javax net debug ss1 232 Administering the server Topics Concepts and tasks for system administrators Server configuration Cluster operation Configuring login page text Observing and managing server state Broadcasting e mails to Teamdesk users Configuring diagnostic messages Data backup Restoring data from backup Switching database systems Non western character sets Using SSL and TLS encryption on e mail and LDAP connections Adding your company logo Configuring Teamdesk with Jenkins Configuring Apache Tomcat 239 Administering the server 7 1 Concepts and tasks for system administrators Some operations like connecting a Teamdesk server to an e mail server providing disk space or performing database backups and restores are reserved to Teamdesk system administrators Teamdesk comes with a built in special user named admin initial password tissi System administration tasks can be categorized as listed below Server configuration usually done once after system installation Setting login page text This may be an ongoing activity to advice users of downtimes or other important information Sending broadcast e mails to notify users of changes or planned down times Monitoring the system state and analyzing the system log Configuring logging
402. tar unter den PM Werkzeugen Done Adminiatroter Trock 15 04 201 gt 4 Weran schetert es T oe Task Management M ssen Sie glibly sein gedfinet Administrator Tracks 15 04 201 4 OerSarumerden a Task Management Planung oe ffnet Adeninintrahor Track 15 04 201 gt iJ M ssen Se gl subig se M Qs Task Management Das Panurgsproisiem Qeeftret Administro Track 15 04 201 4 Parung p o Task Management Drage et impera oretinet Administrar Tracks 15 04 20 n Qs Task Management Atwandsacharrung grofmer Admintrahor Track 15 004 201 n os Task Managerent 24 Frohe Botuhe irr geofteet Adeirisbreher Trock 15 04 201 rm Qn Task Management Planen oder richt panen go lfnet Adrvirudrabor Trock 15 04 201 m os Tnk Management Wer detailer def es denn ser geofteet Admiris Track 15 04 201 Figure 8 2 The Wiki navigator Folders You can organize your Wiki documents in folders Folders just serve to better manage and structure documents 282 8 2 Creating documents El pe pachem F Bearbeiten beenden Herrschaft und berblick 28 vxe95 Denn von anderer Geburt bin ih 23 Da Und Bos anderem Hore und habe enan Roper canum bin ich Wsteher geworden Die VWianmnoen n i l f gen hws giros sondern sod zesiechgndurcihs wandaln an manae Bote Denn im Werto und nicht in dor Hand if Hernsohatt ung Summary 1 Den berblick behalten el ino cp 3 Beobachten und 4 Und was habe D T 5 Woran scheitert ea
403. tching certain criteria namely the filter criteria Sometimes it is desirable to display a list of items in a different way for example in PDF format with complete history or as a graphical summary Teamdesk has a powerful template based reporting engine that can prepare pixel perfect results from lists of items Teamdesk comes with an interactive report design software called JasperReports Studio With this software you can define your own report templates any way you like These templates can be tested on your computer and once you are satisfied with the result uploaded to the server The report template engine even permits you to pre process data using XSLT style sheets The style sheets are part of the template and will be executed on the server prior to executing the formatting part of the report template This permits great flexibility on processing and presenting items This section describes how to use reports based on report templates 3 11 1 Using a Report Template Reports are based on data sources and report templates The data source determines the set of items you will then get in a report The report template defines the layout and visual appearance of the item data Report templates take a list of items and format them in the way defined in the template The examples that come with Teamdesk are templates to present their results in PDF There are examples for reports with and without history grouping localization and even
404. te items from an Excel spread sheet you enter all required data into that sheet on your local computer The first row of the spread sheet contains the field or property names all following rows contain item data one item per row 239 Managing the system Fetal 10 FE y lE 3X 3 H VP o oo EE A DA HJ G A B D E F 6 1 Project lene Type Status Manager Responsible Thile Description Sh Track Militari oped Fit Brad Erambock Jenny Test impor tlie 1 This is plain text discnptian weh no x femmatting a Wie have included some ling breaks lo see E Track Problem report opened Fil Brad Moore Dern Test Import ble Here we howe sore very long tent unformatted y In the b ginrang was the Word and the Word 3 wat wih Ged and ho Word was God Tracks Problem report opened Pi Brad Moore Dherri Teal Import bale 3 zpirxsbrmgsboldelsbrmgs xenmriahcxhem uurnderlngc u srikestrke a througheshspik br i 5 Track Milest n opened Pit Brad Blrambock Jenny Test impor tile 4 Some mare descnptsian here t 87 Track Milestane opened Fil Brad Erambock Jenny Pest import ble 5 o 7 Then you upload the sheet to the Teamdesk server To import items from an Excel sheet go to Administration gt Import On the next screen you will be able to select the Excel file from which you want to import items into the Teamdesk system Teamdesk will upload the Excel file to the server for further analys
405. ted edit permissions for this item or you are permitted to create an item You will not see an Edit action symbol or Create Item menu entry if you do not have proper permissions 1 Fromthe item detail page bottom part click on tab Attachments or follow the procedure to create a new item and also click on tab Attachments in the bottom part of the screen 2 Clickon the Add screenshot button 3 Anew screen appears Using your favourite screen capture program get the screen shot you need Copy it to the clipboard Then press the Paste button on the screen Add a file name 4 Addatitle or brief description for the screenshot 5 Click on Add to add this screenshot as an attachment to this item After this you will be returned to the main screen The screenshot has now been added to the item as an attachment People that are on the watch list of this item will be sent an e mail of this change if notifications are configured accordingly 3 3 9 Moving an item Moving an item means to change its workspace its item type or its visibility Please be aware that item information can become inaccessible when you move an item to another item type or project For example it is possible that some properties do not exist in the new project or item type but they do in the current one Furthermore forms may have been customized differently for different projects and item types also possibly rendering some information inacc
406. tems View fiter Originator tems Click on the link icon in the toolbar area 4 Select that you want to create an Item Navigator link In case you have a parametrized filter select if you want to add parameters to the query If you do not check this the user will be asked for the parameters each time she clicks on the link 6 Choose if the user should stay logged in after running the query Create permaneant link x EE bes naipata brk D Mareen changes plug in link Keep user logged in dangerou htip focalhos B080 Mtrack encoded pery action EREMO Tos leary pot MEd Ob Pw OPM mE ian MVLTRE TCR dk Cancel gt Caution This will enable sorting and grouping but it will also permit the user access to the system under your name Thus this option should only be chosen for the guest user or another user with carefully controlled access restrictions 7 Copy the link shown to where you want to use it 5 3 4 Creating a link for Maven Maven is a widely used build project management system that can automatically generate project documentation Maven can incorporate information from other system and relate them to Maven builds or releases To incorporate information from Teamdesk into Maven you need the Teamdesk Maven changes plug in and install it into your Maven installation Then you can create a Maven changes link and copy it into the proper place in your Maven pom file 5 3 Managing filters The two main tags you have to change a
407. tems are organized in columns You can select the property to use for the columns like status responsible priority etc You can furthermore select which values out of the available values for the columns you want to show like just some statuses or some responsible persons You would use this mode when you work with agile methods as a Scrum board or Kanban board Gantt view mode The Gantt view mode is similar to the Work Breakdown Structure mode but it gives you an additional area where you can graphically see and modify start and end dates work progress and dependencies between items and highlight the critical path You would use this mode when you create or revise project plans 3 5 3 General right area behaviour The right area of the item navigator shows the selected items in various ways These view modes like Gantt view or Agile board view are configurable and share some common behavior Item context actions You can directly act on items shown in the item navigator by right clicking on the item number You can quickly change an item add a comment change the state or responsible and so on with just two mouse clicks 1 Right click on the item number of the item you want to change A context menu opens t 3 10 Propel ra xh T A Hi s Ed amp n 333 Copy is A Move Re Change Status E Hi Set Private Auld expense Departs 88 3 5 Item navigator 2 Choose the action you like You will be directly gui
408. tering the item number in the search field or by selecting the item from the overview report or by creating a new item You must have been granted permissions to modify the watch list for this item 1 On the item detail page in the bottom part of the screen select tab Watchers History Lint 11 AU chiens 31 Wi tarde ost Watchers Verte 2 Toadd a consulted click on the Add Consulted button To add an informed click on button Add Informed To add yourself in these roles click on Add me Unless you select Add me a selection box appears Mark the users you want to add to the list 4 Click on the Add button to finalize the operation To remove users from the lists mark them with the associated check box Then click on the Delete button to remove these users from the list The selected users have been added to or removed from the consulted and or informed list All changes to items will be passed to the notification triggers and filters for these roles If the trigger fires and the filter lets the item pass the users on the consulted and informed lists are notified of changes to the item 3 3 13 Attaching an item to a parent Items can be organized hierarchically You can either create a child item for an existing item or you can attach an item as a child to an existing parent item This sections describes how to attach an item to a parent item You must have chosen an item and you must be in edit mode for
409. that you have permission to see and that have been closed recently Recently is defined in your user profile with the parameter named days lead Added recently all items that you have permission to see and that have been added recently Recently is defined in your user profile with the parameter named days lead Updated recently all items that you have permission to see and that have been modified recently Recently is defined in your user profile with the parameter named days lead Y ail Ard item ni All items Dutstaedirsg My Sema Um the manager Tim respanssibig Ta the segineter There are additional predefined views in the right item navigator area called baskets You can find more information on these views at Tasks Items and Projects A third set of predefined views is accessible from cockpit views You can find more information on this topic at Working with the Cockpit 1 ege Fis Click on the Find items button in the top toolbar area 2 Select the desired predefined view Teamdesk for team members You will get the corresponding set of items displayed in the item navigator Related Links Tasks Items and Projects on page 31 Items are the central objects of Teamdesk Items can be of various types like mile stones bug reports action items Items have a lifecycle and items are contained in spaces Working with the Cockpit on page 100 Teamdesk provides special
410. the date field value of their descendants bottom up This is the standard behavior for the system fields Start date and End date Setting the hierarchical behavior to Validate divergence enforces that the date field value of parent items is compared with the date field value of their descendants Any violation is marked but not prohibited This is the standard behavior for the system fields Target start date and Target end date At the user interface a date property would appear as shown below 06 27 2014 Integer Integer properties can contain integer numbers negative or positive You can define a default value a minimum and maximum value The minimum value needs to be less than the maximum value if any is defined Furthermore the default value needs to be larger or equal to the minimum and less than or equal to the maximum value At the user interface this property appears as shown below Customizing Teamdesk No of Users I Double Double properties can contain floating point numbers negative or positive You can define a default value a minimum and maximum value The minimum value needs to be less than the maximum value if any is defined Furthermore the default value needs to be larger or equal to the minimum and less than or equal to the maximum value At the user interface this property appears as shown below Check box Check box properties can be marked or unmarked Attribute
411. the resources into your Teamdesk system Automated Loading of Resources Rather than manually updating all required resources you can put them into specific files and locations on disk If Teamdesk finds resource files there during system start up it will load them into the database You need to provide the following structure TRACKPLUS HOME resources MyApplicationResources properties TRACKPLUS HOME resources MyApplicationResources en properties TRACKPLUS HOME resources MyApplicationResources de properties and so on for other languages The system lists properties item types etc you need to place into the following files TRACKPLUS HOME resources MyBoxResources properties TRACKPLUS HOME resources MyBoxResources en properties TRACKPLUS HOME resources MyBoxResources de properties and so on for other languages 5 17 Managing scripts You can add Groovy a Java scripting language scripts to Teamdeskthat can be attached to workflow transitions With such scripts you can for example automatically change the responsible person based on a state change or perform checks before an item is saved To add or edit scripts go to Administration gt Customize gt Scripts Cockpit Browse workspaces Find items e Reports Admiristrabon w Create tem Sy My settings o Add 2o 4M My settings Workspaces Class name Workspaces Soret type w a UI Users amp groups Customize T Manage view filters LH Actions Report templates Ff Manage vie
412. the selection in the left box is changed the selection in the right box changes as well Another example would be a selection for an operating system Windows Linux Solaris on the left and the version 98 ME XP Vista Redhat Debian SuSE on the right G Note Even though the selection appears as two properties this will be a single property in the database To search for this in TOLPlus you would search for Customer BoschttBenzin The property name is shown as part of the tool tip in case your label is different from the property name Cascading select parent children Cascading select list of type parent children associate two lists of child items with a single entry in the parent item list The first child has no dependence on the second child For example if the parent item list would contain car models the first child list could contain engine sizes available for this model and the second child list could contain colours available for this model Different models might be offered with different engine sizes and colors Note You must have defined already a list of this type before you start defining a item property of this type Otherwise you may not be able to complete the definition of an property of this type In our example we have defined a generic list Parent Children with three parent Parent 1 Parent 2 and Parent 3 Each parent item has two lists with a number of child items associated with it For example Parent 1 h
413. the term You would type project 4management This will make items with the term project appear more relevant You can also boost Phrase Terms as in the example project management 4 TOL By default the boost factor is 1 Although the boost factor must be positive it can be less than 1 e g 0 2 Boolean Operators Boolean operators allow terms to be combined through logic operators TOL supports AND OR NOT and as Boolean operators Note Boolean operators must be ALL CAPS OR The OR operator is the default conjunction operator This means that if there is no Boolean operator between two terms the OR operator is used The OR operator links two terms and finds a matching item if either of the terms exist in an item This is equivalent to a union using sets The symbol can be used in place of the word OR To search for items that contain either project management or just project use the query project management project or project management OR project AND The AND operator matches items where both terms exist anywhere in the text of a single item This is equivalent to an intersection using sets The symbol amp amp can be used in place of the word AND To search for items that contain project management and TOLplus new use the query project management AND TQLplus new Operator The or required operator requires that the term after the symbol exist somewhere in a the
414. therefore can just give some examples and outline the general procedures hoping that this might be helpful enough to get you started If you have no idea using the Teamdesk default configuration should be a pretty good start You can always change the process later on if you feel that the default process model of Teamdesk does not suit your needs If you cannot get started on this Teamdesk provides process consulting on various levels through its consultant network For example we would discuss your needs and project environment and would supply a project manual a configuration manual and a Teamdesk configuration exactly matching your requirements 5 2 Configuration scenarios This section gives examples of configuration scenarios pertaining to roles and permissions item types and workflows Customers and developers A common scenario is to grant customers access to the system but in a way that they only see their own entries Developers should be able to see all entries including internally generated tasks There are three ways to accomplish this setup in Teamdesk 1 Customers are assigned to role Extern This way they can only see their own items A disadvantage may be that entries from this customers are not grouped If there are several people associated with this customer each can only see his own entries but not those of his peers from the same company If each customer is granted a collective account this usually poses no p
415. this item You can get there by either creating a new item or by editing an existing one 1 Click on the toolbar icon labeled Choose Parent 2 Anew window opens You can now define a filter by project and subsystem or directly enter the item number of the parent item Click on the Search button A list with items matching the filter appears 4 Select one of this list as the new parent item Click on the item you want to add as a parent item to finish this operation Teamdesk for team members You have made the current item a child item to the chosen parent item In the item overview you will see this structural dependence You will not be able to close a parent item before you have not closed all child items 3 3 14 Creating a child item Items can be organized hierarchically You can either create a child item for an existing item or you can attach an item as a child to an existing parent item This sections describes how to create a child item from an existing item You must have chosen an item and you see the item overview 1 Click on the toolbar icon labeled Add Child 2 Onthe screen that appears select the desired project and item type The default will be your last selection Mark the check box if you want to keep this item hidden from anybody else This will mark your new item as private it will really only be visible to yourself You can change this to a public item any time later on if you wish Click the
416. this type will then be mapped to one of those types you keep Table 5 4 Ddefault item types Item type Description Problem report Somebody has a problem with something rather unspecified May be a know how problem a user interface problem or a bug Task In a well managed project there exists a work breakdown structure with many tasks or work packages It is very tedious for a project manager to keep track of the state of such task Using this list and having each SRESPONSIBLE take care of the state of her work package the project manager can without a lot of effort obtain the actual state of his project and look for instance for late packages Meeting In a well managed project there exists a work breakdown structure with many work packages It is very tedious for a project manager to keep track of the state of such work packages Using this list and having each SRESPONSIBLE take care of the state of her work package the project manager can without a lot of effort obtain the actual state of his project and look for instance for late packages Requirement A list with requirements This permits for requirement engineering and tracing Since attachments can be added to each item you can add figures source code or other documents to a requirement Action item There may be use for a rather unspecific list of action items at the project management level Document A document is used for the Wiki It is essentially a single Wiki page and can b
417. ties to show how to group and sort and so on Reports are being used to create any conceivable kind of representation of a set of items Reports are based on filters like queries but reports can also employ their own filter engine Thus reports are not limited to filters that 37 Key concepts filter on actual item properties but they can filter on any information in the Teamdesk database Report output formats can be PDF Word Excel HTML and others 2 5 1 The item navigator To work with a set of items you use the item navigator Next to the cockpit it is the central location from where you do most of your work The item navigator consists of two main areas The navigation area The item area A Track System Administrar Help Logoff track Version 4 1 2 37 Enterprise 2014 Steinbeis Trackplus Figure 2 12 Item navigator structure The navigation area is located on the left and permits you to define the item filter used to show items in the item area It has two modes of operation accessible via the buttons in the lower left corner In the first mode you apply a regular item filter In the second mode you perform a sub filtering on the results of the first filter In both modes you can drag and drop items to nodes in the navigation area to change baskets states releases and other properties The item area on the right also offers you different modes You can select between a flat view a hierarchical view
418. tion where you need to take care of them You must be logged in as space administrator system manager or system administrator 1 In the top toolbar select Administration gt Workspaces Alternatively click on the Workspaces bar in the left navigation area Teamdesk for space administrators 2 Select a workspace in the leftmost navigation area 3 In the second navigation area click on the node labeled Lists level visible only in these workspaces Use the tree on the left to add new lists or list entries 4 n the second navigation column click on Global lists if you want to edit a list accessible to all workspaces or select a workspace with the list you want to edit Then click on the Edit button in the toolbar or use the context menu 5 Give a name to the new list or modify the existing one Optionally add a brief description for book keeping purposes Aca DL th arco E l Genera 41 Operating Systems Here you can configure selection lists Theres Me Aaii Rees Urin state priority and Rem types You can add a f feine Wire A R p E 6 Select the node to which you want to add list entries or edit an existing entry Use the context menu to add or edit an entry 132 4 5 Assigning accounts Ga Add i to a Qi Gou Es Name aj Statue 5 Priority of Severity pz Rem type TON ada EZ Works vum D se Edit global lat He Delete global iist Copy global list D Export globa
419. tivity 36 actual cost add 67 actual work add 67 add attachment 58 58 comment 57 consulted 61 custom list 197 expense 67 informed 61 item link 63 iteration 128 parent item 61 phase 128 planned value 65 release 128 sprint 128 work 67 add role 153 address server url 265 agile board 94 agile board view mode 87 Apache Tomcat 278 Apache web server 278 arrange cockpit tiles 101 artifact 31 assign access rights 127 cockpit 237 custom form 182 form 182 assign automail 162 assign role 127 attachment add 58 58 attachments copy 62 automail filter 96 trigger 96 turn off 50 unregistered submitter 163 automail assignment workspace default 134 automail condition 29 97 161 automail trigger 29 96 159 B bar chart 117 base address 265 basket 71 baskets 86 budget 65 bug tracking 16 16 bulk operation 91 92 buttons enabled 68 C calendar 35 35 cascaded select 189 cascading select 171 172 173 certificate SSL273 TES ES change budget 66 dates 60 item state 60 item workspace 59 planned value 66 change item type 58 change password 45 change project item 58 charts 117 child item create 62 class 131 classes 189 cockpit layout 101 cockpit template workspace specific 135 comment add 57 rich text 54 condition for automail 161 configuration inheritance 40 configure agile board 94 automail 98 automail condition 97 automail trigger 96 CSV character 46 48 e mail format 48 notification level 4
420. to an item type such as bug report action item mile stone and whether you want to treat this item as a private or public item If you mark an item as private nobody other than you will ever be able to see it It will not show in any reports except your own This way it is possible to keep your private tasks separated from tasks others may have a legitimate interest in You can always switch item visibility later on between public and private In the second step you fill in all the details of the item just created The form you are using for this may have been customized by your system administrator Once you have filled in the required information you save the item Unless you have marked the item as private others may get an e mail notification that this item has been created Who will be informed depends on the automail trigger and filter settings of other users A common configuration is to receive notifications as manager responsible consulted and informed 3 3 4 Creating an item This section describes how to create an item from scratch You must have permission to create items in at least one project Otherwise you will not see the Create Item toolbar icon and menu entry 1 Click on the Create Item button in the top toolbar area 54 3 3 Working with items 2 Onthe screen that appears select the desired project and item type The default will be your last selection Mark the check box if you want to
421. to make progress on your own items It is quite common that a number of team members are in the informed role for an item As an informed you will be able to read all item information but you cannot alter the item You can use the consulted and informed roles to selectively grant people access to items they otherwise would have no permission for le Project planning______ A AR ca Preparing technical doc A R t_ Minutes of meetings AR Negotiate with customer A Cc fR Support customer______ A R C Preparinglegalwork Ja Rf Finalizing contract AR 1 The RACI matrix defines for each action or item who assumes what role You should not have any row without an R and an A ideally each row should have exactly one R and one A If there are too many R in any one column you might have a bottleneck there If you have a lot of and C in your matrix you may distribute too much information to people that do not really need it Important RACI roles are independent of the space related role model Space related roles pertain to a space RACI roles are item specific you carry that role for specific items 2 1 8 Folders You use folders to organize queries documents reports automail conditions and automail triggers Over time you could have a larger number of queries documents reports and automail settings you have found useful You can sh
422. to the associated spaces The personal organization is individual to each user The personal organization structure follows the principles set forth by David Allen in the Getting Things Done GTD method Key concepts Items In basket non actionable Incubator actionable Planned items Reference waiting Figure 2 9 Getting things done workflow o Y Y Cockqit Betreettt voca o pce Tham fumigata we FILTERS E Agia Board 2 WORKSPACES Administrator T T FILTERS V MRSONAL BABET E Administrano E B TST 1 Ba T pe T Ao Penned fom TST 2 Fund EE Next actions en E Administratn jj ana amp T5T 3 Keil Ceres tin 4 pem Woman 8 TETA Kalla E Adenirietrann B Aire amp TET 5 Deci All items you have newly been made responsible for are collected in your personal in basket In Teamdesk you find the in basket as any other basket in the left area of the item navigator You should regularly review all items in your in basket There are three possible outcomes from this analysis An item is actionable that is to obtain the desired outcome triggered by this item you have to do something An item is non actionable you may just have to file it away for later use or reference An item requires a sequence of actions to be taken care of possibly involving many people and stretching over 4 Y a longer period of time As a result from the analysis process you create or mod
423. to these groups 3 Inthe top toolbar select Administration gt Workspaces Add a workspace selecting a workspace type close to your application scenario 4 Optional Forr the new workspace click on the Assign roles entry in the second navigation column Select the oroject administrator role in the third navigation tree Drag users from the list on the right to the list area left of it You are now ready to create your first items and work with the application 1 5 Taking Teamdesk for a test drive You have Teamdesk installed and you know how to access the login page You have either gotten a login name from your Teamdesk administrator or you yourself have the administrator password and can log in under the admin user name Now you can take Teamdesk for a test drive The following steps demonstrate how to create find and modify items 1 Log into the system by pointing your browser to http localhost teamdesk or http localhost 8080 teamdesk if the server is running or your own computer If the server is running on a different machine you need to enter that machines name instead of localhost e g http www trackplus org teamdesk 2 Inthe top toolbar click on the big button Create item 3 Select Task as the item type CREATE NEW ITEM STEP 1 OF 2 fuat Project Test Project T Issue Type Task AJ 4 On the form that appears fill in a title and optionally an end date Getting started i 4
424. to where you want to use it 5 4 Managing report templates 5 4 1 Reports are based on data sources and report templates The data source determines the set of items you will get in a report The report template defines the layout and visual appearance of the item data Sometimes it is desirable to display a list of items in a different way for example in PDF format with complete history or as a graphical summary Teamdesk has a powerful template based reporting engine that can prepare pixel perfect results from lists of items Teamdesk comes with an interactive report design software called JasperReports Studio With this software you can define your own report templates any way you like These templates can be tested on your computer and once you are satisfied with the result uploaded to the server The report template engine even permits you to pre process data using XSLT style sheets The style sheets are part of the template and will be executed on the server prior to executing the formatting part of the report template This permits great flexibility on processing and presenting items Using a report template You create a report by using a report template A report template can have its own filter configuration or may use the filtered set of items from the item navigator Report templates take a list of items and format them in the way defined in the template Most examples that come with Teamdesk are templates for PDF output The
425. tors and global filters provided by the system administrator The basket view filters pertain to your personal organization of items according to the Getting Things Done method Have a look at Tasks Items and Projects for more information Related Links Tasks Items and Projects on page 31 Items are the central objects of Teamdesk Items can be of various types like mile stones bug reports action items Items have a lifecycle and items are contained in spaces Finding Items on page 69 A Teamdesk database may contain thousands of items even for a single project Teamdesk permits you to select subsets of items by means of views and display them in an item navigator This way you only see those items you are interested in 3 5 2 Navigator right area modes The item navigator right area can be viewed in different modes depending on whether you want to see a standard work breakdown structure a simple hierarchical view across projects or a detailed view with history comments and full descriptions There is a choice of operating modes for the right area You can switch between them with the buttons in the upper right corner of the item navigator screen flat list mode grid based tree view mode grid based hierarchical work breakdown structure view mode grid based agile board view mode Gantt view mode X Track System Administrator Help Logo track LD Actieew L1 Tree view yf liny Hat bi Sh
426. tration gt Customize gt ltem properties Alternatively click on the Customize Item properties bar in the left navigation area Customizing Teamdesk OQ Addamnbum e oe E oil fk Nm O fishes attribubes 79 Custom atitribubes I anal jm CRMContat S prut jn Olot low IC Partrcparta pr Ben type specific config NE Workspace type specific attribute config 3 ES Workspace La Add Jy My settings a sanos stribute configuration l Workspaces ifiguration HA Users A groups E Name Customize H d Manage fibers i Actions t Report templates de Manegeserver gt Wy user roles Cost centers amp accounts 2 Anew screen appears consisting of a tree structure on the left and a context dependent edit area on the right The tree structure depends on whether your are logged in as system administrator or project administrator In the tree click on the property you want to modify In the example shown we will change the label and behaviour of system property EndDate on a global level Aarbu A sae Y surco aantute configurations System attributes v AccomLevel am Archive evel 1 Bulle I Comment Defaut Gate Y empty now P Date P Create date plus X days 3 Change the label and tool tip of the system property to Due date Set the default end date behaviour to using the create date plus seven days Thus when you create an item the end date will be f
427. ts like PDF Word Excel PowerPoint HTML XML pure text or OpenOffice documents System filter and your filters To display a specific collection of items you either apply predefined views you click on links in cockpit views or you use the full text search box Teamdesk will make sure you will only see items that you have been authorized to see regardless of the filter settings You can envision the procedure to get a set of items from the Teamdesk database as two stage filtering process At the filter input there are all items in the database which can amount to several hundred thousand When you apply a filter these items have to first pass the system filter The system filter makes sure you will only be able to see items you are authorized to see For example you will never be able to see items that have been marked private by another person or that belong to a project where you have no read permission In the second stage the remaining items have to pass your view filter Here you can define all kinds of criteria to restrict the result to those items you are interested in at that moment All items in database System filter All items may read My filter Result 70 3 4 Finding items You cannot manipulate the system filter in any other way than obtaining access rights via roles in projects You can however create as many personal view filters as you like and save them for later use Some cockpit views provide filters and t
428. ts or actions fire a message to you in a specific role If the message passes your automail conditions you will receive the message There are two types of actions that can trigger a message create actions and edit actions You can define automail triggers separately for both types of actions You must be logged in as system manager or system administrator Customizing Teamdesk 1 In the top toolbar select Administration gt Customize gt Automail Alternatively click on the Customize Automail bar in the left navigation area Cockpit Brower weoricipacns Fidi Era Reports Administration w Greets fem Jy My tongs Jy My settings Werkapac s J Anma Green JO Workapaces DE thers a groups aD adm triggers HO Users amp groups T iomad tition 2 Cibona rj nit A Daioni T y CT erage Fiters Report imps Er Que roles 2 Click on Automail trigger in the next navigation column 3 Toaddatrigger click on the Add button in the toolbar To edit a trigger select it in the right grid area and then use either the context menu or the toolbar button labeled Edit Restriction Those triggers that have been provided by a system administrator are designated as type System and are visible to all system users Other users can copy them to their private area and modify them there Regular users cannot directly modify a system trigger 4 Markthe check boxes as you like The first row pertains to when someb
429. type assignment in the toolbar By dragging item types from one column to the other you can make item types available or restrict access to them If you have no item types in the very right column all item types will be available to that role 5 5 Roles and permissions eum A Tack System Ao UND Heto Log off 9 2 s A Cockpit Severe voriespacm Ard term v roe ty ot Cer tem track Dy y seras rai lp Ed Wnrktagpaces Rome Apoears in tetections for Access Only to kem types Hedden Pieds DD Users A groups Them type assignments for role Consulted z x Wee A Customise Here you can restrict access of a role to certain Rem types Y no Rem types are defined e Y Manage fears BES for access there are no restrictions Le all em types may be accessed by this role Drag 7 an item type with your mouse to the corresponding list Repor templates m mue usce T Cost centers amp accounts f Problembencht E ma B Anm T dn Problem Report Gi Meeting v Link types E Mm Custom forms a e Custom ficiis gt v List Syon states formed TT Workspace types BE Widows Done Em Locale editor ts ody any WU jJ Mame e 3 When you are done click on the Done button in the lower right corner of the configuration pop up window You have now restricted access to some item types for users carrying this role in a workspace 5 5 4 Restricting access to item fields You can hide fields from users and make
430. u should have been redirected to the server administration page Select the Outgoing e mail tab Enter all required fields in thee same way you did it for your standard e mail client e g Outlook or Thunderbird Save your configuration by clicking on the Save button in the small toolbar License Owtgoing e mail Incoming e mail Puli text search LOAP ASSO Other SMTP user name Track system send from e Sistem e mail adore traclusGyo rDomain com e SMTP server data SMTP security connection 4 None TLS if avalabie TLS SSL o SMTP authentication The outgoing mail server SMTP requires M o authentication SMTP authentication mode SMTP user password o Mailbox ser password Connect to mail server before send gt m Geer More options 4 Optional Test the e mail connection by entering your personal e mail address and clicking on the Test button at the bottom Related Links haven t installed anything yet have Teamdesk installed what now 1 4 Adding users and workspaces 1 4 Adding users and workspaces Before you or other people can start working with the system you must have some user accounts and at least one project or workspace Log in as administrator The user name is admin the password is tissi 1 In the top toolbar selectAdministration gt Users and groups gt Users 2 Add one or two users with login name password e mail first and last name Optionally create a group and assign users
431. ual to or below the ceiling user level For a user beginning to work with Teamdesk not all functionality might be required To reduce user interface complexity you assign users to a user level with reduced functionality In the top toolbar select Administration Customize User Levels You will see a matrix with user levels and associated interface elements The check box permits you to disable or enable a user interface element There are some pre defined user levels as shown below 5 10 Item properties Table 5 3 Pre defined user levels Name Description Client user Reduced functionality can only create items and see his own items No reports no project specific cockpit now access to workflows Full user Complete functionality except for system management and administration functions System manager Complete functionality except for server configuration options System administrator Complete functionality Custom user levels overwrite the full user Thus if a custom user level is removed settings are taken from the full user settings You assign the ceiling user levels in the user administration section of the application see Managing regular users 2 18 Iter properties Items have properties There are several system properties predefined which you can modify for example change their label or set default values Beyond these pre defined properties you can define custom properties There are a number of
432. ur website or from the Amazon Kindle shop 1 2 Installing Teamdesk Unless a server is provided to you you need to install Teamdesk on your own personal computer or on another computer Use the Windows installer for an easy installation To install Teamdesk on Unix based operating systems or with a MySQL Oracle MS SSQL Server or DB2 database follow the Teamdesk Installation Guide You can install the Teamdesk server on any computer system supporting Java 7 or up It runs on all Windows operating systems Linux Mac OS X Solaris and others 1 3 First login and e mail setup You or somebody else has installed Teamdesk on your computer or on a server Before you can use Teamdesk you need to get a license key and need to set up your servers e mail connection If you want to use the automail feature of Teamdesk you need to have access to an SMTP server For test purposes you Can use a personal account 1 Usingyouweb browser go to the login page of your new Teamdesk installation Thisishttp localhost teamdesk or http localhost 8080 teamdesk if you installed it on your local computer If you installed it on a server you need to enter the servers name or ip number instead of localhost Getting started o nM 2 T A rr a lol 2 Login as administrator The user name is admin the password is tissi A window will appear so that you can get the free license key Enter your name and e mail address and submit 3 Yo
433. urden of indexing may be large if a complete re index is forced during system startup We recommend to turn full text search on since it assists in retrieving items Index attachments Here you can enable or disable to also the indexing of attachments Disabling this is useful if you have limited disk space available or you want to reduce the computational burden of the server We recommend to leave the indexing of attachments enabled Index on startup When this box is checked a complete index is performed from scratch during system startup This can take some time minutes to hours depending on the number of items and attachments in the database During the indexing procedure full text search will not work It is recommended to not do an automatic reindex on each server startup It usually does suffice to do a reindex every half year or so It is best to disable access to the system during the reindex process Lucene analyzer Teamdesk uses the Lucene full text indexing and query engine When building the index it is usually useful to keep out words that nobody usually looks for and that occur often For example in the English language words like 259 Administering the server pa the does do and so on would consume a lot of indexing space while not giving any useful results when querying for them For this purpose there are different analyzers available that focus indexing on those text parts that are real
434. us name Description in progress These workspaces are open to the entire functionality the system offers Items can be created and changed with no restrictions on hold These workspaces will not accept new items and will not permit to modify existing items However all existing information remains visible as well as the workspaces themselves 4 2 Managing team members Status name Description archived These workspaces will not accept new items and will not permit to modify existing items Furthermore they are effectively hidden with all their information Item information is inaccessible You can change the names and the semantics ofthese statuses via Administration gt Customize gt System statuses You can also add new statuses there Each status has a type flag which determines the availability of a workspace The values and logic for each type flag is described in the following table Type flag name Description active Workspaces with this status type flag are open to the entire functionality the system offers Items can be created and changed with no restrictions inactive Workspaces with this status type flag will not accept new items and will not permit to modify existing items However all existing information remains visible as well as the workspaces themselves closed Workspaces with this status type flag will not accept new items and will not permit to modify existing items Furthermore they are effectively hidden
435. use the default priorities and severities The following states are being used opened analyzed assigned suspended testing closed processing Customizing Teamdesk Item type access should be constrained to the specific roles for example marketing shall only be able to see mile stones and requests for enhancements developers should be able to see everything There should be reasonably open workflows configured In general any state transition shall be possible with a few exceptions You should ask yourself not who should be able to carry out this transition but rather is there any reason that not anybody could carry out this transition This will lead to a more practical workflow than if you just go ahead and consider the good case not taking into account the many exceptions that might happen in the course of a project 5 3 Managing filters You can define any number of filters and reuse them for selection a set of items You can modify these filters anytime later on and publish them so that others can use them You can create parametrized filters that predefine most conditions and ask for one or more parameters when they are being used 5 3 1 Defining a filter 1 Select menu Find items gt Manage filters Y T los Outstandeng My items I m the manager T Last used tamas Ld e Amino Y Create amp em v we ite iy Dexcvate Juse iem Nace Mimiristratey Tracks System Bojani Adrian Barbe Lena
436. ust identification is possible if you have the Teamdesk item numbers included in your Excel sheet If that is not possible you can define a combination of identifier columns which should uniquely identify each item For example you can set the originator project and title combined as a unique identifier This implies that these three fields are not modified between re imports and that their combination is unique If a matching item is not found a new item is created If a matching item is found the changes from the non identifying columns will be applied 4 Each row is validated against the regular field validators before it is being added just like it would when you create an item from the web interface If all validations described above succeed the row will be saved as a new item in the Teamdesk database Conflict Resolution When importing data from an Excel sheet there can be conflicts for example when Teamdesk recognizes an Excel row as an existing item but there is conflicting data within that item between the Excel version and the Teamdesk item version If inside the Excel sheet there is no column for the last edit date there is no usable history data available and all fields that have been changed in either Teamdesk or Excel can be in conflict If in Excel there is data for the last edit date Teamdesk can perform some intelligent conflict handling because it can take into account the temporal order in which changes happened Th
437. ustem formes Po Wornkapas y 2 Inthe second navigation column click on Global lists and then on Priority You can now add severity delete severities or modify them A Tracke System Administrator Help Log off o ly Y 1L Li Cockpit Browse workspaces Ard rem Reports Admnetaten v Create hem v track Lu My senos Q ma o 2 Werepaces 4 Goa tes Name kon icon file Style Typeflag ii Users groups y Na miter e mincr ong Test text Warning level 1 Quom major A major eng Test text Warning level 2 ii Dora e nonr ong Test text warning level 3 Report templetes A major Vp User roles S arg You can assign an icon 16 x 16 px GIF or PNG format to each entry You can furthermore assign a CSS style to each entry which will be used to format items in the item navigator For example you could use various shades of red as background color to illustrate the urgency of an item You can drag entries in the list on the right to another position The entries will be offered at the user interface in the same order as shown in the grid here 5 12 Custom selection lists Y Attention When you rename an entry the change may not be reflected at the user interface This happens when you have specific localizations for the selection entries which is the case for all predefined entries In this case the localized values will be shown and not the label you define here Managing item types You can distinguish your items by item type like cust
438. ustom property 170 171 multiple 189 simple 189 selection 189 selection list 197 199 201 set operation 91 severity 194 short text 167 sibling item create 62 simple select 170 171 189 Single Sign On 278 Space 24 Spaces and baskets 25 sprint add 128 delete 129 LAL SSL certificate 273 SSO 278 SSPI 278 standard layout 89 start date 60 state account 208 for item 190 state flag release 207 workspace 206 status phase 130 release 130 workspace 126 status type flag phase 130 release 130 workspace 126 sub filtering 86 sub phase 128 substitute 52 subsystem 131 189 Subversion link to 64 support 16 SVN 136 system property 165 T tabs 100 tags 189 task 31 task management 16 16 template Cockpit 237 e mail 222 report 116 139 150 132 132 132 133 workspace 126 threads 31 Thunderbird iCalendar 99 time add 67 time sheet 64 TESTS 274 tlx 285 287 Tomcat 278 TOL filter 69 TOLPlus filter 69 track COSt 64 time 64 work 64 TRACKPLUS HOME 264 trash can 35 tree filter 69 tree view mode 87 trigger 159 type flag for item state 190 U unregistered submitter automail 163 urgency 193 user assign role 127 e mail 44 login name 44 password 44 preferred locale 44 registration 44 user picker 173 174 V version control CVS 140 Git 138 linking to 64 Subversion 136 SVN 136 view mode agile board 87 Gantt diagram 87 hierarchical 87 tree 87 work breakdown structure 87 views 100 W
439. ustomize T Manage filters T Manage iter Regest templates Wa Dur roles T Coat center A accounts KT ID 2 Toadd a link type click on the Add button in the toolbar To edit a link type select it in the right grid area and then use either the context menu or the toolbar button labeled Edit r1 Edit Link type Outward link description test case for leeard link description verified by Type of ink Generic linktype M Link direction Bidirecti nal Riter abel for including the outward linked test cases for these sues lal tems ex duplicates of these items Filter label for including the inward linked verified by these issues tems ex Guphcated by these items For more background on item linking see Item linking The filter expression labels are extensions to the label Include all items which are for example Include all items which are duplicates of these items The term these items refers to the items selected by the rest of the filter 3 Save your link type You can now use your link type to connect items that would otherwise not be related to each other 5 9 Customizing the User Interface To simplify the user interface you can define user levels For each user level you define which user interface elements menu elements navigation areas etc are available As an administrator you can assign each user a ceiling user level The user can select his preferred level from any level eq
440. vated It always shows in the first column To activate the bulk selection column click on the Choose columns button on the top right You can use this feature for check lists that need to be processed repeatedly for simple workflows that occur again and again for test plans that are copied to test protocols and so on A standard way using this feature is to create a project with item templates for example for check lists and copy them as a set to the actual project they are being used in Another approach would be to keep the template in a separate item type and change the item type during the copy process Ie 4 In the first column mark the items you want to modify using a set operation H Mises Total number of Rees found 19 Filtered 19 as Actors De Group I issue No Projekt ynopss 2 Valk cda dl 10 Proht enf ach dieere AAA Track a ojeht ex ac near z w Trad y 3311 Projekt einfach Wrberetende Tl D le Tracks R Y au Projekt artach Tapeten aossuchi Copy the selected hemo 3 txpert y 13 Projekt erfad Teppichboden eut y Tracke Print y au Projekt erf ach Zimmer gust ume y Track J Ai Proyebt ew ach Tapete ertfernen A CSV ye Track y 3416 Projekt erbach Elebtrherarbeten XML e Track Y av Projekt eint ach Neue Soddoseri 8 Excel w Track a 18 Projekt caf ach Latung li elektrische Roll Admicro Track Click on the Action button and select Copy set from the menu On the new screen that appears mark
441. w fitos E Manage server Wy User roles Report templates J Cost centers amp accounts ly User roles wg Automall Cost centers amp accoures tink J Aromai 7 e f V Link types V Custom fields ae Custom forms Lists a Custom fields y System statuses o Lists E Workspace types ip System statues FE Workflows Br Workspace types ur Locale editor p Vierifiows E mail templates A Locale editor E mai templates Customizing Teamdesk You can add workflow activity scripts and workflow guard scripts You attach these scripts to workflow transitions when you create or edit workflows A workflow activity script is executed whenever the workflow transition is initiated the script is attached to For example this permits you to automatically change the responsible person or create a child item when an items state is changed from analyzed to assigned A workflow guard script is also executed whenever the workflow transition is initiated the script is attached to The guard script can perform checks and block a workflow transition when it returns false as a result This way you could for example check that the description of an item meets certain standards or that the new responsible does not have too many items to take care of already or some other condition is met before moving an item further in the workflow Cs name Processing Talmplemnented Seript type workfinw Activity script ww Source cade Mpat comune track beans TWorkThrem
442. where you place the property o Note If you mark the property as required and it appears on an input form that is associated with a Create item action the user has to enter a value here If the property does not appear on any form there is no error message If you select Explicit history changes to this item property will be kept separate from other property changes This is only useful if you later on need to analyze the change history for this property If not checked the changes are recorded together with changes to other properties which is typically sufficient and more efficient Fill out the property type specific configuration part for example enter default values or minimum and maximum values Click on the Save button in the toolbar Your new custom property has been added to the Teamdesksystem This property is available to all projects if they like to use it that is even though in this example you defined it at a project level it is automatically propagated to the system level for reuse Note Before you can use your new property you have to add it to at least one input form using the interactive form designer Customizing Teamdesk Overwriting properties You can create variations of properties at the workspace level workspace type level or item type level By overwriting properties you can modify any of the property properties except for its type You can for example change the label selection lists to
443. work steps or actions We use two different approaches modelling workflows The first method is to use the item state property and model a workflow as an UML state diagram for a single item The second approach is to define a workflow as an ordered collection of items each item representing a workflow step or action 2 4 1 Workflows based on UML state diagrams Simple workflows can be modeled as UML state diagrams for a single item An item is moved from one state to the next by means of actions or triggering events Each state represents a workflow station toot Items have a state like new processing or rejected Statuses could also be named according to a location or n w position in the workflow like team leader department leader and human resources for a vacation application Before an item comes into permanent existence it is in an initial state The life cycle of an item ends with the final state Transitions from one state to the next are triggered by events An event can be an explicit action like somebody changed the item state It can also be an indirect action for example a timeout or an action next step Timeouts are helpful to escalate items when they haven t been taken care of within a given time frame 36 2 5 Queries filters views and reports initial transition Figure 2 11 Example UML workflow diagram With each transition you can associate activities These activities are carried
444. workspace in the leftmost navigation area 3 In the second navigation area select Cockpit Teamdesk for space administrators Cockpit yane odos Pind hem gt Reports Administration c Create iem oe Ju My iga J Configure cocipa for workspace Ree coa D Configure cockpit for phases Reet miene coi xus 7 General e y Workepecer Here you configure Che weorkdarcis specific cockqit That ES sh wen when a cat Ue dios Made o i Li UNT Support T Haragi iter Po Bnancen Versaitung E fp P egraton space 2 Custom forms IET een J Leader ceris I virinon U Marketing A Vertrieb uu Texraum compe 4 Toconfigure a workspace specific cockpit click on the button Configure cockpit for workspace in the toolbar To configure a release specific or phase specific cockpit click on the button Configure cockpit for phases in the toolbar 5 Now you can configure the cockpit just like your own The only difference is that automatically a filter is applied to all cockpit tiles that limits the items shown to this workspace and phases 4 8 Version control With Teamdesk you can link files in a version control repository like Subversion GIT or CVS to items Teamdesk scans the repository log files on a regular basis for references to items and automatically creates links for the items Initially the scan takes place every 10 minutes The scan time is measured and the delay between the scans is set to two times the scan tim
445. workspace settings You must be logged in as space administrator system manager or system administrator Teamdesk for space administrators 1 In the top toolbar select Administration gt Workspaces Alternatively click on the Workspaces bar in the left navigation area Cockpit Browse workspaces Find tems v Reports Administration v Creote Bem v Ju Ay Add Workspace fy Add subspar Copy A S DL CTUM gt B ty Kao Roles CBT Support T Retease Customize b 1 UNS gt finaren amp Verwaltung f Marage fiters A Zi Nhrurgiees Report templates 4 beegratiorsraum Ss Custom forms 2 Select a workspace in the leftmost navigation area 3 In the second navigation area click on the node labeled Assign accounts x X Tracks dytin Admiro Hele Log of eo F M d x i nu Cockpt Browse workspoces Fidde v epia Adeirisiratien v track Mere you can configure which Iben types will be available in workspaces of this leave the left column empty if you want bo make all bem types available Asse Ani lots D800 Gerena Expenses 250802 Hi Dereelopment 192001 SW Deesiopment 250810 Construction 50D Test A Inbeoration 280600 Product Management 4 Dragaccounts from the rightmost column labeled Available to the column Assigned to make these accounts available in this workspace To remove an account drag it back from Assigned to Available You can now enter budget and expense information for items in this workspace Wh
446. xt that appears when creating an item and you can define the minimum and maximum length of the property Specific configuration N ttext Default Text lt gt Customizing Teamdesk When you place this property on an input form it will look like shown below Long text for descriptions Long text properties can contain longer descriptions up to many thousands of characters Long texts display as a text area for convenient editing Name Customers Descriptinn You can define a default text that appears when creating an item and you can define the minimum and maximum length of the property Default text Enter text here When you place this property on an input form it will look like shown below Right now we keep the last settings from Create 15 the same settings are used to populate the form wil Could we extend this feature to keep these settings Rich text label Rich text label permits you to show rich text for example a warning If the form contains nothing but a rich text label you will not be able to save it When you place this property on an input form it will look like shown below You should not create this sue Date Date properties contain dates At the user interface the date is formatted according to the users preferred locale Date properties come with a number of options Attribute configuration EndDate Default value You can set the field to contain default values when the user creates a
447. y You can synchronize groups with an LDAP directory see LDAP and SSO configuration 26 2 1 Access control 2 1 5 Permissions Permissions control what information can be accessed Permissions are tied to roles By assigning roles to users in spaces you define the users permissions in that space Users can have multiple roles even in a single space In that case the permissions of all roles in that space add up With permissions you can grant a user space administrator rights or restrict users to see only their own items or only certain item types in certain spaces You can furthermore restrict access to single properties of an item All items in the database System filter based on roles and permissions Query filter Figure 2 4 The permission structure of Teamdesk When spaces are organized hierarchically permissions from superior spaces are automatically transferred to subordinated spaces You do not have to redefine the permissions for lower level projects Related Links Spaces on page 24 Via spaces you structure groups of items and control access to items You can use one space per project or product and you can organize spaces hierarchically Soaces can furthermore be structured on the time axis via phases 2 1 6 Roles If you want to access items in a space you have to have a role in that space Roles are linked to permissions You can carry different roles in the same or different spaces Jl 11
448. y Mytting J Projects Ph Automall ascignanents na M Users groups C Generate iCalendar UBL fea Customize Marchese i 4 actions rf F a E bed Manegeserver E 2 Select the tab labeled Other kal re Access data Kerinder e mails gher settings Onganizanion Lit Loge fle 10 19 15466 Toanirabona uni Domos u Pane Xt ID Hi E wey B Belueviow cod Wester O O ue Ful That e classic 9 e Y 3 In the field set Behaviour mark enable or disable layout When you disable the layout there will be only one layout for all view filters you apply However you can still configure that layout to your liking 47 Teamdesk for team members When you have enabled this feature for each view you apply you will get the item overview in the associated layout When you change the layout the new layout is saved together with your profile in the database Thus it will be available even the next time you log in 3 2 6 Configuring attachment download behavior You can configure how you want to handle attachment downloads Usually the browser can decide whether it displays attachments directly inside the browser window uses a browser plug in or offers a Save at dialog windows 1 In the top toolbar select Administration gt My profile gt My settings A L Adminitrahnn v Create enm e Jy My settings Projects P Automall assignments na M Users groups C Generate iCalendar UBL L
449. y and make them available to all other users of the system that share at least one project with you This is a convenient way to exchange filter expressions with other users in order to later on personalize them If you have project administrator rights in at least one project you may add modify and delete filters from the project repository Members of a project may use project specific filters and can copy them into their own personal repository for modification Entries in the project specific repository list can be filtered by project name All access rights are handled such that only authorized persons can access modify and delete filter definitions in the repositories To get an item overview with a certain filter go to the Action column and click on the little tooth wheel symbol Browse with filter If there are a lot of filters you can limit the view to a selection based on name pattern filter type and repository using the little filter symbol at the top right position of the form 3 4 5 Filter basics There are two types of filters in Teamdesk which can be combined The first type is being assembled by selecting entries for properties and field values the second type permits textual expression of filter conditions and includes full text search capability Logical Expressions View filters consist of two parts The first part is assembled by selecting entries from selection boxes for different item field For example by selecti
450. y of another project Teamdesk does not suppress these links if a project does not have a version control repository set up Enabled and Disabled Buttons For inactive workspaces most buttons are disabled If a project is not in state inactive you have the following options For the Comments tab Add Delete and Edit buttons are always enabled The individual comments are editable and removable by the author and the project administrator For the Attachments tab All buttons are always enabled unless the project is inactive For an inactive project you can only download the attachment For the Work Costs tab Add expense this function is active when the project is active and you have permission add expenses via the role s you have in this project Edit and Delete expense is active when project is in active state You cannot modify or delete expenses if a project has been archived or closed The individual expense entries are editable deletable by the project administrator and the creator of the expense Total Budget button active if you have the modify budget permission via the role s you have in this project Remaining Budge button active if you have the modify budget permission or you are the current responsible or manager of this item For the Watchers tab Add informed Add consulted Delete you have modify watch list permission via the role s you have in this project Remove me as consulted Remove m
451. y the project or system administrator Otherwise you will not be able to access the Work Costs tab You must have been granted the permission to add and modify budgets for items Otherwise you will see the planned value fields deactivated 1 In the tab area at the bottom of the page select tab Work Costs Y History Comments 0 Attachments 0 2 woridog Costs il warchers 0 Links 0 Q Add E Delete y ER k Date Changed by Subject Work h Cost Account Description Total actual work 0 00 Hours Total actual cost 0 00 Work Cont Set by Budget Planned value PV 28 00 Hours Constructa Karta Estimated remaining effort Completan Al expense Esthemated remaining effort 2 Goto the lower part of the panel On the right side there are two little edit icons Click on the icon in the row labeled Planned value PV 3 A pop up window opens Add or modify the planned value enter some description if you like and click the nave button once you are done A new budget has now been assigned to this item The previous budget if any has been recorded in the item history You can at any time override the estimated remaining effort manually 66 3 3 Working with items All parties concerned will receive a notification e mail of this budget change if the Automail system has been configured accordingly Changing estimated remaining effort You can assign an estimated remaining effort to each item in the Teamdesk
452. you rename an entry the change may not be reflected at the user interface This happens when you have specific localizations for the selection entries which is the case for all predefined entries In this case the localized values will be shown and not the label you define here Managing severities Severity or criticality defines how expensive it would be if this item would not be taken care of You can add delete and modify the list of available severities For each item type workspace type or workspace you can select which severities will be actually available at the user interface You must be logged in as system manager or system administrator The warning level is used by the automail notification engine In your user profile you can set the level beyond which you want to be notified of changes to items 1 In the top toolbar select Administration gt Customize gt Lists Alternatively click on the Customize Lists bar in the left navigation area Y al oe Mod amp erm Reports Qi Seba ls NE works spec iens AL Tracke Sytem Admini L Adminin Croata ere E Meti SO EP u selection lists There are some predefined opstern Ests Be Rem si ME Users groups je any number of custom selection lets either at the global level vis HT Menege ers p mouse conbext click right mous Actions POLA Report templates E Manageserrer Cs User roles E Cost center A accounts J Automail Link types sso C
453. ypes not every state out of the set of possible states may make sense It is up to the definition of a specific project how to use the possibilities the Teamdesk system offers You can limit the set of states for each project type and item type For example for milestone lists two states might suffice opened and closed We will later on explain how to assign property option values to item types and project types During the life cycle of an item it is quite common that it changes its type For example a problem report could result in an implementation error after the report has been analyzed Teamdesk makes it easy to move items between item types 1 In the top toolbar select Administration gt Customize gt Lists Alternatively click on the Customize Lists bar in the left navigation area A Tracks Sytem Administ j Y au s La Cockpit Browne veoriapacns Mod Rees w Reports Adminin we Costa erm gt Ly My settings Jy My settings jo Werispants os less A e selection lists There are some predefined oystem lists lie item g q User A groups Dustperiza T Hamag Filters Repat templates Vp Uber es WS Worequer specific ines Hl Users A groups id any number of custom selection lite either at the global level vie uem E aa p mouse context click right mous Report templates User rodea Eo Cot centers accounts tr Actium Manage server gt d J Avtomail T Cmi coios A coords g Aiya w Linh hp E Carti
454. ystem administrator Warning The delete operation for a release is not reversible 1 In the top toolbar select Administration gt Workspaces Alternatively click on the Workspaces bar in the left navigation area 2 Select a workspace in the leftmost navigation area Teamdesk for space administrators 3 Select the Assign roles node in the second navigation area from the left eo Le T d A a A Trake System Adminitraor Hep Log off ld Coxkp Broweworkspas Findiems y Reports Adernatration v Create Ram v track Ju My settings i7 wetepaus Y Orestes Drag one or more users from the list on the right to the left column to assign m as La nwgn Rotes de bten them roia Responsible for workspace Integration space CBT Support N Release Us informed Usts y Kunde Finanzen amp Verworung Y Manage fiters y Manager 2 Name Organizational ur Group Name Organizational ur Group EZO o Administrator fup Mo AA Md he e TT Helpdesk Custom forms DT Responsible 3 Boss Dan cro Ne me User Construction No J Leader circle J Custom fields Coder Rarbara SW Deve No x Uum No gt Marketing R Vertrieb PO Woiktows ox Used No 4 Selectthe releases node in the second navigation area from the left This node will only appear if the workspace type this workspace belongs to has releases enabled will o9 Pa Y AT A Cochqit Broweur ordre Fired ium e Papper tn Feiminnisaten gt

Teamdesk User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents